# echo DEVELOPER=yes >> /etc/make.conf
FreeBSD Porter 手冊
This translation may be out of date. To help with the translations please access the FreeBSD translations instance.
註冊商標
FreeBSD 是 FreeBSD 基金會的註冊商標。
Sun, Sun Microsystems, Java, Java Virtual Machine, JDK, JRE, JSP, JVM, Netra, OpenJDK, Solaris, StarOffice, SunOS 以及 VirtualBox 是 Sun Microsystems, Inc. 在美國和其他國家的商標或註冊商標。
Motif, OSF/1 以及 UNIX 是 The Open Group 在美國和其他國家的註冊商標; IT DialTone 和 The Open Group 是其商標。
許多製造商和經銷商使用一些稱為商標的圖案或文字設計來區別自己的產品。 本文件中出現的眾多商標,以及 FreeBSD Project 本身廣所人知的商標,後面將以 “™” 或 “®” 符號來標示。
目錄
Chapter 1. 楔子
幾乎每個 FreeBSD 愛用者都是透過 FreeBSD Ports Collection 來裝各式應用程式("ports")。如同 FreeBSD 的其他部分一樣, 這些 ports 都主要來自許多志工的努力成果,所以在閱讀這份文件時, 請務必感恩在心。
在 FreeBSD 上面,每個人都可以提交新的 port, 或假如該 port 並沒有人維護的話,可以自願維護 —— 這點並不需要任何 commit 的權限,就可以來做這件事情。
Chapter 2. 製作新的 Port
開始對製作新的 port 或更新現有 port 有一些興趣了嗎?太好囉!
下面將介紹一些建立 port 時該注意的事項。如果是想升級現有的 port ,那麼也請參閱 Upgrading a Port 說明。
因為這份文件可能講得不是十分詳細,可能需要參考 /usr/ports/Mk/bsd.port.mk 這檔是所有 port 的 Makefile 檔都會用到的。就算你不是每天不斷 hacking Makefile,也可以也可以從中獲得很多相關知識。 此外,若有其他特定 port 的問題,也可以到 FreeBSD ports mailing list 來獲得答案。
想要找簡單的開始上手嗎? 到 請求協助的 ports 清單 瞧瞧,看看是否有你可以幫上忙的。
Chapter 3. 打造 Port 快速上手篇
本節主要介紹如何來快速打造 port,然而實際應用時這快速方法可能不足,完整的 "慢速打造 Port" 的步驟在 Slow Porting 詳述。
首先取得該應用程式的原始程式碼壓縮檔(tarball),並把它放到 DISTDIR
,預設路徑應該是 /usr/ports/distfiles.
這些步驟假設軟體可以直接編譯。也就是不需要任何修改就可以直接在 FreeBSD 上執行。如果需要修改,請參見Slow Porting。 |
在 porting 之前,建議在 /etc/make.conf 設定 這個設定開啟了 "developer mode" ,顯示已棄用警告並在使用 |
3.1. 編寫 Makefile
最簡單的 Makefile 大概是像這樣:
# $FreeBSD: head/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/porters-handbook/book.xml 48496 2016-03-29 01:37:53Z kevlo $ PORTNAME= oneko PORTVERSION= 1.1b CATEGORIES= games MASTER_SITES= ftp://ftp.cs.columbia.edu/archives/X11R5/contrib/ MAINTAINER= youremail@example.com COMMENT= Cat chasing a mouse all over the screen .include <bsd.port.mk>
嘗試了解此檔案,有關這點的細節部份,可以參閱 sample Makefile 章節。
3.2. 撰寫說明檔
無論是否打算再加工做成 package,有兩個檔案是任何 port 都必須要具備的。 這兩個檔分別是 pkg-descr 及 pkg-plist 。 他們檔名前面都有 pkg- 以跟其他檔案做區別。
3.2.1. pkg-descr
這是此 port 的詳細說明檔,請用一段或幾段文字來說明該 port 的作用
請注意,這檔_絕非_「該軟體的說明手冊」或是「如何編譯、使用該 port 的說明」! 若是從該軟體的 README 或 manpage 直接複製過來的話,請注意。他們常常不是正確的 port 描述或是格式並不適合。例如,manpage會對齊空白,這用monospace字型來看會特別糟糕。 另一方面, pkg-descr 的內容必須比 COMMENT line from the Makefile 還要詳細,要能詳細解釋此 port 相關的內容。 |
一個良好的 pkg-descr 可以讓使用者清楚的了解軟體的功能而無須查詢文件或者訪問網站,提及特定的需求像是圖形工具、依賴、執行的環境跟實作的語言,能大大的幫助使用者了解這個 port 是怎麼運作的。
過去在 pkg-descr 文件最後一行引入的 URL 已經移到 Makefile 裡面了。 |
3.2.2. pkg-plist
這是該 port 所會裝的所有檔案清單,另外因為 package 會由這清單所產生,因此也被稱為『"packing list (打包清單)"』。路徑是相對於安裝的 prefix (通常是 /usr/local )。
這是一個簡單的例子:
bin/oneko man/man1/oneko.1.gz lib/X11/app-defaults/Oneko lib/X11/oneko/cat1.xpm lib/X11/oneko/cat2.xpm lib/X11/oneko/mouse.xpm
關於 packing list 方面,可以詳閱 pkg-create(8) manual page 。
建議清單內的檔名,依照字母順序作排序,那麼下次要升級時, 會比較清楚、方便來更新這份清單。 |
手動產生這份清單實在太苦了。尤其若該 port 會裝一大堆檔案的話, 請多善用 自動產生 packing list 會比較省時省力唷。 |
只有在一種情況下可以省略 pkg-plist 檔: 若安裝的 port 相當單純,只有裝一些檔案,那麼可以在 Makefile 內改用 PLIST_FILES
來取代。 比如,可以在上述的 oneko port 內不必附上 pkg-plist ,而只需在 Makefile 內加入下列幾行:
PLIST_FILES= bin/oneko \ man/man1/oneko.1.gz \ lib/X11/app-defaults/Oneko \ lib/X11/oneko/cat1.xpm \ lib/X11/oneko/cat2.xpm \ lib/X11/oneko/mouse.xpm
|
如果 port 需要創建空的目錄,或者安裝時在 ${PREFIX} 之外創建目錄,請參考 Cleaning Up Empty Directories 來獲得更多資訊。 |
因為 PLIST_FILES= "@sample ${ETCDIR}/oneko.conf.sample" |
後面會介紹到如何運用 pkg-plist、 PLIST_FILES
這些技巧以因應更複雜的狀況。
3.4. 測試 Port
接下來,必須檢驗是否有符合 port 的遊戲規則,包括打包該 port 為 package。 以下有幾個需要確認的重要地方:
若該 port 沒裝的東西,不要列在 pkg-plist 內。
若該 port 有裝的東西,請務必列在 pkg-plist 內。
port 可以透過
install
來安裝,這可以確保安裝的 script 是正常運作的。port 可以透過
uninstall
來移除,這可以確保安裝的 script 是正常運作的。port 只有在
featch
目標時才能使用網路,這對 package builders 很重要,像是 ports-mgmt/poudriere.確保
make package
可以被一般使用者執行 (也就是說,非root
使用者),如果上述執行失敗,軟體很可能需要修改,請參考fakeroot
和uidfix
。
Procedure: 建議的測試順序
make stage
make check-orphans
make package
make install
make deinstall
pkg add package-filename
make package
(as user)
確認在任何階段都沒有任何警告出現。
可以透過 ports-mgmt/tinderbox 或者 Ports Collection 的 ports-mgmt/poudriere 工具來完成自動化測試,參考 Poudriere 獲得更多的資訊。她維護 jails
,可以在不影響系統的情況下執行上述所有的測試。
3.5. 以 portlint
來作檢查 Port
請用 portlint
來檢查該 port 是否有遵循我們的規則。 ports-mgmt/portlint 是 ports collection 的其中一個套件。 它主要可以用來檢驗 Makefile 內容是否正確以及 package 是否有正確命名。
不要盲目的相信 |
3.6. 提交新的 Port
提交新的 Port 前,請閱讀 DOs and DON’Ts 章節。
現在你很高興終於打造出 port 來囉,唯一剩下要做的就是把它正式放到 FreeBSD ports tree 內,才能讓每個人都能分享使用這個 port。
我們不需要 work 目錄或是檔名像 pkgname.tgz 的 package ,請現在刪除他們。 |
下一步,創建一個 patch(1) ,一個文件,假設此 port 叫做 oneko
並且屬於 games
類別。
透過 git add .
加入所有的檔案,然後透過 git diff
來檢查不同處,如下。
% git add .
% git diff --staged
確保所有需要的檔案都被引入了,將更改提交到你本地分支並使用 git format-patch
產生 patch。
% git commit
% git format-patch origin/main
使用 git format-patch
產生的 patch 會包含作者以及電子郵件,讓其他開發者更容易使用 (with git am
) 以及給予回饋。
透過 bug submission form 繳交 oneko.diff 。使用 "Ports & Packages" 產品和 "Individual Port(s)" 組件,然後跟著這裡的教學走,在 PR 的描述欄位 (也許是較短的 COMMENT
) 加入簡短的敘述,並且記得在附件中加入 oneko.diff 。
在問題回報系統中給一個好的總結可以讓 port 開發者更輕鬆的處理此 port ,我們預期的描述形式為 "[NEW PORT] category/portname short description of the port" ,使用此形式能讓我們更快的部屬新的 port 。 |
送出 port 之後,請耐心等候佳音。 有時候可能需要等個幾天或幾個月時間,才會在 FreeBSD ports tree 上正式出現。 等待中的 port PR 清單可以在 http://www.FreeBSD.org/cgi/query-pr-summary.cgi?category=ports 查閱。
在搜尋表單中選擇 Open and Ports & Packages 來獲得 open port PRs 的清單。
在看過新的 port 之後,如果需要的話,我們會回覆您,然後會將它提交到 port tree 。 您的大名會被列在 Additional FreeBSD Contributors 列表上,以及其他檔案中。
也可以透過 shar(1) 檔案來提交 port ,請使用之前 oneko
port 的例子。
前往 port 所在的目錄,使用 `tar`創建 shar archive:
% cd ..
% tar cf oneko.shar --format shar oneko
可以使用跟提交 oneko.diff 一樣的方式來提交 oneko.shar 。
Chapter 4. Slow Porting
Ok…事實上並不太可能這麼簡單,port 方面可能需要作些修改才能正常使用。 因此, 本節將一步一步來介紹如何修改上一章的樣本以正常使用。
4.1. How Things Work
First, this is the sequence of events which occurs when the user first types make
in the port’s directory. Having bsd.port.mk in another window while reading this really helps to understand it.
別太擔心,不是很多人都真的了解 bsd.port.mk 在做什麼… :-)
The
fetch
target is run. Thefetch
target is responsible for making sure that the tarball exists locally inDISTDIR
. Iffetch
cannot find the required files inDISTDIR
it will look up the URLMASTER_SITES
, which is set in the Makefile, as well as our FTP mirrors where we put distfiles as backup. It will then attempt to fetch the named distribution file withFETCH
, assuming that the requesting site has direct access to the Internet. If that succeeds, it will save the file inDISTDIR
for future use and proceed.The
extract
target is run. It looks for the port’s distribution file (typically a compressed tarball) inDISTDIR
and unpacks it into a temporary subdirectory specified byWRKDIR
(defaults to work).The
patch
target is run. First, any patches defined inPATCHFILES
are applied. Second, if any patch files named patch-* are found inPATCHDIR
(defaults to the files subdirectory), they are applied at this time in alphabetical order.The
configure
target is run. This can do any one of many different things.If it exists, scripts/configure is run.
If
HAS_CONFIGURE
orGNU_CONFIGURE
is set, WRKSRC/configure is run.
The
build
target is run. This is responsible for descending into the port’s private working directory (WRKSRC
) and building it.The
stage
target is run. This puts the final set of built files into a temporary directory (STAGEDIR
, see Staging). The hierarchy of this directory mirrors that of the system on which the package will be installed.The
package
target is run. This creates a package using the files from the temporary directory created during thestage
target and the port’s pkg-plist.The
install
target is run. This installs the package created during thepackage
target into the host system.
The above are the default actions. In addition, define targets pre-something
or post-something
, or put scripts with those names, in the scripts subdirectory, and they will be run before or after the default actions are done.
For example, if there is a post-extract
target defined in the Makefile, and a file pre-build in the scripts subdirectory, the post-extract
target will be called after the regular extraction actions, and pre-build will be executed before the default build rules are done. It is recommended to use Makefile targets if the actions are simple enough, because it will be easier for someone to figure out what kind of non-default action the port requires.
The default actions are done by the do-something
targets from bsd.port.mk. For example, the commands to extract a port are in the target do-extract
. If the default target does not do the job right, redefine the do-something
target in the Makefile.
The "main" targets (for example, |
Now that what goes on when the user types make install
is better understood, let us go through the recommended steps to create the perfect port.
4.2. 取得原始碼
Get the original sources (normally) as a compressed tarball (foo.tar.gz or foo.tar.bz2) and copy it into DISTDIR
. Always use mainstream sources when and where possible.
Set the variable MASTER_SITES
to reflect where the original tarball resides. Shorthand definitions exist for most mainstream sites in bsd.sites.mk. Please use these sites-and the associated definitions-if at all possible, to help avoid the problem of having the same information repeated over again many times in the source base. As these sites tend to change over time, this becomes a maintenance nightmare for everyone involved. See MASTER_SITES for details.
If there is no FTP/HTTP site that is well-connected to the net, or can only find sites that have irritatingly non-standard formats, put a copy on a reliable FTP or HTTP server (for example, a home page).
If a convenient and reliable place to put the distfile cannot be found, we can "house" it ourselves on ftp.FreeBSD.org
; however, this is the least-preferred solution. The distfile must be placed into ~/public_distfiles/ of someone’s freefall
account. Ask the person who commits the port to do this. This person will also set MASTER_SITES
to LOCAL/username
where username
is their FreeBSD cluster login.
If the port’s distfile changes all the time without any kind of version update by the author, consider putting the distfile on a home page and listing it as the first MASTER_SITES
. Try to talk the port author out of doing this; it really does help to establish some kind of source code control. Hosting a specific version will prevent users from getting checksum mismatch
errors, and also reduce the workload of maintainers of our FTP site. Also, if there is only one master site for the port, it is recommended to house a backup on a home page and list it as the second MASTER_SITES
.
If the port requires additional patches that are available on the Internet, fetch them too and put them in DISTDIR
. Do not worry if they come from a site other than where the main source tarball comes, we have a way to handle these situations (see the description of PATCHFILES below).
4.3. Modifying the Port
Unpack a copy of the tarball in a private directory and make whatever changes are necessary to get the port to compile properly under the current version of FreeBSD. Keep careful track of steps, as they will be needed to automate the process shortly. Everything, including the deletion, addition, or modification of files has to be doable using an automated script or patch file when the port is finished.
If the port requires significant user interaction/customization to compile or install, take a look at one of Larry Wall’s classic Configure scripts and perhaps do something similar. The goal of the new ports collection is to make each port as "plug-and-play" as possible for the end-user while using a minimum of disk space.
Unless explicitly stated, patch files, scripts, and other files created and contributed to the FreeBSD ports collection are assumed to be covered by the standard BSD copyright conditions. |
4.4. Patching
In the preparation of the port, files that have been added or changed can be recorded with diff(1) for later feeding to patch(1). Doing this with a typical file involves saving a copy of the original file before making any changes using a .orig suffix.
% cp file file.orig
After all changes have been made, cd
back to the port directory. Use make makepatch
to generate updated patch files in the files directory.
Use |
4.4.1. General Rules for Patching
Patch files are stored in PATCHDIR
, usually files/, from where they will be automatically applied. All patches must be relative to WRKSRC
. Typically WRKSRC
is a subdirectory of WRKDIR
, the directory where the distfile is extracted. Use make -V WRKSRC
to see the actual path. The patch names are to follow these rules:
Avoid having more than one patch modify the same file. For example, having both patch-foobar.c and patch-foobar.c2 making changes to ${WRKSRC}/foobar.c makes them fragile and difficult to debug.
When creating names for patch files, replace each underscore (
_
) with two underscores (__
) and each slash (/
) with one underscore (_
). For example, to patch a file named src/freeglut_joystick.c, name the corresponding patch patch-src_freeglut__joystick.c. Do not name patches like patch-aa or patch-ab. Always use the path and file name in patch names. Usingmake makepatch
automatically generates the correct names.A patch may modify multiple files if the changes are related and the patch is named appropriately. For example, patch-add-missing-stdlib.h.
Only use characters
[-+._a-zA-Z0-9]
for naming patches. In particular, do not use::
as a path separator, use_
instead.
Minimize the amount of non-functional whitespace changes in patches. It is common in the Open Source world for projects to share large amounts of a code base, but obey different style and indenting rules. When taking a working piece of functionality from one project to fix similar areas in another, please be careful: the resulting patch may be full of non-functional changes. It not only increases the size of the ports repository but makes it hard to find out what exactly caused the problem and what was changed at all.
If a file must be deleted, do it in the post-extract
target rather than as part of the patch.
4.4.2. Manual Patch Generation
Manual patch creation is usually not necessary. Automatic patch generation as described earlier in this section is the preferred method. However, manual patching may be required occasionally. |
Patches are saved into files named patch-* where * indicates the pathname of the file that is patched, such as patch-Imakefile or patch-src-config.h.
After the file has been modified, diff(1) is used to record the differences between the original and the modified version. -u
causes diff(1) to produce "unified" diffs, the preferred form.
% diff -u file.orig file > patch-pathname-file
When generating patches for new, added files, -N
is used to tell diff(1) to treat the non-existent original file as if it existed but was empty:
% diff -u -N newfile.orig newfile > patch-pathname-newfile
Do not add $FreeBSD$
RCS strings in patches. When patches are added to the Subversion repository with svn add
, the fbsd:nokeywords
property is set to yes
automatically so keywords in the patch are not modified when committed. The property can be added manually with svn propset fbsd:nokeywords yes files…
.
Using the recurse (-r
) option to diff(1) to generate patches is fine, but please look at the resulting patches to make sure there is no unnecessary junk in there. In particular, diffs between two backup files, Makefiles when the port uses Imake
or GNU configure
, etc., are unnecessary and have to be deleted. If it was necessary to edit configure.in and run autoconf
to regenerate configure
, do not take the diffs of configure
(it often grows to a few thousand lines!). Instead, define USES=autoreconf
and take the diffs of configure.in.
4.4.3. Simple Automatic Replacements
Simple replacements can be performed directly from the port Makefile using the in-place mode of sed(1). This is useful when changes use the value of a variable:
post-patch: @${REINPLACE_CMD} -e 's|/usr/local|${PREFIX}|g' ${WRKSRC}/Makefile
Quite often, software being ported uses the CR/LF convention in source files. This may cause problems with further patching, compiler warnings, or script execution (like /bin/sh^M not found
.) To quickly convert all files from CR/LF to just LF, add this entry to the port Makefile:
USES= dos2unix
A list of specific files to convert can be given:
USES= dos2unix DOS2UNIX_FILES= util.c util.h
Use DOS2UNIX_REGEX
to convert a group of files across subdirectories. Its argument is a find(1)-compatible regular expression. More on the format is in re_format(7). This option is useful for converting all files of a given extension. For example, convert all source code files, leaving binary files intact:
USES= dos2unix DOS2UNIX_REGEX= .*\.([ch]|cpp)
A similar option is DOS2UNIX_GLOB
, which runs find
for each element listed in it.
USES= dos2unix DOS2UNIX_GLOB= *.c *.cpp *.h
The base directory for the conversion can be set. This is useful when there are multiple distfiles and several contain files which require line-ending conversion.
USES= dos2unix DOS2UNIX_WRKSRC= ${WRKDIR}
4.4.4. Patching Conditionally
Some ports need patches that are only applied for specific FreeBSD versions or when a particular option is enabled or disabled. Conditional patches are specified by placing the full paths to the patch files in EXTRA_PATCHES
.
.include <bsd.port.options.mk> # Patch in the iconv const qualifier before this .if ${OPSYS} == FreeBSD && ${OSVERSION} < 1100069 EXTRA_PATCHES= ${PATCHDIR}/extra-patch-fbsd10 .endif .include <bsd.port.mk>
When an option requires a patch, use opt_EXTRA_PATCHES
and opt_EXTRA_PATCHES_OFF
to make the patch conditional on the opt
option. See Generic Variables Replacement for more information.
OPTIONS_DEFINE= FOO BAR FOO_EXTRA_PATCHES= ${PATCHDIR}/extra-patch-foo BAR_EXTRA_PATCHES_OFF= ${PATCHDIR}/extra-patch-bar.c \ ${PATCHDIR}/extra-patch-bar.h
EXTRA_PATCHES
With a DirectorySometime, there are many patches that are needed for a feature, in this case, it is possible to point EXTRA_PATCHES
to a directory, and it will automatically apply all files named patch-* in it.
Create a subdirectory in ${PATCHDIR}, and move the patches in it. For example:
% ls -l files/foo-patches
-rw-r--r-- 1 root wheel 350 Jan 16 01:27 patch-Makefile.in
-rw-r--r-- 1 root wheel 3084 Jan 18 15:37 patch-configure
Then add this to the Makefile:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= FOO FOO_EXTRA_PATCHES= ${PATCHDIR}/foo-patches
The framework will then use all the files named patch-* in that directory.
4.5. 設定
Include any additional customization commands in the configure script and save it in the scripts subdirectory. As mentioned above, it is also possible do this with Makefile targets and/or scripts with the name pre-configure or post-configure.
4.6. 處理使用者輸入
If the port requires user input to build, configure, or install, set IS_INTERACTIVE
in the Makefile. This will allow "overnight builds" to skip it. If the user sets the variable BATCH
in their environment (and if the user sets the variable INTERACTIVE
, then only those ports requiring interaction are built). This will save a lot of wasted time on the set of machines that continually build ports (see below).
It is also recommended that if there are reasonable default answers to the questions, PACKAGE_BUILDING
be used to turn off the interactive script when it is set. This will allow us to build the packages for CDROMs and FTP.
Chapter 5. Configuring the Makefile
Configuring the Makefile is pretty simple, and again we suggest looking at existing examples before starting. Also, there is a sample Makefile in this handbook, so take a look and please follow the ordering of variables and sections in that template to make the port easier for others to read.
Consider these problems in sequence during the design of the new Makefile:
5.1. The Original Source
Does it live in DISTDIR
as a standard gzip
ped tarball named something like foozolix-1.2.tar.gz? If so, go on to the next step.
If not, the distribution file format might require overriding one or more of DISTVERSION
, DISTNAME
, EXTRACT_CMD
, EXTRACT_BEFORE_ARGS
, EXTRACT_AFTER_ARGS
, EXTRACT_SUFX
, or DISTFILES
.
In the worst case, create a custom do-extract
target to override the default.
This is rarely, if ever, necessary.
5.2. Naming
The first part of the port’s Makefile names the port, describes its version number, and lists it in the correct category.
5.2.1. PORTNAME
Set PORTNAME
to the base name of the software.
It is used as the base for the FreeBSD package, and for DISTNAME
.
The package name must be unique across the entire ports tree.
Make sure that the |
5.2.2. Versions, DISTVERSION
or PORTVERSION
Set DISTVERSION
to the version number of the software.
PORTVERSION
is the version used for the FreeBSD package.
It will be automatically derived from DISTVERSION
to be compatible with FreeBSD’s package versioning scheme.
If the version contains letters, it might be needed to set PORTVERSION
and not DISTVERSION
.
Only one of |
From time to time, some software will use a version scheme that is not compatible with how DISTVERSION
translates in PORTVERSION
.
When updating a port, it is possible to use pkg-version(8)'s |
pkg version -t
takes two versions as arguments, it will respond with <
, =
or >
if the first version is less, equal, or more than the second version, respectively.
% pkg version -t 1.2 1.3
< (1)
% pkg version -t 1.2 1.2
= (2)
% pkg version -t 1.2 1.2.0
= (3)
% pkg version -t 1.2 1.2.p1
> (4)
% pkg version -t 1.2.a1 1.2.b1
< (5)
% pkg version -t 1.2 1.2p1
< (6)
1 | 1.2 is before 1.3 . |
2 | 1.2 and 1.2 are equal as they have the same version. |
3 | 1.2 and 1.2.0 are equal as nothing equals zero. |
4 | 1.2 is after 1.2.p1 as .p1 , think "pre-release 1". |
5 | 1.2.a1 is before 1.2.b1 , think "alpha" and "beta", and a is before b . |
6 | 1.2 is before 1.2p1 as 2p1 , think "2, patch level 1" which is a version after any 2.X but before 3 . |
DISTVERSION | PORTVERSION |
---|---|
0.7.1d | 0.7.1.d |
10Alpha3 | 10.a3 |
3Beta7-pre2 | 3.b7.p2 |
8:f_17 | 8f.17 |
DISTVERSION
When the version only contains numbers separated by dots, dashes or underscores, use DISTVERSION
.
PORTNAME= nekoto DISTVERSION= 1.2-4
It will generate a PORTVERSION
of 1.2.4
.
DISTVERSION
When the Version Starts with a Letter or a PrefixWhen the version starts or ends with a letter, or a prefix or a suffix that is not part of the version, use DISTVERSIONPREFIX
, DISTVERSION
, and DISTVERSIONSUFFIX
.
If the version is v1.2-4
:
PORTNAME= nekoto DISTVERSIONPREFIX= v DISTVERSION= 1_2_4
Some of the time, projects using GitHub will use their name in their versions.
For example, the version could be nekoto-1.2-4
:
PORTNAME= nekoto DISTVERSIONPREFIX= nekoto- DISTVERSION= 1.2_4
Those projects also sometimes use some string at the end of the version, for example, 1.2-4_RELEASE
:
PORTNAME= nekoto DISTVERSION= 1.2-4 DISTVERSIONSUFFIX= _RELEASE
Or they do both, for example, nekoto-1.2-4_RELEASE
:
PORTNAME= nekoto DISTVERSIONPREFIX= nekoto- DISTVERSION= 1.2-4 DISTVERSIONSUFFIX= _RELEASE
DISTVERSIONPREFIX
and DISTVERSIONSUFFIX
will not be used while constructing PORTVERSION
, but only used in DISTNAME
.
All will generate a PORTVERSION
of 1.2.4
.
DISTVERSION
When the Version Contains Letters Meaning "alpha", "beta", or "pre-release"When the version contains numbers separated by dots, dashes or underscores, and letters are used to mean "alpha", "beta" or "pre-release", which is, before the version without the letters, use DISTVERSION
.
PORTNAME= nekoto DISTVERSION= 1.2-pre4
PORTNAME= nekoto DISTVERSION= 1.2p4
Both will generate a PORTVERSION
of 1.2.p4
which is before than 1.2. pkg-version(8) can be used to check that fact:
% pkg version -t 1.2.p4 1.2
<
DISTVERSION
When the Version Contains Letters Meaning "Patch Level"When the version contains letters that are not meant as "alpha", "beta", or "pre", but more in a "patch level", and meaning after the version without the letters, use PORTVERSION
.
PORTNAME= nekoto PORTVERSION= 1.2p4
In this case, using DISTVERSION
is not possible because it would generate a version of 1.2.p4
which would be before 1.2
and not after.
pkg-version(8) will verify this:
% pkg version -t 1.2 1.2.p4
> (1)
% pkg version -t 1.2 1.2p4
< (2)
1 | 1.2 is after 1.2.p4 , which is wrong in this case. |
2 | 1.2 is before 1.2p4 , which is what was needed. |
For some more advanced examples of setting PORTVERSION
, when the software’s versioning is really not compatible with FreeBSD’s, or DISTNAME
when the distribution file does not contain the version itself, see DISTNAME
.
5.2.3. PORTREVISION
and PORTEPOCH
5.2.3.1. PORTREVISION
PORTREVISION
is a monotonically increasing value which is reset to 0 with every increase of DISTVERSION
, typically every time there is a new official vendor release. If PORTREVISION
is non-zero, the value is appended to the package name.
Changes to PORTREVISION
are used by automated tools like pkg-version(8) to determine that a new package is available.
PORTREVISION
must be increased each time a change is made to the port that changes the generated package in any way.
That includes changes that only affect a package built with non-default options.
Examples of when PORTREVISION
must be bumped:
Addition of patches to correct security vulnerabilities, bugs, or to add new functionality to the port.
Changes to the port Makefile to enable or disable compile-time options in the package.
Changes in the packing list or the install-time behavior of the package. For example, a change to a script which generates initial data for the package, like ssh(1) host keys.
Version bump of a port’s shared library dependency (in this case, someone trying to install the old package after installing a newer version of the dependency will fail since it will look for the old libfoo.x instead of libfoo.(x+1)).
Silent changes to the port distfile which have significant functional differences. For example, changes to the distfile requiring a correction to distinfo with no corresponding change to
DISTVERSION
, where adiff -ru
of the old and new versions shows non-trivial changes to the code.
Examples of changes which do not require a PORTREVISION
bump:
Style changes to the port skeleton with no functional change to what appears in the resulting package.
Changes to
MASTER_SITES
or other functional changes to the port which do not affect the resulting package.Trivial patches to the distfile such as correction of typos, which are not important enough that users of the package have to go to the trouble of upgrading.
Build fixes which cause a package to become compilable where it was previously failing. As long as the changes do not introduce any functional change on any other platforms on which the port did previously build. Since
PORTREVISION
reflects the content of the package, if the package was not previously buildable then there is no need to increasePORTREVISION
to mark a change.
A rule of thumb is to decide whether a change committed to a port is something which some people would benefit from having.
Either because of an enhancement, fix, or by virtue that the new package will actually work at all.
Then weigh that against that fact that it will cause everyone who regularly updates their ports tree to be compelled to update.
If yes, PORTREVISION
must be bumped.
People using binary packages will never see the update if |
5.2.3.2. PORTEPOCH
From time to time a software vendor or FreeBSD porter will do something silly and release a version of their software which is actually numerically less than the previous version. An example of this is a port which goes from foo-20000801 to foo-1.0 (the former will be incorrectly treated as a newer version since 20000801 is a numerically greater value than 1).
The results of version number comparisons are not always obvious.
The |
In situations such as this, PORTEPOCH
must be increased.
If PORTEPOCH
is nonzero it is appended to the package name as described in section 0 above.
PORTEPOCH
must never be decreased or reset to zero, because that would cause comparison to a package from an earlier epoch to fail.
For example, the package would not be detected as out of date.
The new version number, 1.0,1
in the above example, is still numerically less than the previous version, 20000801, but the ,1
suffix is treated specially by automated tools and found to be greater than the implied suffix ,0
on the earlier package.
Dropping or resetting PORTEPOCH
incorrectly leads to no end of grief.
If the discussion above was not clear enough, please consult the FreeBSD ports 郵遞論壇.
It is expected that PORTEPOCH
will not be used for the majority of ports, and that sensible use of DISTVERSION
, or that use PORTVERSION
carefully, can often preempt it becoming necessary if a future release of the software changes the version structure.
However, care is needed by FreeBSD porters when a vendor release is made without an official version number - such as a code "snapshot" release.
The temptation is to label the release with the release date, which will cause problems as in the example above when a new "official" release is made.
For example, if a snapshot release is made on the date 20000917
, and the previous version of the software was version 1.2
, do not use 20000917
for DISTVERSION
.
The correct way is a DISTVERSION
of 1.2.20000917
, or similar, so that the succeeding release, say 1.3
, is still a numerically greater value.
5.2.3.3. Example of PORTREVISION
and PORTEPOCH
Usage
The gtkmumble
port, version 0.10
, is committed to the ports collection:
PORTNAME= gtkmumble DISTVERSION= 0.10
PKGNAME
becomes gtkmumble-0.10
.
A security hole is discovered which requires a local FreeBSD patch.
PORTREVISION
is bumped accordingly.
PORTNAME= gtkmumble DISTVERSION= 0.10 PORTREVISION= 1
PKGNAME
becomes gtkmumble-0.10_1
A new version is released by the vendor, numbered 0.2
(it turns out the author actually intended 0.10
to actually mean 0.1.0
, not "what comes after 0.9" - oops, too late now).
Since the new minor version 2
is numerically less than the previous version 10
, PORTEPOCH
must be bumped to manually force the new package to be detected as "newer".
Since it is a new vendor release of the code, PORTREVISION
is reset to 0 (or removed from the Makefile).
PORTNAME= gtkmumble DISTVERSION= 0.2 PORTEPOCH= 1
PKGNAME
becomes gtkmumble-0.2,1
The next release is 0.3.
Since PORTEPOCH
never decreases, the version variables are now:
PORTNAME= gtkmumble DISTVERSION= 0.3 PORTEPOCH= 1
PKGNAME
becomes gtkmumble-0.3,1
If |
5.2.4. PKGNAMEPREFIX
and PKGNAMESUFFIX
Two optional variables, PKGNAMEPREFIX
and PKGNAMESUFFIX
, are combined with PORTNAME
and PORTVERSION
to form PKGNAME
as ${PKGNAMEPREFIX}${PORTNAME}${PKGNAMESUFFIX}-${PORTVERSION}
.
Make sure this conforms to our guidelines for a good package name.
In particular, the use of a hyphen (-
) in PORTVERSION
is not allowed.
Also, if the package name has the language- or the -compiled.specifics part (see below), use PKGNAMEPREFIX
and PKGNAMESUFFIX
, respectively.
Do not make them part of PORTNAME
.
5.2.5. Package Naming Conventions
These are the conventions to follow when naming packages. This is to make the package directory easy to scan, as there are already thousands of packages and users are going to turn away if they hurt their eyes!
Package names take the form of language_region-name-compiled.specifics-version.numbers.
The package name is defined as ${PKGNAMEPREFIX}${PORTNAME}${PKGNAMESUFFIX}-${PORTVERSION}
.
Make sure to set the variables to conform to that format.
- language_region-
FreeBSD strives to support the native language of its users. The language- part is a two letter abbreviation of the natural language defined by ISO-639 when the port is specific to a certain language. Examples are
ja
for Japanese,ru
for Russian,vi
for Vietnamese,zh
for Chinese,ko
for Korean andde
for German.If the port is specific to a certain region within the language area, add the two letter country code as well. Examples are
en_US
for US English andfr_CH
for Swiss French.The language- part is set in
PKGNAMEPREFIX
.
- name
Make sure that the port’s name and version are clearly separated and placed into
PORTNAME
andDISTVERSION
. The only reason forPORTNAME
to contain a version part is if the upstream distribution is really named that way, as in the textproc/libxml2 or japanese/kinput2-freewnn ports. Otherwise,PORTNAME
cannot contain any version-specific information. It is quite normal for several ports to have the samePORTNAME
, as the www/apache* ports do; in that case, different versions (and different index entries) are distinguished byPKGNAMEPREFIX
andPKGNAMESUFFIX
values.There is a tradition of naming
Perl 5
modules by prependingp5-
and converting the double-colon separator to a hyphen. For example, theData::Dumper
module becomesp5-Data-Dumper
.
- -compiled.specifics
If the port can be built with different hardcoded defaults (usually part of the directory name in a family of ports), the -compiled.specifics part states the compiled-in defaults. The hyphen is optional. Examples are paper size and font units.
The -compiled.specifics part is set in
PKGNAMESUFFIX
.
- -version.numbers
The version string follows a dash (
-
) and is a period-separated list of integers and single lowercase alphabetics. In particular, it is not permissible to have another dash inside the version string. The only exception is the stringpl
(meaning "patchlevel"), which can be used only when there are no major and minor version numbers in the software. If the software version has strings like "alpha", "beta", "rc", or "pre", take the first letter and put it immediately after a period. If the version string continues after those names, the numbers follow the single alphabet without an extra period between them (for example,1.0b2
).The idea is to make it easier to sort ports by looking at the version string. In particular, make sure version number components are always delimited by a period, and if the date is part of the string, use the
dyyyy.mm.dd
format, notdd.mm.yyyy
or the non-Y2K compliantyy.mm.dd
format. It is important to prefix the version with a letter, hered
(for date), in case a release with an actual version number is made, which would be numerically less thanyyyy
.
Package name must be unique among all of the ports tree, check that there is not already a port with the same |
Here are some (real) examples on how to convert the name as called by the software authors to a suitable package name, for each line, only one of DISTVERSION
or PORTVERSION
is set in, depending on which would be used in the port’s Makefile:
Distribution Name | PKGNAMEPREFIX | PORTNAME | PKGNAMESUFFIX | DISTVERSION | PORTVERSION | Reason or comment |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
mule-2.2.2 | (empty) | mule | (empty) | 2.2.2 | No changes required | |
mule-1.0.1 | (empty) | mule | 1 | 1.0.1 | This is version 1 of mule, and version 2 already exists | |
EmiClock-1.0.2 | (empty) | emiclock | (empty) | 1.0.2 | No uppercase names for single programs | |
rdist-1.3alpha | (empty) | rdist | (empty) | 1.3alpha | Version will be | |
es-0.9-beta1 | (empty) | es | (empty) | 0.9-beta1 | Version will be | |
mailman-2.0rc3 | (empty) | mailman | (empty) | 2.0rc3 | Version will be | |
v3.3beta021.src | (empty) | tiff | (empty) | 3.3 | What the heck was that anyway? | |
tvtwm | (empty) | tvtwm | (empty) | p11 | No version in the filename, use what upstream says it is | |
piewm | (empty) | piewm | (empty) | 1.0 | No version in the filename, use what upstream says it is | |
xvgr-2.10pl1 | (empty) | xvgr | (empty) | 2.10.pl1 | In that case, | |
gawk-2.15.6 | ja- | gawk | (empty) | 2.15.6 | Japanese language version | |
psutils-1.13 | (empty) | psutils | -letter | 1.13 | Paper size hardcoded at package build time | |
pkfonts | (empty) | pkfonts | 300 | 1.0 | Package for 300dpi fonts |
If there is absolutely no trace of version information in the original source and it is unlikely that the original author will ever release another version, just set the version string to 1.0
(like the piewm
example above).
Otherwise, ask the original author or use the date string the source file was released on (dyyyy.mm.dd
, or dyyyymmdd
) as the version.
Use any letter.
Here, |
5.3. Categorization
5.3.1. CATEGORIES
When a package is created, it is put under /usr/ports/packages/All and links are made from one or more subdirectories of /usr/ports/packages.
The names of these subdirectories are specified by the variable CATEGORIES
.
It is intended to make life easier for the user when he is wading through the pile of packages on the FTP site or the CDROM.
Please take a look at the current list of categories and pick the ones that are suitable for the port.
This list also determines where in the ports tree the port is imported. If there is more than one category here, the port files must be put in the subdirectory with the name of the first category. See below for more discussion about how to pick the right categories.
5.3.2. Current List of Categories
Here is the current list of port categories.
Those marked with an asterisk (*
) are virtual categories-those that do not have a corresponding subdirectory in the ports tree.
They are only used as secondary categories, and only for search purposes.
For non-virtual categories, there is a one-line description in |
Category | Description | Notes |
---|---|---|
accessibility | Ports to help disabled users. | |
afterstep | Ports to support the AfterStep window manager. | |
arabic | Arabic language support. | |
archivers | Archiving tools. | |
astro | Astronomical ports. | |
audio | Sound support. | |
benchmarks | Benchmarking utilities. | |
biology | Biology-related software. | |
cad | Computer aided design tools. | |
chinese | Chinese language support. | |
comms | Communication software. | Mostly software to talk to the serial port. |
converters | Character code converters. | |
databases | Databases. | |
deskutils | Things that used to be on the desktop before computers were invented. | |
devel | Development utilities. | Do not put libraries here just because they are libraries. They should not be in this category unless they truly do not belong anywhere else. |
dns | DNS-related software. | |
docs | Meta-ports for FreeBSD documentation. | |
editors | General editors. | Specialized editors go in the section for those tools. For example, a mathematical-formula editor will go in math, and have editors as a second category. |
education | Education-related software. | This includes applications, utilities, or games primarily or substantially designed to help the user learn a specific topic or study in general. It also includes course-writing applications, course-delivery applications, and classroom or school management applications |
elisp | Emacs-lisp ports. | |
emulators | Emulators for other operating systems. | Terminal emulators do not belong here. X-based ones go to x11 and text-based ones to either comms or misc, depending on the exact functionality. |
enlightenment | Ports related to the Enlightenment window manager. | |
finance | Monetary, financial and related applications. | |
french | French language support. | |
ftp | FTP client and server utilities. | If the port speaks both FTP and HTTP, put it in ftp with a secondary category of www. |
games | Games. | |
geography | Geography-related software. | |
german | German language support. | |
gnome | Ports from the GNOME Project. | |
gnustep | Software related to the GNUstep desktop environment. | |
graphics | Graphics utilities. | |
hamradio | Software for amateur radio. | |
haskell | Software related to the Haskell language. | |
hebrew | Hebrew language support. | |
hungarian | Hungarian language support. | |
irc | Internet Relay Chat utilities. | |
japanese | Japanese language support. | |
java | Software related to the Java™ language. | The java category must not be the only one for a port. Save for ports directly related to the Java language, porters are also encouraged not to use java as the main category of a port. |
kde | Ports from the KDE Project (generic). | |
kde-applications | Applications from the KDE Project. | |
kde-frameworks | Add-on libraries from the KDE Project for programming with Qt. | |
kde-plasma | Desktop from the KDE Project. | |
kld | Kernel loadable modules. | |
korean | Korean language support. | |
lang | Programming languages. | |
linux | Linux applications and support utilities. | |
lisp | Software related to the Lisp language. | |
Mail software. | ||
mate | Ports related to the MATE desktop environment, a fork of GNOME 2. | |
math | Numerical computation software and other utilities for mathematics. | |
mbone | MBone applications. | |
misc | Miscellaneous utilities | Things that do not belong anywhere else. If at all possible, try to find a better category for the port than |
multimedia | Multimedia software. | |
net | Miscellaneous networking software. | |
net-im | Instant messaging software. | |
net-mgmt | Networking management software. | |
net-p2p | Peer to peer network applications. | |
net-vpn | Virtual Private Network applications. | |
news | USENET news software. | |
parallel | Applications dealing with parallelism in computing. | |
pear | Ports related to the Pear PHP framework. | |
perl5 | Ports that require Perl version 5 to run. | |
plan9 | Various programs from Plan9. | |
polish | Polish language support. | |
ports-mgmt | Ports for managing, installing and developing FreeBSD ports and packages. | |
portuguese | Portuguese language support. | |
Printing software. | Desktop publishing tools (previewers, etc.) belong here too. | |
python | Software related to the Python language. | |
ruby | Software related to the Ruby language. | |
rubygems | Ports of RubyGems packages. | |
russian | Russian language support. | |
scheme | Software related to the Scheme language. | |
science | Scientific ports that do not fit into other categories such as astro, biology and math. | |
security | Security utilities. | |
shells | Command line shells. | |
spanish | Spanish language support. | |
sysutils | System utilities. | |
tcl | Ports that use Tcl to run. | |
textproc | Text processing utilities. | It does not include desktop publishing tools, which go to print. |
tk | Ports that use Tk to run. | |
ukrainian | Ukrainian language support. | |
vietnamese | Vietnamese language support. | |
wayland | Ports to support the Wayland display server. | |
windowmaker | Ports to support the Window Maker window manager. | |
www | Software related to the World Wide Web. | HTML language support belongs here too. |
x11 | The X Window System and friends. | This category is only for software that directly supports the window system. Do not put regular X applications here. Most of them go into other x11-* categories (see below). |
x11-clocks | X11 clocks. | |
x11-drivers | X11 drivers. | |
x11-fm | X11 file managers. | |
x11-fonts | X11 fonts and font utilities. | |
x11-servers | X11 servers. | |
x11-themes | X11 themes. | |
x11-toolkits | X11 toolkits. | |
x11-wm | X11 window managers. | |
xfce | Ports related to the Xfce desktop environment. | |
zope | Zope support. |
5.3.3. Choosing the Right Category
As many of the categories overlap, choosing which of the categories will be the primary category of the port can be tedious. There are several rules that govern this issue. Here is the list of priorities, in decreasing order of precedence:
The first category must be a physical category (see above). This is necessary to make the packaging work. Virtual categories and physical categories may be intermixed after that.
Language specific categories always come first. For example, if the port installs Japanese X11 fonts, then the
CATEGORIES
line would read japanese x11-fonts.Specific categories are listed before less-specific ones. For instance, an HTML editor is listed as www editors, not the other way around. Also, do not list net when the port belongs to any of irc, mail, news, security, or www, as net is included implicitly.
x11 is used as a secondary category only when the primary category is a natural language. In particular, do not put x11 in the category line for X applications.
Emacs modes are placed in the same ports category as the application supported by the mode, not in editors. For example, an Emacs mode to edit source files of some programming language goes into lang.
Ports installing loadable kernel modules also have the virtual category kld in their
CATEGORIES
line. This is one of the things handled automatically by addingUSES=kmod
.misc does not appear with any other non-virtual category. If there is
misc
with something else inCATEGORIES
, that meansmisc
can safely be deleted and the port placed only in the other subdirectory.If the port truly does not belong anywhere else, put it in misc.
If the category is not clearly defined, please put a comment to that effect in the port submission in the bug database so we can discuss it before we import it. As a committer, send a note to the FreeBSD ports 郵遞論壇 so we can discuss it first. Too often, new ports are imported to the wrong category only to be moved right away.
5.3.4. Proposing a New Category
As the Ports Collection has grown over time, various new categories have been introduced. New categories can either be virtual categories-those that do not have a corresponding subdirectory in the ports tree- or physical categories-those that do. This section discusses the issues involved in creating a new physical category. Read it thouroughly before proposing a new one.
Our existing practice has been to avoid creating a new physical category unless either a large number of ports would logically belong to it, or the ports that would belong to it are a logically distinct group that is of limited general interest (for instance, categories related to spoken human languages), or preferably both.
The rationale for this is that such a change creates a fair amount of work for both the committers and also for all users who track changes to the Ports Collection. In addition, proposed category changes just naturally seem to attract controversy. (Perhaps this is because there is no clear consensus on when a category is "too big", nor whether categories should lend themselves to browsing (and thus what number of categories would be an ideal number), and so forth.)
Here is the procedure:
Propose the new category on FreeBSD ports 郵遞論壇. Include a detailed rationale for the new category, including why the existing categories are not sufficient, and the list of existing ports proposed to move. (If there are new ports pending in Bugzilla that would fit this category, list them too.) If you are the maintainer and/or submitter, respectively, mention that as it may help the case.
Participate in the discussion.
If it seems that there is support for the idea, file a PR which includes both the rationale and the list of existing ports that need to be moved. Ideally, this PR would also include these patches:
Makefiles for the new ports once they are repocopied
Makefile for the new category
Makefile for the old ports' categories
Makefiles for ports that depend on the old ports
(for extra credit, include the other files that have to change, as per the procedure in the Committer’s Guide.)
Since it affects the ports infrastructure and involves moving and patching many ports but also possibly running regression tests on the build cluster, assign the PR to the Ports Management Team <portmgr@FreeBSD.org>.
If that PR is approved, a committer will need to follow the rest of the procedure that is outlined in the Committer’s Guide.
Proposing a new virtual category is similar to the above but much less involved, since no ports will actually have to move.
In this case, the only patches to include in the PR would be those to add the new category to CATEGORIES
of the affected ports.
5.3.5. Proposing Reorganizing All the Categories
Occasionally someone proposes reorganizing the categories with either a 2-level structure, or some other kind of keyword structure. To date, nothing has come of any of these proposals because, while they are very easy to make, the effort involved to retrofit the entire existing ports collection with any kind of reorganization is daunting to say the very least. Please read the history of these proposals in the mailing list archives before posting this idea. Furthermore, be prepared to be challenged to offer a working prototype.
5.4. The Distribution Files
The second part of the Makefile describes the files that must be downloaded to build the port, and where they can be downloaded.
5.4.1. DISTNAME
DISTNAME
is the name of the port as called by the authors of the software.
DISTNAME
defaults to ${PORTNAME}-${DISTVERSIONPREFIX}${DISTVERSION}${DISTVERSIONSUFFIX}
, and if not set, DISTVERSION
defaults to ${PORTVERSION}
so override DISTNAME
only if necessary.
DISTNAME
is only used in two places.
First, the distribution file list (DISTFILES
) defaults to ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX}
.
Second, the distribution file is expected to extract into a subdirectory named WRKSRC
, which defaults to work/${DISTNAME}.
Some vendor’s distribution names which do not fit into the ${PORTNAME}-${PORTVERSION}
-scheme can be handled automatically by setting DISTVERSIONPREFIX
, DISTVERSION
, and DISTVERSIONSUFFIX
.
PORTVERSION
will be derived from DISTVERSION
automatically.
Only one of |
If the upstream version scheme can be derived into a ports-compatible version scheme, set some variable to the upstream version, do not use DISTVERSION
as the variable name.
Set PORTVERSION
to the computed version based on the variable you created, and set DISTNAME
accordingly.
If the upstream version scheme cannot easily be coerced into a ports-compatible value, set PORTVERSION
to a sensible value, and set DISTNAME
with PORTNAME
with the verbatim upstream version.
PORTVERSION
ManuallyBIND9 uses a version scheme that is not compatible with the ports versions (it has -
in its versions) and cannot be derived using DISTVERSION
because after the 9.9.9 release, it will release a "patchlevels" in the form of 9.9.9-P1
.
DISTVERSION would translate that into 9.9.9.p1
, which, in the ports versioning scheme means 9.9.9 pre-release 1, which is before 9.9.9 and not after.
So PORTVERSION
is manually derived from an ISCVERSION
variable to output 9.9.9p1
.
The order into which the ports framework, and pkg, will sort versions is checked using the -t
argument of pkg-version(8):
% pkg version -t 9.9.9 9.9.9.p1
> (1)
% pkg version -t 9.9.9 9.9.9p1
< (2)
1 | The > sign means that the first argument passed to -t is greater than the second argument. 9.9.9 is after 9.9.9.p1 . |
2 | The < sign means that the first argument passed to -t is less than the second argument. 9.9.9 is before 9.9.9p1 . |
In the port Makefile, for example dns/bind99, it is achieved by:
PORTNAME= bind PORTVERSION= ${ISCVERSION:S/-P/P/:S/b/.b/:S/a/.a/:S/rc/.rc/} CATEGORIES= dns net MASTER_SITES= ISC/bind9/${ISCVERSION} PKGNAMESUFFIX= 99 DISTNAME= ${PORTNAME}-${ISCVERSION} MAINTAINER= mat@FreeBSD.org COMMENT= BIND DNS suite with updated DNSSEC and DNS64 LICENSE= ISCL # ISC releases things like 9.8.0-P1 or 9.8.1rc1, which our versioning does not like ISCVERSION= 9.9.9-P6
Define upstream version in ISCVERSION
, with a comment saying why it is needed.
Use ISCVERSION
to get a ports-compatible PORTVERSION
.
Use ISCVERSION
directly to get the correct URL for fetching the distribution file.
Use ISCVERSION
directly to name the distribution file.
DISTNAME
from PORTVERSION
From time to time, the distribution file name has little or no relation to the version of the software.
In comms/kermit, only the last element of the version is present in the distribution file:
PORTNAME= kermit PORTVERSION= 9.0.304 CATEGORIES= comms ftp net MASTER_SITES= ftp://ftp.kermitproject.org/kermit/test/tar/ DISTNAME= cku${PORTVERSION:E}-dev20
The :E
make(1) modifier returns the suffix of the variable, in this case, 304
.
The distribution file is correctly generated as cku304-dev20.tar.gz
.
Sometimes, there is no relation between the software name, its version, and the distribution file it is distributed in.
From audio/libworkman:
PORTNAME= libworkman PORTVERSION= 1.4 CATEGORIES= audio MASTER_SITES= LOCAL/jim DISTNAME= ${PORTNAME}-1999-06-20
In comms/librs232, the distribution file is not versioned, so using DIST_SUBDIR
is needed:
PORTNAME= librs232 PORTVERSION= 20160710 CATEGORIES= comms MASTER_SITES= http://www.teuniz.net/RS-232/ DISTNAME= RS-232 DIST_SUBDIR= ${PORTNAME}-${PORTVERSION}
|
5.4.2. MASTER_SITES
Record the directory part of the FTP/HTTP-URL pointing at the original tarball in MASTER_SITES
.
Do not forget the trailing slash (/)!
The make
macros will try to use this specification for grabbing the distribution file with FETCH
if they cannot find it already on the system.
It is recommended that multiple sites are included on this list, preferably from different continents. This will safeguard against wide-area network problems.
|
5.4.2.1. Using MASTER_SITE_*
Variables
Shortcut abbreviations are available for popular archives like SourceForge (SOURCEFORGE
), GNU (GNU
), or Perl CPAN (PERL_CPAN
). MASTER_SITES
can use them directly:
MASTER_SITES= GNU/make
The older expanded format still works, but all ports have been converted to the compact format. The expanded format looks like this:
MASTER_SITES= ${MASTER_SITE_GNU} MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR= make
These values and variables are defined in Mk/bsd.sites.mk. New entries are added often, so make sure to check the latest version of this file before submitting a port.
For any MASTER_SITES= FOO If MASTER_SITES= FOO/bar |
Some
|
5.4.2.2. Magic MASTER_SITES Macros
Several "magic" macros exist for popular sites with a predictable directory structure.
For these, just use the abbreviation and the system will choose a subdirectory automatically.
For a port named Stardict
, of version 1.2.3
, and hosted on SourceForge, adding this line:
MASTER_SITES= SF
infers a subdirectory named /project/stardict/stardict/1.2.3
.
If the inferred directory is incorrect, it can be overridden:
MASTER_SITES= SF/stardict/WyabdcRealPeopleTTS/${PORTVERSION}
This can also be written as
MASTER_SITES= SF MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR= stardict/WyabdcRealPeopleTTS/${PORTVERSION}
Macro | Assumed subdirectory |
---|---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.4.3. USE_GITHUB
If the distribution file comes from a specific commit or tag on GitHub for which there is no officially released file,
there is an easy way to set the right DISTNAME
and MASTER_SITES
automatically.
These variables are available:
Variable | Description | Default |
---|---|---|
| Account name of the GitHub user hosting the project |
|
| Name of the project on GitHub |
|
| Name of the tag to download (2.0.1, hash, …) Using the name of a branch here is incorrect. It is also possible to use the hash of a commit id to do a snapshot. |
|
| When the software needs an additional distribution file to be extracted within | (none) |
|
| (none) |
Do not use |
USE_GITHUB
While trying to make a port for version 1.2.7
of pkg from the FreeBSD user on github, at https://github.com/freebsd/pkg, The Makefile would end up looking like this (slightly stripped for the example):
PORTNAME= pkg DISTVERSION= 1.2.7 USE_GITHUB= yes GH_ACCOUNT= freebsd
It will automatically have MASTER_SITES
set to GH
and WRKSRC
to ${WRKDIR}/pkg-1.2.7
.
USE_GITHUB
While trying to make a port for the bleeding edge version of pkg from the FreeBSD user on github, at https://github.com/freebsd/pkg, the Makefile ends up looking like this (slightly stripped for the example):
PORTNAME= pkg-devel DISTVERSION= 1.3.0.a.20140411 USE_GITHUB= yes GH_ACCOUNT= freebsd GH_PROJECT= pkg GH_TAGNAME= 6dbb17b
It will automatically have MASTER_SITES
set to GH
and WRKSRC
to ${WRKDIR}/pkg-6dbb17b
.
USE_GITHUB
with DISTVERSIONPREFIX
From time to time, GH_TAGNAME
is a slight variation from DISTVERSION
.
For example, if the version is 1.0.2
, the tag is v1.0.2
.
In those cases, it is possible to use DISTVERSIONPREFIX
or DISTVERSIONSUFFIX
:
PORTNAME= foo DISTVERSIONPREFIX= v DISTVERSION= 1.0.2 USE_GITHUB= yes
It will automatically set GH_TAGNAME
to v1.0.2
, while WRKSRC
will be kept to ${WRKDIR}/foo-1.0.2
.
USE_GITHUB
When Upstream Does Not Use VersionsIf there never was a version upstream, do not invent one like 0.1
or 1.0
.
Create the port with a DISTVERSION
of gYYYYMMDD
, where g
is for Git, and YYYYMMDD
represents the date the commit referenced in GH_TAGNAME
.
PORTNAME= bar DISTVERSION= g20140411 USE_GITHUB= yes GH_TAGNAME= c472d66b
This creates a versioning scheme that increases over time, and that is still before version 0
(see Using pkg-version(8) to Compare Versions for details on pkg-version(8)):
% pkg version -t g20140411 0
<
Which means using PORTEPOCH
will not be needed in case upstream decides to cut versions in the future.
USE_GITHUB
to Access a Commit Between Two VersionsIf the current version of the software uses a Git tag, and the port needs to be updated to a newer, intermediate version, without a tag, use git-describe(1) to find out the version to use:
% git describe --tags f0038b1
v0.7.3-14-gf0038b1
v0.7.3-14-gf0038b1
can be split into three parts:
v0.7.3
This is the last Git tag that appears in the commit history before the requested commit.
-14
This means that the requested commit,
f0038b1
, is the 14th commit after thev0.7.3
tag.-gf0038b1
The
-g
means "Git", and thef0038b1
is the commit hash that this reference points to.
PORTNAME= bar DISTVERSIONPREFIX= v DISTVERSION= 0.7.3-14 DISTVERSIONSUFFIX= -gf0038b1 USE_GITHUB= yes
This creates a versioning scheme that increases over time (well, over commits), and does not conflict with the creation of a 0.7.4
version.
(See Using pkg-version(8) to Compare Versions for details on pkg-version(8)):
% pkg version -t 0.7.3 0.7.3.14
<
% pkg version -t 0.7.3.14 0.7.4
<
5.4.3.1. Fetching Multiple Files from GitHub
The USE_GITHUB
framework also supports fetching multiple distribution files from different places in GitHub.
It works in a way very similar to Multiple Distribution or Patches Files from Multiple Locations.
Multiple values are added to GH_ACCOUNT
, GH_PROJECT
, and GH_TAGNAME
.
Each different value is assigned a group.
The main value can either have no group, or the :DEFAULT
group.
A value can be omitted if it is the same as the default as listed in USE_GITHUB
Description.
GH_TUPLE
can also be used when there are a lot of distribution files.
It helps keep the account, project, tagname, and group information at the same place.
For each group, a ${WRKSRC_group}
helper variable is created, containing the directory into which the file has been extracted.
The ${WRKSRC_group}
variables can be used to move directories around during post-extract
, or add to CONFIGURE_ARGS
, or whatever is needed so that the software builds correctly.
The |
As this is only syntactic sugar above |
When fetching multiple files from GitHub, sometimes the default distribution file is not fetched from GitHub. To disable fetching the default distribution, set:
USE_GITHUB= nodefault
When using DISTFILES= ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX} |
USE_GITHUB
with Multiple Distribution FilesFrom time to time, there is a need to fetch more than one distribution file.
For example, when the upstream git repository uses submodules.
This can be done easily using groups in the GH_*
variables:
PORTNAME= foo DISTVERSION= 1.0.2 USE_GITHUB= yes GH_ACCOUNT= bar:icons,contrib GH_PROJECT= foo-icons:icons foo-contrib:contrib GH_TAGNAME= 1.0:icons fa579bc:contrib GH_SUBDIR= ext/icons:icons CONFIGURE_ARGS= --with-contrib=${WRKSRC_contrib}
This will fetch three distribution files from github.
The default one comes from foo/foo and is version 1.0.2
.
The second one, with the icons
group, comes from bar/foo-icons and is in version 1.0
.
The third one comes from bar/foo-contrib and uses the Git commit fa579bc
.
The distribution files are named foo-foo-1.0.2_GH0.tar.gz, bar-foo-icons-1.0_GH0.tar.gz, and bar-foo-contrib-fa579bc_GH0.tar.gz.
All the distribution files are extracted in ${WRKDIR}
in their respective subdirectories.
The default file is still extracted in ${WRKSRC}
, in this case, ${WRKDIR}/foo-1.0.2.
Each additional distribution file is extracted in ${WRKSRC_group}
.
Here, for the icons
group, it is called ${WRKSRC_icons}
and it contains ${WRKDIR}/foo-icons-1.0.
The file with the contrib
group is called ${WRKSRC_contrib}
and contains ${WRKDIR}/foo-contrib-fa579bc
.
The software’s build system expects to find the icons in a ext/icons subdirectory in its sources, so GH_SUBDIR
is used.
GH_SUBDIR
makes sure that ext exists, but that ext/icons does not already exist.
Then it does this:
post-extract: @${MV} ${WRKSRC_icons} ${WRKSRC}/ext/icons
USE_GITHUB
with Multiple Distribution Files Using GH_TUPLE
This is functionally equivalent to Use of USE_GITHUB
with Multiple Distribution Files, but using GH_TUPLE
:
PORTNAME= foo DISTVERSION= 1.0.2 USE_GITHUB= yes GH_TUPLE= bar:foo-icons:1.0:icons/ext/icons \ bar:foo-contrib:fa579bc:contrib CONFIGURE_ARGS= --with-contrib=${WRKSRC_contrib}
Grouping was used in the previous example with bar:icons,contrib
.
Some redundant information is present with GH_TUPLE
because grouping is not possible.
USE_GITHUB
with Git Submodules?Ports with GitHub as an upstream repository sometimes use submodules. See git-submodule(1) for more information.
The problem with submodules is that each is a separate repository. As such, they each must be fetched separately.
Using finance/moneymanagerex as an example, its GitHub repository is https://github.com/moneymanagerex/moneymanagerex. It has a .gitmodules file at the root. This file describes all the submodules used in this repository, and lists additional repositories needed. This file will tell what additional repositories are needed:
[submodule "lib/wxsqlite3"] path = lib/wxsqlite3 url = https://github.com/utelle/wxsqlite3.git [submodule "3rd/mongoose"] path = 3rd/mongoose url = https://github.com/cesanta/mongoose.git [submodule "3rd/LuaGlue"] path = 3rd/LuaGlue url = https://github.com/moneymanagerex/LuaGlue.git [submodule "3rd/cgitemplate"] path = 3rd/cgitemplate url = https://github.com/moneymanagerex/html-template.git [...]
The only information missing from that file is the commit hash or tag to use as a version. This information is found after cloning the repository:
% git clone --recurse-submodules https://github.com/moneymanagerex/moneymanagerex.git
Cloning into 'moneymanagerex'...
remote: Counting objects: 32387, done.
[...]
Submodule '3rd/LuaGlue' (https://github.com/moneymanagerex/LuaGlue.git) registered for path '3rd/LuaGlue'
Submodule '3rd/cgitemplate' (https://github.com/moneymanagerex/html-template.git) registered for path '3rd/cgitemplate'
Submodule '3rd/mongoose' (https://github.com/cesanta/mongoose.git) registered for path '3rd/mongoose'
Submodule 'lib/wxsqlite3' (https://github.com/utelle/wxsqlite3.git) registered for path 'lib/wxsqlite3'
[...]
Cloning into '/home/mat/work/freebsd/ports/finance/moneymanagerex/moneymanagerex/3rd/LuaGlue'...
Cloning into '/home/mat/work/freebsd/ports/finance/moneymanagerex/moneymanagerex/3rd/cgitemplate'...
Cloning into '/home/mat/work/freebsd/ports/finance/moneymanagerex/moneymanagerex/3rd/mongoose'...
Cloning into '/home/mat/work/freebsd/ports/finance/moneymanagerex/moneymanagerex/lib/wxsqlite3'...
[...]
Submodule path '3rd/LuaGlue': checked out 'c51d11a247ee4d1e9817dfa2a8da8d9e2f97ae3b'
Submodule path '3rd/cgitemplate': checked out 'cd434eeeb35904ebcd3d718ba29c281a649b192c'
Submodule path '3rd/mongoose': checked out '2140e5992ab9a3a9a34ce9a281abf57f00f95cda'
Submodule path 'lib/wxsqlite3': checked out 'fb66eb230d8aed21dec273b38c7c054dcb7d6b51'
[...]
% cd moneymanagerex
% git submodule status
c51d11a247ee4d1e9817dfa2a8da8d9e2f97ae3b 3rd/LuaGlue (heads/master)
cd434eeeb35904ebcd3d718ba29c281a649b192c 3rd/cgitemplate (cd434ee)
2140e5992ab9a3a9a34ce9a281abf57f00f95cda 3rd/mongoose (6.2-138-g2140e59)
fb66eb230d8aed21dec273b38c7c054dcb7d6b51 lib/wxsqlite3 (v3.4.0)
[...]
It can also be found on GitHub.
Each subdirectory that is a submodule is shown as directory @ hash
, for example, mongoose @ 2140e59
.
Now that all the required information has been gathered, the Makefile can be written (only GitHub-related lines are shown):
PORTNAME= moneymanagerex DISTVERSIONPREFIX= v DISTVERSION= 1.3.0 USE_GITHUB= yes GH_TUPLE= utelle:wxsqlite3:v3.4.0:wxsqlite3/lib/wxsqlite3 \ moneymanagerex:LuaGlue:c51d11a:lua_glue/3rd/LuaGlue \ moneymanagerex:html-template:cd434ee:html_template/3rd/cgitemplate \ cesanta:mongoose:2140e59:mongoose/3rd/mongoose \ [...]
5.4.4. USE_GITLAB
Similar to GitHub, if the distribution file comes from gitlab.com or is hosting the GitLab software, these variables are available for use and might need to be set.
Variable | Description | Default |
---|---|---|
| Site name hosting the GitLab project | |
| Account name of the GitLab user hosting the project |
|
| Name of the project on GitLab |
|
| The commit hash to download. Must be the full 160 bit, 40 character hex sha1 hash. This is a required variable for GitLab. |
|
| When the software needs an additional distribution file to be extracted within | (none) |
|
| (none) |
USE_GITLAB
While trying to make a port for version 1.14
of libsignon-glib from the accounts-sso user on gitlab.com, at https://gitlab.com/accounts-sso/libsignon-glib, The Makefile would end up looking like this for fetching the distribution files:
PORTNAME= libsignon-glib DISTVERSION= 1.14 USE_GITLAB= yes GL_ACCOUNT= accounts-sso GL_COMMIT= e90302e342bfd27bc8c9132ab9d0ea3d8723fd03
It will automatically have MASTER_SITES
set to gitlab.com and WRKSRC
to ${WRKDIR}/libsignon-glib-e90302e342bfd27bc8c9132ab9d0ea3d8723fd03-e90302e342bfd27bc8c9132ab9d0ea3d8723fd03
.
USE_GITLAB
A more complete use of the above if port had no versioning and foobar from the foo user on project bar on a self hosted GitLab site https://gitlab.example.com
, the Makefile ends up looking like this for fetching distribution files:
PORTNAME= foobar DISTVERSION= g20170906 USE_GITLAB= yes GL_SITE= https://gitlab.example.com GL_ACCOUNT= foo GL_PROJECT= bar GL_COMMIT= 9c1669ce60c3f4f5eb43df874d7314483fb3f8a6
It will have MASTER_SITES
set to "https://gitlab.example.com"
and WRKSRC
to ${WRKDIR}/bar-9c1669ce60c3f4f5eb43df874d7314483fb3f8a6-9c1669ce60c3f4f5eb43df874d7314483fb3f8a6
.
|
|
5.4.4.1. Fetching Multiple Files from GitLab
The USE_GITLAB
framework also supports fetching multiple distribution files from different places from GitLab and GitLab hosted sites.
It works in a way very similar to Multiple Distribution or Patches Files from Multiple Locations and Fetching Multiple Files from GitLab.
Multiple values are added to GL_SITE
, GL_ACCOUNT
, GL_PROJECT
and GL_COMMIT
.
Each different value is assigned a group. USE_GITLAB
Description.
GL_TUPLE
can also be used when there are a lot of distribution files.
It helps keep the site, account, project, commit, and group information at the same place.
For each group, a ${WRKSRC_group}
helper variable is created, containing the directory into which the file has been extracted.
The ${WRKSRC_group}
variables can be used to move directories around during post-extract
, or add to CONFIGURE_ARGS
, or whatever is needed so that the software builds correctly.
The |
As this is only syntactic sugar above |
When fetching multiple files using GitLab, sometimes the default distribution file is not fetched from a GitLab site. To disable fetching the default distribution, set:
USE_GITLAB= nodefault
When using DISTFILES= ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX} |
USE_GITLAB
with Multiple Distribution FilesFrom time to time, there is a need to fetch more than one distribution file.
For example, when the upstream git repository uses submodules.
This can be done easily using groups in the GL_*
variables:
PORTNAME= foo DISTVERSION= 1.0.2 USE_GITLAB= yes GL_SITE= https://gitlab.example.com:9434/gitlab:icons GL_ACCOUNT= bar:icons,contrib GL_PROJECT= foo-icons:icons foo-contrib:contrib GL_COMMIT= c189207a55da45305c884fe2b50e086fcad4724b ae7368cab1ca7ca754b38d49da064df87968ffe4:icons 9e4dd76ad9b38f33fdb417a4c01935958d5acd2a:contrib GL_SUBDIR= ext/icons:icons CONFIGURE_ARGS= --with-contrib=${WRKSRC_contrib}
This will fetch two distribution files from gitlab.com and one from gitlab.example.com
hosting GitLab.
The default one comes from https://gitlab.com/foo/foo and commit is c189207a55da45305c884fe2b50e086fcad4724b
.
The second one, with the icons
group, comes from https://gitlab.example.com:9434/gitlab/bar/foo-icons and commit is ae7368cab1ca7ca754b38d49da064df87968ffe4
.
The third one comes from https://gitlab.com/bar/foo-contrib and is commit 9e4dd76ad9b38f33fdb417a4c01935958d5acd2a
.
The distribution files are named foo-foo-c189207a55da45305c884fe2b50e086fcad4724b_GL0.tar.gz, bar-foo-icons-ae7368cab1ca7ca754b38d49da064df87968ffe4_GL0.tar.gz, and bar-foo-contrib-9e4dd76ad9b38f33fdb417a4c01935958d5acd2a_GL0.tar.gz.
All the distribution files are extracted in ${WRKDIR}
in their respective subdirectories.
The default file is still extracted in ${WRKSRC}
, in this case, ${WRKDIR}/foo-c189207a55da45305c884fe2b50e086fcad4724b-c189207a55da45305c884fe2b50e086fcad4724b.
Each additional distribution file is extracted in ${WRKSRC_group}
.
Here, for the icons
group, it is called ${WRKSRC_icons}
and it contains ${WRKDIR}/foo-icons-ae7368cab1ca7ca754b38d49da064df87968ffe4-ae7368cab1ca7ca754b38d49da064df87968ffe4.
The file with the contrib
group is called ${WRKSRC_contrib}
and contains ${WRKDIR}/foo-contrib-9e4dd76ad9b38f33fdb417a4c01935958d5acd2a-9e4dd76ad9b38f33fdb417a4c01935958d5acd2a
.
The software’s build system expects to find the icons in a ext/icons subdirectory in its sources, so GL_SUBDIR
is used.
GL_SUBDIR
makes sure that ext exists, but that ext/icons does not already exist.
Then it does this:
post-extract: @${MV} ${WRKSRC_icons} ${WRKSRC}/ext/icons
USE_GITLAB
with Multiple Distribution Files Using GL_TUPLE
This is functionally equivalent to Use of USE_GITLAB
with Multiple Distribution Files, but using GL_TUPLE
:
PORTNAME= foo DISTVERSION= 1.0.2 USE_GITLAB= yes GL_COMMIT= c189207a55da45305c884fe2b50e086fcad4724b GL_TUPLE= https://gitlab.example.com:9434/gitlab:bar:foo-icons:ae7368cab1ca7ca754b38d49da064df87968ffe4:icons/ext/icons \ bar:foo-contrib:9e4dd76ad9b38f33fdb417a4c01935958d5acd2a:contrib CONFIGURE_ARGS= --with-contrib=${WRKSRC_contrib}
Grouping was used in the previous example with bar:icons,contrib
.
Some redundant information is present with GL_TUPLE
because grouping is not possible.
5.4.5. EXTRACT_SUFX
If there is one distribution file, and it uses an odd suffix to indicate the compression mechanism, set EXTRACT_SUFX
.
For example, if the distribution file was named foo.tar.gzip instead of the more normal foo.tar.gz, write:
DISTNAME= foo EXTRACT_SUFX= .tar.gzip
The USES=tar[:xxx]
, USES=lha
or USES=zip
automatically set EXTRACT_SUFX
to the most common archives extensions as necessary, see Using USES
Macros for more details.
If neither of these are set then EXTRACT_SUFX
defaults to .tar.gz
.
As |
5.4.6. DISTFILES
Sometimes the names of the files to be downloaded have no resemblance to the name of the port. For example, it might be called source.tar.gz or similar. In other cases the application’s source code might be in several different archives, all of which must be downloaded.
If this is the case, set DISTFILES
to be a space separated list of all the files that must be downloaded.
DISTFILES= source1.tar.gz source2.tar.gz
If not explicitly set, DISTFILES
defaults to ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX}
.
5.4.7. EXTRACT_ONLY
If only some of the DISTFILES
must be extracted-for example, one of them is the source code, while another is an uncompressed document-list the filenames that must be extracted in EXTRACT_ONLY
.
DISTFILES= source.tar.gz manual.html EXTRACT_ONLY= source.tar.gz
When none of the DISTFILES
need to be uncompressed, set EXTRACT_ONLY
to the empty string.
EXTRACT_ONLY=
5.4.8. PATCHFILES
If the port requires some additional patches that are available by FTP or HTTP, set PATCHFILES
to the names of the files and PATCH_SITES
to the URL of the directory that contains them (the format is the same as MASTER_SITES
).
If the patch is not relative to the top of the source tree (that is, WRKSRC
) because it contains some extra pathnames, set PATCH_DIST_STRIP
accordingly.
For instance, if all the pathnames in the patch have an extra foozolix-1.0/
in front of the filenames, then set PATCH_DIST_STRIP=-p1
.
Do not worry if the patches are compressed; they will be decompressed automatically if the filenames end with .Z, .gz, .bz2 or .xz.
If the patch is distributed with some other files, such as documentation, in a compressed tarball, using PATCHFILES
is not possible.
If that is the case, add the name and the location of the patch tarball to DISTFILES
and MASTER_SITES
.
Then, use EXTRA_PATCHES
to point to those files and bsd.port.mk will automatically apply them.
In particular, do not copy patch files into ${PATCHDIR}.
That directory may not be writable.
If there are multiple patches and they need mixed values for the strip parameter, it can be added alongside the patch name in PATCHFILES= patch1 patch2:-p1 This does not conflict with the master site grouping feature, adding a group also works: PATCHFILES= patch2:-p1:source2 |
The tarball will have been extracted alongside the regular source by then, so there is no need to explicitly extract it if it is a regular compressed tarball. Take extra care not to overwrite something that already exists in that directory if extracting it manually.
Also, do not forget to add a command to remove the copied patch in the |
5.4.9. Multiple Distribution or Patches Files from Multiple Locations
(Consider this to be a somewhat "advanced topic"; those new to this document may wish to skip this section at first).
This section has information on the fetching mechanism known as both MASTER_SITES:n
and MASTER_SITES_NN
.
We will refer to this mechanism as MASTER_SITES:n
.
A little background first.
OpenBSD has a neat feature inside DISTFILES
and PATCHFILES
which allows files and patches to be postfixed with :n
identifiers.
Here, n
can be any word containing [0-9a-zA-Z_]
and denote a group designation.
For example:
DISTFILES= alpha:0 beta:1
In OpenBSD, distribution file alpha will be associated with variable MASTER_SITES0
instead of our common MASTER_SITES
and beta with MASTER_SITES1
.
This is a very interesting feature which can decrease that endless search for the correct download site.
Just picture 2 files in DISTFILES
and 20 sites in MASTER_SITES
, the sites slow as hell where beta is carried by all sites in MASTER_SITES
, and alpha can only be found in the 20th site.
It would be such a waste to check all of them if the maintainer knew this beforehand, would it not? Not a good start for that lovely weekend!
Now that you have the idea, just imagine more DISTFILES
and more MASTER_SITES
.
Surely our "distfiles survey meister" would appreciate the relief to network strain that this would bring.
In the next sections, information will follow on the FreeBSD implementation of this idea. We improved a bit on OpenBSD’s concept.
5.4.9.1. Simplified Information
This section explains how to quickly prepare fine grained fetching of multiple distribution files and patches from different sites and subdirectories.
We describe here a case of simplified MASTER_SITES:n
usage.
This will be sufficient for most scenarios.
More detailed information are available in Detailed Information.
Some applications consist of multiple distribution files that must be downloaded from a number of different sites. For example, Ghostscript consists of the core of the program, and then a large number of driver files that are used depending on the user’s printer. Some of these driver files are supplied with the core, but many others must be downloaded from a variety of different sites.
To support this, each entry in DISTFILES
may be followed by a colon and a "group name".
Each site listed in MASTER_SITES
is then followed by a colon, and the group that indicates which distribution files are downloaded from this site.
For example, consider an application with the source split in two parts, source1.tar.gz and source2.tar.gz, which must be downloaded from two different sites.
The port’s Makefile would include lines like Simplified Use of MASTER_SITES:n
with One File Per Site.
MASTER_SITES:n
with One File Per SiteMASTER_SITES= ftp://ftp1.example.com/:source1 \ http://www.example.com/:source2 DISTFILES= source1.tar.gz:source1 \ source2.tar.gz:source2
Multiple distribution files can have the same group.
Continuing the previous example, suppose that there was a third distfile, source3.tar.gz, that is downloaded from ftp.example2.com
.
The Makefile would then be written like Simplified Use of MASTER_SITES:n
with More Than One File Per Site.
MASTER_SITES:n
with More Than One File Per SiteMASTER_SITES= ftp://ftp.example.com/:source1 \ http://www.example.com/:source2 DISTFILES= source1.tar.gz:source1 \ source2.tar.gz:source2 \ source3.tar.gz:source2
5.4.9.2. Detailed Information
Okay, so the previous example did not reflect the new port’s needs? In this section we will explain in detail how the fine grained fetching mechanism MASTER_SITES:n
works and how it can be used.
Elements can be postfixed with
:n
where n is`, that is, _n_ could conceptually be any alphanumeric string but we will limit it to `[a-zA-Z_][0-9a-zA-Z_]
for now.Moreover, string matching is case sensitive; that is,
n
is different fromN
.Elements postfixed with
:n
belong to the groupn
,:m
belong to groupm
and so forth.Elements without a postfix are groupless, they all belong to the special group
DEFAULT
. Any elements postfixed withDEFAULT
, is just being redundant unless an element belongs to bothDEFAULT
and other groups at the same time (check item 5).These examples are equivalent but the first one is preferred:
MASTER_SITES= alpha
MASTER_SITES= alpha:DEFAULT
Groups are not exclusive, an element may belong to several different groups at the same time and a group can either have either several different elements or none at all.
When an element belongs to several groups at the same time, use the comma operator (
,
).Instead of repeating it several times, each time with a different postfix, we can list several groups at once in a single postfix. For instance,
:m,n,o
marks an element that belongs to groupm
,n
ando
.All these examples are equivalent but the last one is preferred:
MASTER_SITES= alpha alpha:SOME_SITE
MASTER_SITES= alpha:DEFAULT alpha:SOME_SITE
MASTER_SITES= alpha:SOME_SITE,DEFAULT
MASTER_SITES= alpha:DEFAULT,SOME_SITE
All sites within a given group are sorted according to
MASTER_SORT_AWK
. All groups withinMASTER_SITES
andPATCH_SITES
are sorted as well.Group semantics can be used in any of the variables
MASTER_SITES
,PATCH_SITES
,MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
,PATCH_SITE_SUBDIR
,DISTFILES
, andPATCHFILES
according to this syntax:All
MASTER_SITES
,PATCH_SITES
,MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
andPATCH_SITE_SUBDIR
elements must be terminated with the forward slash/
character. If any elements belong to any groups, the group postfix:n
must come right after the terminator/
. TheMASTER_SITES:n
mechanism relies on the existence of the terminator/
to avoid confusing elements where a:n
is a valid part of the element with occurrences where:n
denotes groupn
. For compatibility purposes, since the/
terminator was not required before in bothMASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
andPATCH_SITE_SUBDIR
elements, if the postfix immediate preceding character is not a/
then:n
will be considered a valid part of the element instead of a group postfix even if an element is postfixed with:n
. See both Detailed Use ofMASTER_SITES:n
inMASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
and Detailed Use ofMASTER_SITES:n
with Comma Operator, Multiple Files, Multiple Sites and Multiple Subdirectories.例 29. Detailed Use ofMASTER_SITES:n
inMASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR= old:n new/:NEW
Directories within group
DEFAULT
→ old:nDirectories within group
NEW
→ new
例 30. Detailed Use ofMASTER_SITES:n
with Comma Operator, Multiple Files, Multiple Sites and Multiple SubdirectoriesMASTER_SITES= http://site1/%SUBDIR%/ http://site2/:DEFAULT \ http://site3/:group3 http://site4/:group4 \ http://site5/:group5 http://site6/:group6 \ http://site7/:DEFAULT,group6 \ http://site8/%SUBDIR%/:group6,group7 \ http://site9/:group8 DISTFILES= file1 file2:DEFAULT file3:group3 \ file4:group4,group5,group6 file5:grouping \ file6:group7 MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR= directory-trial:1 directory-n/:groupn \ directory-one/:group6,DEFAULT \ directory
The previous example results in this fine grained fetching. Sites are listed in the exact order they will be used.
file1 will be fetched from
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
file2 will be fetched exactly as file1 since they both belong to the same group
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
file3 will be fetched from
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
file4 will be fetched from
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
file5 will be fetched from
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
file6 will be fetched from
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
How do I group one of the special macros from bsd.sites.mk, for example, SourceForge (
SF
)?This has been simplified as much as possible. See Detailed Use of
MASTER_SITES:n
with SourceForge (SF
).例 31. Detailed Use ofMASTER_SITES:n
with SourceForge (SF
)MASTER_SITES= http://site1/ SF/something/1.0:sourceforge,TEST DISTFILES= something.tar.gz:sourceforge
something.tar.gz will be fetched from all sites within SourceForge.
How do I use this with
PATCH*
?All examples were done with
MASTER*
but they work exactly the same forPATCH*
ones as can be seen in Simplified Use ofMASTER_SITES:n
withPATCH_SITES
.例 32. Simplified Use ofMASTER_SITES:n
withPATCH_SITES
PATCH_SITES= http://site1/ http://site2/:test PATCHFILES= patch1:test
5.4.9.3. What Does Change for Ports? What Does Not?
All current ports remain the same. The
MASTER_SITES:n
feature code is only activated if there are elements postfixed with:n
like elements according to the aforementioned syntax rules, especially as shown in item 7.The port targets remain the same:
checksum
,makesum
,patch
,configure
,build
, etc. With the obvious exceptions ofdo-fetch
,fetch-list
,master-sites
andpatch-sites
.do-fetch
: deploys the new grouping postfixedDISTFILES
andPATCHFILES
with their matching group elements within bothMASTER_SITES
andPATCH_SITES
which use matching group elements within bothMASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
andPATCH_SITE_SUBDIR
. Check Detailed Use ofMASTER_SITES:n
with Comma Operator, Multiple Files, Multiple Sites and Multiple Subdirectories.fetch-list
: works like oldfetch-list
with the exception that it groups just likedo-fetch
.master-sites
andpatch-sites
: (incompatible with older versions) only return the elements of groupDEFAULT
; in fact, they execute targetsmaster-sites-default
andpatch-sites-default
respectively.Furthermore, using target either
master-sites-all
orpatch-sites-all
is preferred to directly checking eitherMASTER_SITES
orPATCH_SITES
. Also, directly checking is not guaranteed to work in any future versions. Check item B for more information on these new port targets.
New port targets
There are
master-sites-n
andpatch-sites-n
targets which will list the elements of the respective group n withinMASTER_SITES
andPATCH_SITES
respectively. For instance, bothmaster-sites-DEFAULT
andpatch-sites-DEFAULT
will return the elements of groupDEFAULT
,master-sites-test
andpatch-sites-test
of grouptest
, and thereon.There are new targets
master-sites-all
andpatch-sites-all
which do the work of the oldmaster-sites
andpatch-sites
ones. They return the elements of all groups as if they all belonged to the same group with the caveat that it lists as manyMASTER_SITE_BACKUP
andMASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE
as there are groups defined within eitherDISTFILES
orPATCHFILES
; respectively formaster-sites-all
andpatch-sites-all
.
5.4.10. DIST_SUBDIR
Do not let the port clutter /usr/ports/distfiles.
If the port requires a lot of files to be fetched, or contains a file that has a name that might conflict with other ports (for example, Makefile), set DIST_SUBDIR
to the name of the port (${PORTNAME}
or ${PKGNAMEPREFIX}${PORTNAME}
are fine).
This will change DISTDIR
from the default /usr/ports/distfiles to /usr/ports/distfiles/${DIST_SUBDIR}, and in effect puts everything that is required for the port into that subdirectory.
It will also look at the subdirectory with the same name on the backup master site at http://distcache.FreeBSD.org (Setting DISTDIR
explicitly in Makefile will not accomplish this, so please use DIST_SUBDIR
.)
This does not affect |
5.5. MAINTAINER
Set your mail-address here. Please. :-)
Only a single address without the comment part is allowed as a MAINTAINER
value.
The format used is user@hostname.domain
.
Please do not include any descriptive text such as a real name in this entry.
That merely confuses the Ports infrastructure and most tools using it.
The maintainer is responsible for keeping the port up to date and making sure that it works correctly. For a detailed description of the responsibilities of a port maintainer, refer to The challenge for port maintainers.
A maintainer volunteers to keep a port in good working order. Maintainers have the primary responsibility for their ports, but not exclusive ownership. Ports exist for the benefit of the community and, in reality, belong to the community. What this means is that people other than the maintainer can make changes to a port. Large changes to the Ports Collection might require changes to many ports. The FreeBSD Ports Management Team or members of other teams might modify ports to fix dependency issues or other problems, like a version bump for a shared library update. Some types of fixes have "blanket approval" from the Ports Management Team <portmgr@FreeBSD.org>, allowing any committer to fix those categories of problems on any port. These fixes do not need approval from the maintainer. Blanket approval for most ports applies to fixes like infrastructure changes, or trivial and tested build and runtime fixes. The current list is available in Ports section of the Committer’s Guide. |
Other changes to the port will be sent to the maintainer for review and approval before being committed. If the maintainer does not respond to an update request after two weeks (excluding major public holidays), then that is considered a maintainer timeout, and the update can be made without explicit maintainer approval. If the maintainer does not respond within three months, or if there have been three consecutive timeouts, then that maintainer is considered absent without leave, and all of their ports can be assigned back to the pool. Exceptions to this are anything maintained by the Ports Management Team <portmgr@FreeBSD.org>, or the Security Officer Team <security-officer@FreeBSD.org>. No unauthorized commits may ever be made to ports maintained by those groups.
We reserve the right to modify the maintainer’s submission to better match existing policies and style of the Ports Collection without explicit blessing from the submitter or the maintainer. Also, large infrastructural changes can result in a port being modified without the maintainer’s consent. These kinds of changes will never affect the port’s functionality.
The Ports Management Team <portmgr@FreeBSD.org> reserves the right to revoke or override anyone’s maintainership for any reason, and the Security Officer Team <security-officer@FreeBSD.org> reserves the right to revoke or override maintainership for security reasons.
5.6. COMMENT
The comment is a one-line description of a port shown by pkg info
.
Please follow these rules when composing it:
The COMMENT string should be 70 characters or less.
Do not include the package name or version number of software.
The comment must begin with a capital and end without a period.
Do not start with an indefinite article (that is, A or An).
Capitalize names such as Apache, JavaScript, or Perl.
Use a serial comma for lists of words: "green, red, and blue."
Check for spelling errors.
Here is an example:
COMMENT= Cat chasing a mouse all over the screen
The COMMENT variable immediately follows the MAINTAINER variable in the Makefile.
5.7. Licenses
Each port must document the license under which it is available. If it is not an OSI approved license it must also document any restrictions on redistribution.
5.7.1. LICENSE
A short name for the license or licenses if more than one license apply.
If it is one of the licenses listed in Predefined License List, only LICENSE_FILE
and LICENSE_DISTFILES
variables can be set.
If this is a license that has not been defined in the ports framework (see Predefined License List), the LICENSE_PERMS
and LICENSE_NAME
must be set, along with either LICENSE_FILE
or LICENSE_TEXT
.
LICENSE_DISTFILES
and LICENSE_GROUPS
can also be set, but are not required.
The predefined licenses are shown in Predefined License List. The current list is always available in Mk/bsd.licenses.db.mk.
When the README of some software says "This software is under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version." but does not provide the license file, use this:
LICENSE= LGPL21+
When the software provides the license file, use this:
LICENSE= LGPL21+ LICENSE_FILE= ${WRKSRC}/COPYING
For the predefined licenses, the default permissions are dist-mirror dist-sell pkg-mirror pkg-sell auto-accept
.
Short Name | Name | Group | Permissions |
---|---|---|---|
| GNU Affero General Public License version 3 |
| (default) |
| GNU Affero General Public License version 3 (or later) |
| (default) |
| Apache License 1.0 |
| (default) |
| Apache License 1.1 |
| (default) |
| Apache License 2.0 |
| (default) |
| Artistic License version 1.0 |
| (default) |
| Artistic License version 2.0 |
| (default) |
| Artistic License (perl) version 1.0 |
| (default) |
| BSD license Generic Version (deprecated) |
| (default) |
| BSD 2-clause "Simplified" License |
| (default) |
| BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License |
| (default) |
| BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License |
| (default) |
| Boost Software License |
| (default) |
| Creative Commons Attribution 1.0 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution 2.0 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution 2.5 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial 1.0 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial 2.0 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial 2.5 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial 3.0 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial 4.0 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial No Derivatives 1.0 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial No Derivatives 2.0 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial No Derivatives 2.5 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial No Derivatives 3.0 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial No Derivatives 4.0 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 1.0 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 2.0 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 2.5 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 4.0 |
| |
| Creative Commons Attribution No Derivatives 1.0 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution No Derivatives 2.0 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution No Derivatives 2.5 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution No Derivatives 3.0 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution No Derivatives 4.0 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution Share Alike 1.0 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution Share Alike 2.0 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution Share Alike 2.5 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution Share Alike 3.0 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Attribution Share Alike 4.0 | (default) | |
| Creative Commons Zero v1.0 Universal |
| (default) |
| Common Development and Distribution License |
| (default) |
| Common Public Attribution License |
| (default) |
| Clarified Artistic License |
| (default) |
| Eclipse Public License |
| (default) |
| GNU Free Documentation License |
| (default) |
| GNAT Modified General Public License |
| (default) |
| GNU General Public License version 1 |
| (default) |
| GNU General Public License version 1 (or later) |
| (default) |
| GNU General Public License version 2 |
| (default) |
| GNU General Public License version 2 (or later) |
| (default) |
| GNU General Public License version 3 |
| (default) |
| GNU General Public License version 3 (or later) |
| (default) |
| GNU GPL version 3 Runtime Library Exception |
| (default) |
| GNU GPL version 3 Runtime Library Exception (or later) |
| (default) |
| Internet Systems Consortium License |
| (default) |
| GNU Library General Public License version 2.0 |
| (default) |
| GNU Library General Public License version 2.0 (or later) |
| (default) |
| GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 |
| (default) |
| GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 (or later) |
| (default) |
| GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 |
| (default) |
| GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 (or later) |
| (default) |
| LaTeX Project Public License version 1.0 |
|
|
| LaTeX Project Public License version 1.1 |
|
|
| LaTeX Project Public License version 1.2 |
|
|
| LaTeX Project Public License version 1.3 |
|
|
| LaTeX Project Public License version 1.3a |
|
|
| LaTeX Project Public License version 1.3b |
|
|
| LaTeX Project Public License version 1.3c |
|
|
| MIT license / X11 license |
| (default) |
| Mozilla Public License version 1.0 |
| (default) |
| Mozilla Public License version 1.1 |
| (default) |
| Mozilla Public License version 2.0 |
| (default) |
| University of Illinois/NCSA Open Source License |
| (default) |
| No license specified |
| |
| SIL Open Font License version 1.0 (http://scripts.sil.org/OFL) |
| (default) |
| SIL Open Font License version 1.1 (http://scripts.sil.org/OFL) |
| (default) |
| Open Works License (owl.apotheon.org) |
| (default) |
| OpenSSL License |
| (default) |
| Public Domain |
| (default) |
| PHP License version 2.02 |
| (default) |
| PHP License version 3.0 |
| (default) |
| PHP License version 3.01 |
| (default) |
| Python Software Foundation License |
| (default) |
| PostgreSQL License |
| (default) |
| Ruby License |
| (default) |
| The Unlicense |
| (default) |
| Do What the Fuck You Want To Public License version 2 |
| (default) |
| Do What the Fuck You Want To Public License version 1 |
| (default) |
| zlib License |
| (default) |
| Zope Public License version 2.1 |
| (default) |
5.7.2. LICENSE_PERMS
and LICENSE_PERMS_NAME_
Permissions. use none
if empty.
dist-mirror
Redistribution of the distribution files is permitted. The distribution files will be added to the FreeBSD
MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
CDN.
no-dist-mirror
Redistribution of the distribution files is prohibited. This is equivalent to setting
RESTRICTED
. The distribution files will not be added to the FreeBSDMASTER_SITE_BACKUP
CDN.
dist-sell
Selling of distribution files is permitted. The distribution files will be present on the installer images.
no-dist-sell
Selling of distribution files is prohibited. This is equivalent to setting
NO_CDROM
.
pkg-mirror
Free redistribution of package is permitted. The package will be distributed on the FreeBSD package CDN https://pkg.freebsd.org/.
no-pkg-mirror
Free redistribution of package is prohibited. Equivalent to setting
NO_PACKAGE
. The package will not be distributed from the FreeBSD package CDN https://pkg.freebsd.org/.
pkg-sell
Selling of package is permitted. The package will be present on the installer images.
no-pkg-sell
Selling of package is prohibited. This is equivalent to setting
NO_CDROM
. The package will not be present on the installer images.
auto-accept
License is accepted by default. Prompts to accept a license are not displayed unless the user has defined
LICENSES_ASK
. Use this unless the license states the user must accept the terms of the license.
no-auto-accept
License is not accepted by default. The user will always be asked to confirm the acceptance of this license. This must be used if the license states that the user must accept its terms.
When both permission
and no-permission
is present the no-permission
will cancel permission
.
When permission
is not present, it is considered to be a no-permission
.
Some missing permissions will prevent a port (and all ports depending on it) from being usable by package users: A port without the A port without the |
Read the terms of the license and translate those using the available permissions.
LICENSE= UNKNOWN LICENSE_NAME= unknown LICENSE_TEXT= This program is NOT in public domain.\ It can be freely distributed for non-commercial purposes only. LICENSE_PERMS= dist-mirror no-dist-sell pkg-mirror no-pkg-sell auto-accept
Read the terms of the license and express those using the available permissions. In case of doubt, please ask for guidance on the FreeBSD ports 郵遞論壇.
LICENSE= WARSOW GPLv2 LICENSE_COMB= multi LICENSE_NAME_WARSOW= Warsow Content License LICENSE_FILE_WARSOW= ${WRKSRC}/docs/license.txt LICENSE_PERMS_WARSOW= dist-mirror pkg-mirror auto-accept
When the permissions of the GPLv2 and the UNKNOWN licenses are mixed, the port ends up with dist-mirror dist-sell pkg-mirror pkg-sell auto-accept dist-mirror no-dist-sell pkg-mirror no-pkg-sell auto-accept
.
The no-permissions
cancel the permissions.
The resulting list of permissions are dist-mirror pkg-mirror auto-accept.
The distribution files and the packages will not be available on the installer images.
5.7.3. LICENSE_GROUPS
and LICENSE_GROUPS_NAME
Groups the license belongs.
FSF
Free Software Foundation Approved, see the FSF Licensing & Compliance Team.
GPL
GPL Compatible
OSI
OSI Approved, see the Open Source Initiative Open Source Licenses page.
COPYFREE
Comply with Copyfree Standard Definition, see the Copyfree Licenses page.
FONTS
Font licenses
5.7.4. LICENSE_NAME
and LICENSE_NAME_NAME
Full name of the license.
LICENSE_NAME
LICENSE= UNRAR LICENSE_NAME= UnRAR License LICENSE_FILE= ${WRKSRC}/license.txt LICENSE_PERMS= dist-mirror dist-sell pkg-mirror pkg-sell auto-accept
5.7.5. LICENSE_FILE
and LICENSE_FILE_NAME
Full path to the file containing the license text, usually ${WRKSRC}/some/file.
If the file is not in the distfile, and its content is too long to be put in LICENSE_TEXT
, put it in a new file in ${FILESDIR}.
LICENSE_FILE
LICENSE= GPLv3+ LICENSE_FILE= ${WRKSRC}/COPYING
5.7.6. LICENSE_TEXT
and LICENSE_TEXT_NAME
Text to use as a license. Useful when the license is not in the distribution files and its text is short.
LICENSE_TEXT
LICENSE= UNKNOWN LICENSE_NAME= unknown LICENSE_TEXT= This program is NOT in public domain.\ It can be freely distributed for non-commercial purposes only,\ and THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THIS PROGRAM. LICENSE_PERMS= dist-mirror no-dist-sell pkg-mirror no-pkg-sell auto-accept
5.7.7. LICENSE_DISTFILES
and LICENSE_DISTFILES_NAME
The distribution files to which the licenses apply. Defaults to all the distribution files.
LICENSE_DISTFILES
Used when the distribution files do not all have the same license. For example, one has a code license, and another has some artwork that cannot be redistributed:
MASTER_SITES= SF/some-game DISTFILES= ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX} artwork.zip LICENSE= BSD3CLAUSE ARTWORK LICENSE_COMB= dual LICENSE_NAME_ARTWORK= The game artwork license LICENSE_TEXT_ARTWORK= The README says that the files cannot be redistributed LICENSE_PERMS_ARTWORK= pkg-mirror pkg-sell auto-accept LICENSE_DISTFILES_BSD3CLAUSE= ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX} LICENSE_DISTFILES_ARTWORK= artwork.zip
5.7.8. LICENSE_COMB
Set to multi
if all licenses apply.
Set to dual
if any license applies.
Defaults to single
.
When a port says "This software may be distributed under the GNU General Public License or the Artistic License", it means that either license can be used. Use this:
LICENSE= ART10 GPLv1 LICENSE_COMB= dual
If license files are provided, use this:
LICENSE= ART10 GPLv1 LICENSE_COMB= dual LICENSE_FILE_ART10= ${WRKSRC}/Artistic LICENSE_FILE_GPLv1= ${WRKSRC}/Copying
When part of a port has one license, and another part has a different license, use multi
:
LICENSE= GPLv2 LGPL21+ LICENSE_COMB= multi
5.8. PORTSCOUT
Portscout is an automated distfile check utility for the FreeBSD Ports Collection, described in detail in Portscout: the FreeBSD Ports Distfile Scanner.
PORTSCOUT
defines special conditions within which the Portscout distfile scanner is restricted.
Situations where PORTSCOUT
is set include:
When distfiles have to be ignored for specific versions. For example, to exclude version 8.2 and version 8.3 from distfile version checks because they are known to be broken, add:
PORTSCOUT= skipv:8.2,8.3
When distfile version checks have to be disabled completely. For example, if a port is not going to be updated ever again, add:
PORTSCOUT= ignore:1
When specific versions or specific major and minor revisions of a distfile must be checked. For example, if only version 0.6.4 must be monitored because newer versions have compatibility issues with FreeBSD, add:
PORTSCOUT= limit:^0\.6\.4
When URLs listing the available versions differ from the download URLs. For example, to limit distfile version checks to the download page for the databases/pgtune port, add:
PORTSCOUT= site:http://pgfoundry.org/frs/?group_id=1000416
5.9. Dependencies
Many ports depend on other ports. This is a very convenient feature of most Unix-like operating systems, including FreeBSD. Multiple ports can share a common dependency, rather than bundling that dependency with every port or package that needs it. There are seven variables that can be used to ensure that all the required bits will be on the user’s machine. There are also some pre-supported dependency variables for common cases, plus a few more to control the behavior of dependencies.
When software has extra dependencies that provide extra features, the base dependencies listed in |
5.9.1. LIB_DEPENDS
This variable specifies the shared libraries this port depends on.
It is a list of lib:dir
tuples where lib
is the name of the shared library, dir
is the directory in which to find it in case it is not available.
For example,
LIB_DEPENDS= libjpeg.so:graphics/jpeg
will check for a shared jpeg library with any version, and descend into the graphics/jpeg subdirectory of the ports tree to build and install it if it is not found.
The dependency is checked twice, once from within the build
target and then from within the install
target.
Also, the name of the dependency is put into the package so that pkg install
(see pkg-install(8)) will automatically install it if it is not on the user’s system.
5.9.2. RUN_DEPENDS
This variable specifies executables or files this port depends on during run-time.
It is a list of path:dir
[:target
] tuples where path
is the name of the executable or file, dir is the directory in which to find it in case it is not available, and target is the target to call in that directory.
If path starts with a slash (/
), it is treated as a file and its existence is tested with test -e
; otherwise, it is assumed to be an executable, and which -s
is used to determine if the program exists in the search path.
For example,
RUN_DEPENDS= ${LOCALBASE}/news/bin/innd:news/inn \ xmlcatmgr:textproc/xmlcatmgr
will check if the file or directory /usr/local/news/bin/innd exists, and build and install it from the news/inn subdirectory of the ports tree if it is not found.
It will also see if an executable called xmlcatmgr
is in the search path, and descend into textproc/xmlcatmgr to build and install it if it is not found.
In this case, |
The official search /sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin:/usr/local/sbin:/usr/local/bin |
The dependency is checked from within the install
target.
Also, the name of the dependency is put into the package so that pkg install
(see pkg-install(8)) will automatically install it if it is not on the user’s system.
The target part can be omitted if it is the same as DEPENDS_TARGET
.
A quite common situation is when RUN_DEPENDS
is literally the same as BUILD_DEPENDS
, especially if ported software is written in a scripted language or if it requires the same build and run-time environment.
In this case, it is both tempting and intuitive to directly assign one to the other:
RUN_DEPENDS= ${BUILD_DEPENDS}
However, such assignment can pollute run-time dependencies with entries not defined in the port’s original BUILD_DEPENDS
.
This happens because of make(1)'s lazy evaluation of variable assignment.
Consider a Makefile with USE_*
, which are processed by ports/Mk/bsd.*.mk to augment initial build dependencies.
For example, USES= gmake
adds devel/gmake to BUILD_DEPENDS
.
To prevent such additional dependencies from polluting RUN_DEPENDS
, create another variable with the current content of BUILD_DEPENDS
and assign it to both BUILD_DEPENDS
and RUN_DEPENDS
:
MY_DEPENDS= some:devel/some \ other:lang/other BUILD_DEPENDS= ${MY_DEPENDS} RUN_DEPENDS= ${MY_DEPENDS}
Do not use |
5.9.3. BUILD_DEPENDS
This variable specifies executables or files this port requires to build.
Like RUN_DEPENDS
, it is a list of path:dir
[:target
] tuples.
For example,
BUILD_DEPENDS= unzip:archivers/unzip
will check for an executable called unzip
, and descend into the archivers/unzip subdirectory of the ports tree to build and install it if it is not found.
"build" here means everything from extraction to compilation.
The dependency is checked from within the |
5.9.4. FETCH_DEPENDS
This variable specifies executables or files this port requires to fetch.
Like the previous two, it is a list of path:dir
[:target
] tuples.
For example,
FETCH_DEPENDS= ncftp2:net/ncftp2
will check for an executable called ncftp2
, and descend into the net/ncftp2 subdirectory of the ports tree to build and install it if it is not found.
The dependency is checked from within the fetch
target.
The target part can be omitted if it is the same as DEPENDS_TARGET
.
5.9.5. EXTRACT_DEPENDS
This variable specifies executables or files this port requires for extraction.
Like the previous, it is a list of path:dir
[:target
] tuples.
For example,
EXTRACT_DEPENDS= unzip:archivers/unzip
will check for an executable called unzip
, and descend into the archivers/unzip subdirectory of the ports tree to build and install it if it is not found.
The dependency is checked from within the extract
target.
The target part can be omitted if it is the same as DEPENDS_TARGET
.
Use this variable only if the extraction does not already work (the default assumes |
5.9.6. PATCH_DEPENDS
This variable specifies executables or files this port requires to patch.
Like the previous, it is a list of path:dir
[:target
] tuples. For example,
PATCH_DEPENDS= ${NONEXISTENT}:java/jfc:extract
will descend into the java/jfc subdirectory of the ports tree to extract it.
The dependency is checked from within the patch
target.
The target part can be omitted if it is the same as DEPENDS_TARGET
.
5.9.7. USES
Parameters can be added to define different features and dependencies used by the port. They are specified by adding this line to the Makefile:
USES= feature[:arguments]
For the complete list of values, please see Using USES
Macros.
|
5.9.8. USE_*
Several variables exist to define common dependencies shared by many ports.
Their use is optional, but helps to reduce the verbosity of the port Makefiles.
Each of them is styled as USE_*
.
These variables may be used only in the port Makefiles and ports/Mk/bsd.*.mk.
They are not meant for user-settable options - use PORT_OPTIONS
for that purpose.
It is always incorrect to set any USE_GCC=X.Y (where X.Y is version number) would add a dependency on gccXY for every port, including |
Variable | Means | ||
---|---|---|---|
| The port requires GCC ( For example: USE_GCC=yes # port requires a current version of GCC USE_GCC=11+:build # port requires GCC 11 or later at build time only
|
Variables related to gmake and configure are described in Building Mechanisms, while autoconf, automake and libtool are described in Using GNU Autotools. Perl related variables are described in Using Perl. X11 variables are listed in Using X11. Using Gnome deals with GNOME and Using KDE with KDE related variables. Using Java documents Java variables, while Web Applications contains information on Apache, PHP and PEAR modules. Python is discussed in Using Python, while Ruby in Using Ruby. Using SDL provides variables used for SDL applications and finally, Using Xfce contains information on Xfce.
5.9.9. Minimal Version of a Dependency
A minimal version of a dependency can be specified in any *_DEPENDS
except LIB_DEPENDS
using this syntax:
p5-Spiffy>=0.26:devel/p5-Spiffy
The first field contains a dependent package name, which must match the entry in the package database, a comparison sign, and a package version. The dependency is satisfied if p5-Spiffy-0.26 or newer is installed on the machine.
5.9.10. Notes on Dependencies
As mentioned above, the default target to call when a dependency is required is DEPENDS_TARGET
.
It defaults to install
.
This is a user variable; it is never defined in a port’s Makefile.
If the port needs a special way to handle a dependency, use the :target
part of *_DEPENDS
instead of redefining DEPENDS_TARGET
.
When running make clean
, the port dependencies are automatically cleaned too.
If this is not desirable, define NOCLEANDEPENDS
in the environment.
This may be particularly desirable if the port has something that takes a long time to rebuild in its dependency list, such as KDE, GNOME or Mozilla.
To depend on another port unconditionally, use the variable ${NONEXISTENT}
as the first field of BUILD_DEPENDS
or RUN_DEPENDS
.
Use this only when the source of the other port is needed.
Compilation time can be saved by specifying the target too.
For instance
BUILD_DEPENDS= ${NONEXISTENT}:graphics/jpeg:extract
will always descend to the jpeg
port and extract it.
5.9.11. Circular Dependencies Are Fatal
Do not introduce any circular dependencies into the ports tree! |
The ports building technology does not tolerate circular dependencies.
If one is introduced, someone, somewhere in the world, will have their FreeBSD installation broken almost immediately, with many others quickly to follow.
These can really be hard to detect.
If in doubt, before making that change, make sure to run: cd /usr/ports; make index
.
That process can be quite slow on older machines, but it may be able to save a large number of people, including yourself, a lot of grief in the process.
5.9.12. Problems Caused by Automatic Dependencies
Dependencies must be declared either explicitly or by using the OPTIONS framework. Using other methods like automatic detection complicates indexing, which causes problems for port and package management.
.include <bsd.port.pre.mk> .if exists(${LOCALBASE}/bin/foo) LIB_DEPENDS= libbar.so:foo/bar .endif
The problem with trying to automatically add dependencies is that files and settings outside an individual port can change at any time. For example: an index is built, then a batch of ports are installed. But one of the ports installs the tested file. The index is now incorrect, because an installed port unexpectedly has a new dependency. The index may still be wrong even after rebuilding if other ports also determine their need for dependencies based on the existence of other files.
OPTIONS_DEFINE= BAR BAR_DESC= Calling cellphones via bar BAR_LIB_DEPENDS= libbar.so:foo/bar
Testing option variables is the correct method. It will not cause inconsistencies in the index of a batch of ports, provided the options were defined prior to the index build. Simple scripts can then be used to automate the building, installation, and updating of these ports and their packages.
5.10. Slave Ports and MASTERDIR
If the port needs to build slightly different versions of packages by having a variable (for instance, resolution, or paper size) take different values, create one subdirectory per package to make it easier for users to see what to do, but try to share as many files as possible between ports.
Typically, by using variables cleverly, only a very short Makefile is needed in all but one of the directories.
In the sole Makefile, use MASTERDIR
to specify the directory where the rest of the files are.
Also, use a variable as part of PKGNAMESUFFIX
so the packages will have different names.
This will be best demonstrated by an example. This is part of print/pkfonts300/Makefile;
PORTNAME= pkfonts${RESOLUTION} PORTVERSION= 1.0 DISTFILES= pk${RESOLUTION}.tar.gz PLIST= ${PKGDIR}/pkg-plist.${RESOLUTION} .if !defined(RESOLUTION) RESOLUTION= 300 .else .if ${RESOLUTION} != 118 && ${RESOLUTION} != 240 && \ ${RESOLUTION} != 300 && ${RESOLUTION} != 360 && \ ${RESOLUTION} != 400 && ${RESOLUTION} != 600 .BEGIN: @${ECHO_MSG} "Error: invalid value for RESOLUTION: \"${RESOLUTION}\"" @${ECHO_MSG} "Possible values are: 118, 240, 300, 360, 400 and 600." @${FALSE} .endif .endif
print/pkfonts300 also has all the regular patches, package files, etc.
Running make
there, it will take the default value for the resolution (300) and build the port normally.
As for other resolutions, this is the entire print/pkfonts360/Makefile:
RESOLUTION= 360 MASTERDIR= ${.CURDIR}/../pkfonts300 .include "${MASTERDIR}/Makefile"
(print/pkfonts118/Makefile, print/pkfonts600/Makefile, and all the other are similar).
MASTERDIR
definition tells bsd.port.mk that the regular set of subdirectories like FILESDIR
and SCRIPTDIR
are to be found under pkfonts300.
The RESOLUTION=360
line will override the RESOLUTION=300
line in pkfonts300/Makefile and the port will be built with resolution set to 360.
5.11. Man Pages
If the port anchors its man tree somewhere other than PREFIX
, use MANDIRS
to specify those directories.
Note that the files corresponding to manual pages must be placed in pkg-plist along with the rest of the files.
The purpose of MANDIRS
is to enable automatic compression of manual pages, therefore the file names are suffixed with .gz.
5.12. Info Files
If the package needs to install GNU info files, list them in INFO
(without the trailing .info
), one entry per document.
These files are assumed to be installed to PREFIX/INFO_PATH.
Change INFO_PATH
if the package uses a different location.
However, this is not recommended. These entries contain just the path relative to PREFIX/INFO_PATH.
For example, lang/gcc34 installs info files to PREFIX/INFO_PATH/gcc34, and INFO
will be something like this:
INFO= gcc34/cpp gcc34/cppinternals gcc34/g77 ...
Appropriate installation/de-installation code will be automatically added to the temporary pkg-plist before package registration.
5.13. Makefile Options
Many applications can be built with optional or differing configurations. Examples include choice of natural (human) language, GUI versus command-line, or type of database to support. Users may need a different configuration than the default, so the ports system provides hooks the port author can use to control which variant will be built. Supporting these options properly will make users happy, and effectively provide two or more ports for the price of one.
5.13.1. OPTIONS
5.13.1.1. Background
OPTIONS_*
give the user installing the port a dialog showing the available options, and then saves those options to ${PORT_DBDIR}/${OPTIONS_NAME}/options.
The next time the port is built, the options are reused.
PORT_DBDIR
defaults to /var/db/ports.
OPTIONS_NAME
is to the port origin with an underscore as the space separator, for example, for dns/bind99 it will be dns_bind99
.
When the user runs make config
(or runs make build
for the first time), the framework checks for ${PORT_DBDIR}/${OPTIONS_NAME}/options.
If that file does not exist, the values of OPTIONS_*
are used, and a dialog box is displayed where the options can be enabled or disabled.
Then options is saved and the configured variables are used when building the port.
If a new version of the port adds new OPTIONS
, the dialog will be presented to the user with the saved values of old OPTIONS
prefilled.
make showconfig
shows the saved configuration.
Use make rmconfig
to remove the saved configuration.
5.13.1.2. Syntax
OPTIONS_DEFINE
contains a list of OPTIONS
to be used.
These are independent of each other and are not grouped:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2
Once defined, OPTIONS
are described (optional, but strongly recommended):
OPT1_DESC= Describe OPT1 OPT2_DESC= Describe OPT2 OPT3_DESC= Describe OPT3 OPT4_DESC= Describe OPT4 OPT5_DESC= Describe OPT5 OPT6_DESC= Describe OPT6
ports/Mk/bsd.options.desc.mk has descriptions for many common OPTIONS
.
While often useful, override them if the description is insufficient for the port.
When describing options, view it from the perspective of the user: "What functionality does it change?" and "Why would I want to enable this?" Do not just repeat the name.
For example, describing the |
Option names are always in all uppercase. They cannot use mixed case or lowercase. |
OPTIONS
can be grouped as radio choices, where only one choice from each group is allowed:
OPTIONS_SINGLE= SG1 OPTIONS_SINGLE_SG1= OPT3 OPT4
There must be one of each |
OPTIONS
can be grouped as radio choices, where none or only one choice from each group is allowed:
OPTIONS_RADIO= RG1 OPTIONS_RADIO_RG1= OPT7 OPT8
OPTIONS
can also be grouped as "multiple-choice" lists, where at least one option must be enabled:
OPTIONS_MULTI= MG1 OPTIONS_MULTI_MG1= OPT5 OPT6
OPTIONS
can also be grouped as "multiple-choice" lists, where none or any option can be enabled:
OPTIONS_GROUP= GG1 OPTIONS_GROUP_GG1= OPT9 OPT10
OPTIONS
are unset by default, unless they are listed in OPTIONS_DEFAULT
:
OPTIONS_DEFAULT= OPT1 OPT3 OPT6
OPTIONS
definitions must appear before the inclusion of bsd.port.options.mk.
PORT_OPTIONS
values can only be tested after the inclusion of bsd.port.options.mk.
Inclusion of bsd.port.pre.mk can be used instead, too, and is still widely used in ports written before the introduction of bsd.port.options.mk.
But be aware that some variables will not work as expected after the inclusion of bsd.port.pre.mk, typically some USE_*
flags.
OPTIONS
OPTIONS_DEFINE= FOO BAR OPTIONS_DEFAULT=FOO FOO_DESC= Option foo support BAR_DESC= Feature bar support # Will add --with-foo / --without-foo FOO_CONFIGURE_WITH= foo BAR_RUN_DEPENDS= bar:bar/bar .include <bsd.port.mk>
OPTIONS
.if ! ${PORT_OPTIONS:MEXAMPLES} CONFIGURE_ARGS+=--without-examples .endif
The form shown above is discouraged. The preferred method is using a configure knob to really enable and disable the feature to match the option:
# Will add --with-examples / --without-examples EXAMPLES_CONFIGURE_WITH= examples
OPTIONS
OPTIONS_DEFINE= EXAMPLES OPTIONS_DEFAULT= PGSQL LDAP SSL OPTIONS_SINGLE= BACKEND OPTIONS_SINGLE_BACKEND= MYSQL PGSQL BDB OPTIONS_MULTI= AUTH OPTIONS_MULTI_AUTH= LDAP PAM SSL EXAMPLES_DESC= Install extra examples MYSQL_DESC= Use MySQL as backend PGSQL_DESC= Use PostgreSQL as backend BDB_DESC= Use Berkeley DB as backend LDAP_DESC= Build with LDAP authentication support PAM_DESC= Build with PAM support SSL_DESC= Build with OpenSSL support # Will add USE_PGSQL=yes PGSQL_USE= pgsql=yes # Will add --enable-postgres / --disable-postgres PGSQL_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= postgres ICU_LIB_DEPENDS= libicuuc.so:devel/icu # Will add --with-examples / --without-examples EXAMPLES_CONFIGURE_WITH= examples # Check other OPTIONS .include <bsd.port.mk>
5.13.1.3. Default Options
These options are always on by default.
DOCS
- build and install documentation.NLS
- Native Language Support.EXAMPLES
- build and install examples.IPV6
- IPv6 protocol support.
There is no need to add these to |
5.13.2. Feature Auto-Activation
When using a GNU configure script, keep an eye on which optional features are activated by auto-detection.
Explicitly disable optional features that are not needed by adding --without-xxx
or --disable-xxx
in CONFIGURE_ARGS
.
.if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MFOO} LIB_DEPENDS+= libfoo.so:devel/foo CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-foo .endif
In the example above, imagine a library libfoo is installed on the system.
The user does not want this application to use libfoo, so he toggled the option off in the make config
dialog.
But the application’s configure script detects the library present in the system and includes its support in the resulting executable.
Now when the user decides to remove libfoo from the system, the ports system does not protest (no dependency on libfoo was recorded) but the application breaks.
FOO_LIB_DEPENDS= libfoo.so:devel/foo # Will add --enable-foo / --disable-foo FOO_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= foo
Under some circumstances, the shorthand conditional syntax can cause problems with complex constructs.
The errors are usually .if !empty(VARIABLE:MVALUE) as an alternative to .if ${VARIABLE:MVALUE} |
5.13.3. Options Helpers
There are some macros to help simplify conditional values which differ based on the options set. For easier access, a comprehensive list is provided:
PLIST_SUB
,SUB_LIST
For automatic
%%OPT%%
and%%NOOPT%%
generation, seeOPTIONS_SUB
.For more complex usage, see Generic Variables Replacement,
OPT_VARIABLE
andOPT_VARIABLE_OFF
.CONFIGURE_ARGS
For
--enable-x
and--disable-x
, seeOPT_CONFIGURE_ENABLE
.For
--with-x
and--without-x
, seeOPT_CONFIGURE_WITH
.For all other cases, see
OPT_CONFIGURE_ON
andOPT_CONFIGURE_OFF
.CMAKE_ARGS
For arguments that are booleans (
on
,off
,true
,false
,0
,1
) seeOPT_CMAKE_BOOL
andOPT_CMAKE_BOOL_OFF
.For all other cases, see
OPT_CMAKE_ON
andOPT_CMAKE_OFF
.MESON_ARGS
For arguments that take
true
orfalse
, seeOPT_MESON_TRUE
andOPT_MESON_FALSE
.For arguments that take
yes
orno
, useOPT_MESON_YES
andOPT_MESON_NO
.For arguments that take
enabled
ordisabled
, seeOPT_MESON_ENABLED
andOPT_MESON_DISABLED
.For all other cases, use
OPT_MESON_ON
andOPT_MESON_OFF
.QMAKE_ARGS
USE_*
*_DEPENDS
*
(Any variable)The most used variables have direct helpers, see Generic Variables Replacement,
OPT_VARIABLE
andOPT_VARIABLE_OFF
.For any variable without a specific helper, see
OPT_VARS
andOPT_VARS_OFF
.- Options dependencies
When an option need another option to work, see
OPT_IMPLIES
.- Options conflicts
When an option cannot work if another is also enabled, see
OPT_PREVENTS
andOPT_PREVENTS_MSG
.- Build targets
When an option need some extra processing, see Additional Build Targets,
target-OPT-on
andtarget-OPT-off
.
5.13.3.1. OPTIONS_SUB
If OPTIONS_SUB
is set to yes
then each of the options added to OPTIONS_DEFINE
will be added to PLIST_SUB
and SUB_LIST
, for example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPTIONS_SUB= yes
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} PLIST_SUB+= OPT1="" NO_OPT1="@comment " SUB_LIST+= OPT1="" NO_OPT1="@comment " .else PLIST_SUB+= OPT1="@comment " NO_OPT1="" SUB_LIST+= OPT1="@comment " NO_OPT1="" .endif
The value of |
5.13.3.2. OPT_USE
and OPT_USE_OFF
When option OPT is selected, for each key=value
pair in OPT_USE
, value is appended to the corresponding USE_KEY
.
If value has spaces in it, replace them with commas and they will be changed back to spaces during processing.
OPT_USE_OFF
works the same way, but when OPT
is not selected.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_USES= xorg OPT1_USE= mysql=yes xorg=x11,xextproto,xext,xrandr OPT1_USE_OFF= openssl=yes
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} USE_MYSQL= yes USES+= xorg USE_XORG= x11 xextproto xext xrandr .else USE_OPENSSL= yes .endif
5.13.3.3. CONFIGURE_ARGS
Helpers
5.13.3.3.1. OPT_CONFIGURE_ENABLE
When option OPT is selected, for each entry in OPT_CONFIGURE_ENABLE
then --enable-entry
is appended to CONFIGURE_ARGS
.
When option OPT is not selected, --disable-entry
is appended to CONFIGURE_ARGS
.
An optional argument can be specified with an =
symbol.
This argument is only appended to the --enable-entry
configure option.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2 OPT1_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= test1 test2 OPT2_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= test2=exhaustive
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-test1 --enable-test2 .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --disable-test1 --disable-test2 .endif .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT2} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-test2=exhaustive .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --disable-test2 .endif
5.13.3.3.2. OPT_CONFIGURE_WITH
When option OPT is selected, for each entry in OPT_CONFIGURE_WITH
then --with-_entry
is appended to CONFIGURE_ARGS
.
When option OPT is not selected, --without-entry
is appended to CONFIGURE_ARGS
.
An optional argument can be specified with an =
symbol.
This argument is only appended to the --with-entry
configure option.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2 OPT1_CONFIGURE_WITH= test1 OPT2_CONFIGURE_WITH= test2=exhaustive
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --with-test1 .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --without-test1 .endif .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT2} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --with-test2=exhaustive .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --without-test2 .endif
5.13.3.3.3. OPT_CONFIGURE_ON
and OPT_CONFIGURE_OFF
When option OPT is selected, the value of OPT_CONFIGURE_ON
, if defined, is appended to CONFIGURE_ARGS
.
OPT_CONFIGURE_OFF
works the same way, but when OPT
is not selected.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_CONFIGURE_ON= --add-test OPT1_CONFIGURE_OFF= --no-test
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --add-test .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --no-test .endif
Most of the time, the helpers in |
5.13.3.4. CMAKE_ARGS
Helpers
5.13.3.4.1. OPT_CMAKE_ON
and OPT_CMAKE_OFF
When option OPT is selected, the value of OPT_CMAKE_ON
, if defined, is appended to CMAKE_ARGS
. OPT_CMAKE_OFF
works the same way, but when OPT
is not selected.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_CMAKE_ON= -DTEST:BOOL=true -DDEBUG:BOOL=true OPT1_CMAKE_OFF= -DOPTIMIZE:BOOL=true
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CMAKE_ARGS+= -DTEST:BOOL=true -DDEBUG:BOOL=true .else CMAKE_ARGS+= -DOPTIMIZE:BOOL=true .endif
See |
5.13.3.4.2. OPT_CMAKE_BOOL
and OPT_CMAKE_BOOL_OFF
When option OPT is selected, for each entry in OPT_CMAKE_BOOL
then -D_entry_:BOOL=true
is appended to CMAKE_ARGS
.
When option OPT is not selected, -D_entry_:BOOL=false
is appended to CONFIGURE_ARGS
.
OPT_CMAKE_BOOL_OFF
is the opposite, -D_entry_:BOOL=false
is appended to CMAKE_ARGS
when the option is selected, and -D_entry_:BOOL=true
when the option is not selected.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_CMAKE_BOOL= TEST DEBUG OPT1_CMAKE_BOOL_OFF= OPTIMIZE
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CMAKE_ARGS+= -DTEST:BOOL=true -DDEBUG:BOOL=true \ -DOPTIMIZE:BOOL=false .else CMAKE_ARGS+= -DTEST:BOOL=false -DDEBUG:BOOL=false \ -DOPTIMIZE:BOOL=true .endif
5.13.3.5. MESON_ARGS
Helpers
5.13.3.5.1. OPT_MESON_ON
and OPT_MESON_OFF
When option OPT is selected, the value of OPT_MESON_ON
, if defined, is appended to MESON_ARGS
.
OPT_MESON_OFF
works the same way, but when OPT
is not selected.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_MESON_ON= -Dopt=1 OPT1_MESON_OFF= -Dopt=2
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} MESON_ARGS+= -Dopt=1 .else MESON_ARGS+= -Dopt=2 .endif
5.13.3.5.2. OPT_MESON_TRUE
and OPT_MESON_FALSE
When option OPT is selected, for each entry in OPT_MESON_TRUE
then -D_entry_=true
is appended to MESON_ARGS
.
When option OPT is not selected, -D_entry_=false
is appended to MESON_ARGS
.
OPT_MESON_FALSE
is the opposite, -D_entry_=false
is appended to MESON_ARGS
when the option is selected, and -D_entry_=true
when the option is not selected.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_MESON_TRUE= test debug OPT1_MESON_FALSE= optimize
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} MESON_ARGS+= -Dtest=true -Ddebug=true \ -Doptimize=false .else MESON_ARGS+= -Dtest=false -Ddebug=false \ -Doptimize=true .endif
5.13.3.5.3. OPT_MESON_YES
and OPT_MESON_NO
When option OPT is selected, for each entry in OPT_MESON_YES
then -D_entry_=yes
is appended to MESON_ARGS
.
When option OPT is not selected, -D_entry_=no
is appended to MESON_ARGS
.
OPT_MESON_NO
is the opposite, -D_entry_=no
is appended to MESON_ARGS
when the option is selected, and -D_entry_=yes
when the option is not selected.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_MESON_YES= test debug OPT1_MESON_NO= optimize
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} MESON_ARGS+= -Dtest=yes -Ddebug=yes \ -Doptimize=no .else MESON_ARGS+= -Dtest=no -Ddebug=no \ -Doptimize=yes .endif
5.13.3.5.4. OPT_MESON_ENABLED
and OPT_MESON_DISABLED
When option OPT is selected, for each entry in OPT_MESON_ENABLED
then -D_entry_=enabled
is appended to MESON_ARGS
.
When option OPT is not selected, -D_entry_=disabled
is appended to MESON_ARGS
.
OPT_MESON_DISABLED
is the opposite, -D_entry_=disabled
is appended to MESON_ARGS
when the option is selected, and -D_entry_=enabled
when the option is not selected.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_MESON_ENABLED= test OPT1_MESON_DISABLED= debug
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} MESON_ARGS+= -Dtest=enabled -Ddebug=disabled .else MESON_ARGS+= -Dtest=disabled -Ddebug=enabled .endif
5.13.3.6. OPT_QMAKE_ON
and OPT_QMAKE_OFF
When option OPT is selected, the value of OPT_QMAKE_ON
, if defined, is appended to QMAKE_ARGS
.
OPT_QMAKE_OFF
works the same way, but when OPT
is not selected.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_QMAKE_ON= -DTEST:BOOL=true OPT1_QMAKE_OFF= -DPRODUCTION:BOOL=true
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} QMAKE_ARGS+= -DTEST:BOOL=true .else QMAKE_ARGS+= -DPRODUCTION:BOOL=true .endif
5.13.3.7. OPT_IMPLIES
Provides a way to add dependencies between options.
When OPT is selected, all the options listed in this variable will be selected too.
Using the OPT_CONFIGURE_ENABLE
described earlier to illustrate:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2 OPT1_IMPLIES= OPT2 OPT1_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= opt1 OPT2_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= opt2
Is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-opt1 .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --disable-opt1 .endif .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT2} || ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-opt2 .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --disable-opt2 .endif
OPT_IMPLIES
This port has a X11
option, and a GNOME
option that needs the X11
option to be selected to build.
OPTIONS_DEFINE= X11 GNOME OPTIONS_DEFAULT= X11 X11_USES= xorg X11_USE= xorg=xi,xextproto GNOME_USE= gnome=gtk30 GNOME_IMPLIES= X11
5.13.3.8. OPT_PREVENTS
and OPT_PREVENTS_MSG
Provides a way to add conflicts between options.
When OPT is selected, all the options listed in OPT_PREVENTS
must be un-selected.
If OPT_PREVENTS_MSG
is set and a conflict is triggered, its content will be shown explaining why they conflict.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2 OPT1_PREVENTS= OPT2 OPT1_PREVENTS_MSG= OPT1 and OPT2 enable conflicting options
Is roughly equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT2} && ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} BROKEN= Option OPT1 conflicts with OPT2 (select only one) .endif
The only difference is that the first one will write an error after running make config
, suggesting changing the selected options.
OPT_PREVENTS
This port has X509
and SCTP
options.
Both options add patches, but the patches conflict with each other, so they cannot be selected at the same time.
OPTIONS_DEFINE= X509 SCTP SCTP_PATCHFILES= ${PORTNAME}-6.8p1-sctp-2573.patch.gz:-p1 SCTP_CONFIGURE_WITH= sctp X509_PATCH_SITES= http://www.roumenpetrov.info/openssh/x509/:x509 X509_PATCHFILES= ${PORTNAME}-7.0p1+x509-8.5.diff.gz:-p1:x509 X509_PREVENTS= SCTP X509_PREVENTS_MSG= X509 and SCTP patches conflict
5.13.3.9. OPT_VARS
and OPT_VARS_OFF
Provides a generic way to set and append to variables.
Before using |
When option OPT is selected, and OPT_VARS
defined, key=value
and key+=value
pairs are evaluated from OPT_VARS
.
An =
cause the existing value of KEY
to be overwritten, an +=
appends to the value.
OPT_VARS_OFF
works the same way, but when OPT
is not selected.
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2 OPT3 OPT1_VARS= also_build+=bin1 OPT2_VARS= also_build+=bin2 OPT3_VARS= bin3_build=yes OPT3_VARS_OFF= bin3_build=no MAKE_ARGS= ALSO_BUILD="${ALSO_BUILD}" BIN3_BUILD="${BIN3_BUILD}"
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT2 MAKE_ARGS= ALSO_BUILD="${ALSO_BUILD}" BIN3_BUILD="${BIN3_BUILD}" .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} ALSO_BUILD+= bin1 .endif .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT2} ALSO_BUILD+= bin2 .endif .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT2} BIN3_BUILD= yes .else BIN3_BUILD= no .endif
Values containing whitespace must be enclosed in quotes: OPT_VARS= foo="bar baz" This is due to the way make(1) variable expansion deals with whitespace.
When Also, do not add extra spaces after the OPT_VARS= foo= bar |
5.13.3.10. Dependencies, OPT_DEPTYPE
and OPT_DEPTYPE_OFF
For any of these dependency types:
PKG_DEPENDS
EXTRACT_DEPENDS
PATCH_DEPENDS
FETCH_DEPENDS
BUILD_DEPENDS
LIB_DEPENDS
RUN_DEPENDS
When option OPT is selected, the value of OPT_DEPTYPE
, if defined, is appended to DEPTYPE
.
OPT_DEPTYPE_OFF
works the same, but when OPT
is not selected.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_LIB_DEPENDS= liba.so:devel/a OPT1_LIB_DEPENDS_OFF= libb.so:devel/b
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} LIB_DEPENDS+= liba.so:devel/a .else LIB_DEPENDS+= libb.so:devel/b .endif
5.13.3.11. Generic Variables Replacement, OPT_VARIABLE
and OPT_VARIABLE_OFF
For any of these variables:
ALL_TARGET
BINARY_ALIAS
BROKEN
CATEGORIES
CFLAGS
CONFIGURE_ENV
CONFLICTS
CONFLICTS_BUILD
CONFLICTS_INSTALL
CPPFLAGS
CXXFLAGS
DESKTOP_ENTRIES
DISTFILES
EXTRACT_ONLY
EXTRA_PATCHES
GH_ACCOUNT
GH_PROJECT
GH_SUBDIR
GH_TAGNAME
GH_TUPLE
GL_ACCOUNT
GL_COMMIT
GL_PROJECT
GL_SITE
GL_SUBDIR
GL_TUPLE
IGNORE
INFO
INSTALL_TARGET
LDFLAGS
LIBS
MAKE_ARGS
MAKE_ENV
MASTER_SITES
PATCHFILES
PATCH_SITES
PLIST_DIRS
PLIST_FILES
PLIST_SUB
PORTDOCS
PORTEXAMPLES
SUB_FILES
SUB_LIST
TEST_TARGET
USES
When option OPT is selected, the value of OPT_ABOVEVARIABLE
, if defined, is appended to ABOVEVARIABLE
.
OPT_ABOVEVARIABLE_OFF
works the same way, but when OPT
is not selected.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 OPT1_USES= gmake OPT1_CFLAGS_OFF= -DTEST
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} USES+= gmake .else CFLAGS+= -DTEST .endif
Some variables are not in this list, in particular |
Some of these variables, at least With these lines in the Makefile: ALL_TARGET= all DOCS_ALL_TARGET= doc If the With only the options helper line in the Makefile: DOCS_ALL_TARGET= doc If the |
5.13.3.12. Additional Build Targets, target-OPT-on
and target-OPT-off
These Makefile targets can accept optional extra build targets:
pre-fetch
do-fetch
post-fetch
pre-extract
do-extract
post-extract
pre-patch
do-patch
post-patch
pre-configure
do-configure
post-configure
pre-build
do-build
post-build
pre-install
do-install
post-install
post-stage
pre-package
do-package
post-package
When option OPT is selected, the target TARGET-OPT-on
, if defined, is executed after TARGET
.
TARGET-OPT-off
works the same way, but when OPT
is not selected.
For example:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 post-patch-OPT1-on: @${REINPLACE_CMD} -e '/opt1/s|/usr/bin/|${EXAMPLESDIR}/|' ${WRKSRC}/Makefile post-patch-OPT1-off: @${REINPLACE_CMD} -e '/opt1/s|/usr/bin/|${PREFIX}/bin/|' ${WRKSRC}/Makefile
is equivalent to:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= OPT1 .include <bsd.port.options.mk> post-patch: .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MOPT1} @${REINPLACE_CMD} -e '/opt1/s|/usr/bin/|${EXAMPLESDIR}/|' ${WRKSRC}/Makefile .else @${REINPLACE_CMD} -e '/opt1/s|/usr/bin/|${PREFIX}/bin/|' ${WRKSRC}/Makefile .endif
5.14. Specifying the Working Directory
Each port is extracted into a working directory, which must be writable.
The ports system defaults to having DISTFILES
unpack in to a directory called ${DISTNAME}
.
In other words, if the Makefile has:
PORTNAME= foo DISTVERSION= 1.0
then the port’s distribution files contain a top-level directory, foo-1.0, and the rest of the files are located under that directory.
A number of variables can be overridden if that is not the case.
5.14.1. WRKSRC
The variable lists the name of the directory that is created when the application’s distfiles are extracted. If our previous example extracted into a directory called foo (and not foo-1.0) write:
WRKSRC= ${WRKDIR}/foo
or possibly
WRKSRC= ${WRKDIR}/${PORTNAME}
5.14.2. WRKSRC_SUBDIR
If the source files needed for the port are in a subdirectory of the extracted distribution file, set WRKSRC_SUBDIR
to that directory.
WRKSRC_SUBDIR= src
5.14.3. NO_WRKSUBDIR
If the port does not extract in to a subdirectory at all, then set NO_WRKSUBDIR
to indicate that.
NO_WRKSUBDIR= yes
Because |
5.15. Conflict Handling
There are three different variables to register a conflict between packages and ports: CONFLICTS
, CONFLICTS_INSTALL
and CONFLICTS_BUILD
.
The conflict variables automatically set the variable |
When removing one of several conflicting ports, it is advisable to retain CONFLICTS
in those other ports for a few months to cater for users who only update once in a while.
CONFLICTS_INSTALL
If the package cannot coexist with other packages (because of file conflicts, runtime incompatibilities, etc.).
CONFLICTS_INSTALL
check is done after the build stage and prior to the install stage.
CONFLICTS_BUILD
If the port cannot be built when other specific ports are already installed. Build conflicts are not recorded in the resulting package.
CONFLICTS
If the port cannot be built if a certain port is already installed and the resulting package cannot coexist with the other package.
CONFLICTS
check is done prior to the build stage and prior to the install stage.
The most common content of one of these variable is the package base of another port.
The package base is the package name without the appended version, it can be obtained by running make -V PKGBASE
.
CONFLICTS*
dns/bind99 cannot be installed if dns/bind910 is present because they install same files. First gather the package base to use:
% make -C dns/bind99 -V PKGBASE
bind99
% make -C dns/bind910 -V PKGBASE
bind910
Then add to the Makefile of dns/bind99:
CONFLICTS_INSTALL= bind910
And add to the Makefile of dns/bind910:
CONFLICTS_INSTALL= bind99
Sometimes, only certain versions of another port are incompatible.
When this is the case, use the full package name including the version.
If necessary, use shell globs like *
and ?
so that all necessary versions are matched.
CONFLICTS*
With Globs.From versions from 2.0 and up-to 2.4.1_2, deskutils/gnotime used to install a bundled version of databases/qof.
To reflect this past, the Makefile of databases/qof contains:
CONFLICTS_INSTALL= gnotime-2.[0-3]* \ gnotime-2.4.0* gnotime-2.4.1 \ gnotime-2.4.1_[12]
The first entry match versions 2.0
through 2.3
, the second all the revisions of 2.4.0
, the third the exact 2.4.1
version, and the last the first and second revisions of the 2.4.1
version.
deskutils/gnotime does not have any conflicts line because its current version does not conflict with anything else.
The variable DISABLE_CONFLICTS
may be temporarily set when making targets that are not affected by conflicts.
The variable is not to be set in port Makefiles.
% make -DDISABLE_CONFLICTS patch
5.16. Installing Files
The |
5.16.1. INSTALL_*
Macros
Use the macros provided in bsd.port.mk to ensure correct modes of files in the port’s *-install
targets.
Set ownership directly in pkg-plist with the corresponding entries, such as @(owner,group,)
, @owner owner
, and @group group
.
These operators work until overridden, or until the end of pkg-plist, so remember to reset them after they are no longer needed.
The default ownership is root:wheel
.
See Base Keywords for more information.
INSTALL_PROGRAM
is a command to install binary executables.INSTALL_SCRIPT
is a command to install executable scripts.INSTALL_LIB
is a command to install shared libraries (but not static libraries).INSTALL_KLD
is a command to install kernel loadable modules. Some architectures do not like having the modules stripped, so use this command instead ofINSTALL_PROGRAM
.INSTALL_DATA
is a command to install sharable data, including static libraries.INSTALL_MAN
is a command to install manpages and other documentation (it does not compress anything).
These variables are set to the install(1) command with the appropriate flags for each situation.
Do not use |
5.16.2. Stripping Binaries and Shared Libraries
Installed binaries should be stripped. Do not strip binaries manually unless absolutely required.
The INSTALL_PROGRAM
macro installs and strips a binary at the same time.
The INSTALL_LIB
macro does the same thing to shared libraries.
When a file must be stripped, but neither INSTALL_PROGRAM
nor INSTALL_LIB
macros are desirable, ${STRIP_CMD}
strips the program or shared library.
This is typically done within the post-install
target. For example:
post-install: ${STRIP_CMD} ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/bin/xdl
When multiple files need to be stripped:
post-install: .for l in geometry media body track world ${STRIP_CMD} ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/lib/lib${PORTNAME}-${l}.so.0 .endfor
Use file(1) on a file to determine if it has been stripped.
Binaries are reported by file(1) as stripped
, or not stripped
.
Additionally, strip(1) will detect programs that have already been stripped and exit cleanly.
When The variables ( Some software, add |
5.16.3. Installing a Whole Tree of Files
Sometimes, a large number of files must be installed while preserving their hierarchical organization.
For example, copying over a whole directory tree from WRKSRC
to a target directory under PREFIX
.
Note that PREFIX
, EXAMPLESDIR
, DATADIR
, and other path variables must always be prepended with STAGEDIR
to respect staging (see Staging).
Two macros exist for this situation.
The advantage of using these macros instead of cp
is that they guarantee proper file ownership and permissions on target files.
The first macro, COPYTREE_BIN
, will set all the installed files to be executable, thus being suitable for installing into PREFIX/bin.
The second macro, COPYTREE_SHARE
, does not set executable permissions on files, and is therefore suitable for installing files under PREFIX/share target.
post-install: ${MKDIR} ${STAGEDIR}${EXAMPLESDIR} (cd ${WRKSRC}/examples && ${COPYTREE_SHARE} . ${STAGEDIR}${EXAMPLESDIR})
This example will install the contents of the examples directory in the vendor distfile to the proper examples location of the port.
post-install: ${MKDIR} ${STAGEDIR}${DATADIR}/summer (cd ${WRKSRC}/temperatures && ${COPYTREE_SHARE} "June July August" ${STAGEDIR}${DATADIR}/summer)
And this example will install the data of summer months to the summer subdirectory of a DATADIR.
Additional find
arguments can be passed via the third argument to COPYTREE_*
macros.
For example, to install all files from the first example except Makefiles, one can use these commands.
post-install: ${MKDIR} ${STAGEDIR}${EXAMPLESDIR} (cd ${WRKSRC}/examples && \ ${COPYTREE_SHARE} . ${STAGEDIR}${EXAMPLESDIR} "! -name Makefile")
These macros do not add the installed files to pkg-plist.
They must be added manually.
For optional documentation (PORTDOCS
, see Install Additional Documentation) and examples (PORTEXAMPLES
), the %%PORTDOCS%%
or %%PORTEXAMPLES%%
prefixes must be prepended in pkg-plist.
5.16.4. Install Additional Documentation
If the software has some documentation other than the standard man and info pages that is useful for the user, install it under DOCSDIR
.
This can be done, like the previous item, in the post-install
target.
Create a new directory for the port.
The directory name is DOCSDIR
.
This usually equals PORTNAME
.
However, if the user might want different versions of the port to be installed at the same time, the whole PKGNAME
can be used.
Since only the files listed in pkg-plist are installed, it is safe to always install documentation to STAGEDIR
(see Staging).
Hence .if
blocks are only needed when the installed files are large enough to cause significant I/O overhead.
post-install: ${MKDIR} ${STAGEDIR}${DOCSDIR} ${INSTALL_MAN} ${WRKSRC}/docs/xvdocs.ps ${STAGEDIR}${DOCSDIR}
On the other hand, if there is a DOCS option in the port, install the documentation in a post-install-DOCS-on
target.
These targets are described in Additional Build Targets, target-OPT-on
and target-OPT-off
.
Here are some handy variables and how they are expanded by default when used in the Makefile:
DATADIR
gets expanded to PREFIX/shared/PORTNAME.DATADIR_REL
gets expanded to share/PORTNAME.DOCSDIR
gets expanded to PREFIX/shared/doc/PORTNAME.DOCSDIR_REL
gets expanded to share/doc/PORTNAME.EXAMPLESDIR
gets expanded to PREFIX/shared/examples/PORTNAME.EXAMPLESDIR_REL
gets expanded to share/examples/PORTNAME.
The |
These variables are exported to PLIST_SUB
.
Their values will appear there as pathnames relative to PREFIX if possible.
That is, share/doc/PORTNAME will be substituted for %%DOCSDIR%%
in the packing list by default, and so on.
(See more on pkg-plist substitution here.)
All conditionally installed documentation files and directories are included in pkg-plist with the %%PORTDOCS%%
prefix, for example:
%%PORTDOCS%%%%DOCSDIR%%/AUTHORS %%PORTDOCS%%%%DOCSDIR%%/CONTACT
As an alternative to enumerating the documentation files in pkg-plist, a port can set the variable PORTDOCS
to a list of file names and shell glob patterns to add to the final packing list.
The names will be relative to DOCSDIR
.
Therefore, a port that utilizes PORTDOCS
, and uses a non-default location for its documentation, must set DOCSDIR
accordingly.
If a directory is listed in PORTDOCS
or matched by a glob pattern from this variable, the entire subtree of contained files and directories will be registered in the final packing list.
If the DOCS
option has been unset then files and directories listed in PORTDOCS
would not be installed or added to port packing list.
Installing the documentation at PORTDOCS
as shown above remains up to the port itself.
A typical example of utilizing PORTDOCS
:
PORTDOCS= README.* ChangeLog docs/*
The equivalents of The contents of pkg-message are displayed upon installation. See the section on using pkg-message for details. pkg-message does not need to be added to pkg-plist. |
5.16.5. Subdirectories Under PREFIX
Try to let the port put things in the right subdirectories of PREFIX
.
Some ports lump everything and put it in the subdirectory with the port’s name, which is incorrect.
Also, many ports put everything except binaries, header files and manual pages in a subdirectory of lib, which does not work well with the BSD paradigm.
Many of the files must be moved to one of these directories: etc (setup/configuration files), libexec (executables started internally), sbin (executables for superusers/managers), info (documentation for info browser) or share (architecture independent files).
See hier(7) for details; the rules governing /usr pretty much apply to /usr/local too.
The exception are ports dealing with USENET "news".
They may use PREFIX/news as a destination for their files.
5.17. Use BINARY_ALIAS
to Rename Commands Instead of Patching the Build
When BINARY_ALIAS
is defined it will create symlinks of the given commands in a directory which will be prepended to PATH
.
Use it to substitute hardcoded commands the build phase relies on without having to patch any build files.
BINARY_ALIAS
to Make gsed
Available as sed
Some ports expect sed
to behave like GNU sed and use features that sed(1) does not provide.
GNU sed is available from textproc/gsed on FreeBSD.
Use BINARY_ALIAS
to substitute sed
with gsed
for the duration of the build:
BUILD_DEPENDS= gsed:textproc/gsed ... BINARY_ALIAS= sed=gsed
BINARY_ALIAS
to Provide Aliases for Hardcoded python3
CommandsA port that has a hardcoded reference to python3
in its build scripts will need to have it available in PATH
at build time.
Use BINARY_ALIAS
to create an alias that points to the right Python 3 binary:
USES= python:3.4+,build ... BINARY_ALIAS= python3=${PYTHON_CMD}
See Using Python for more information about USES=python
.
Binary aliases are created after the dependencies provided via |
Chapter 6. Special Considerations
This section explains the most common things to consider when creating a port.
6.1. Staging
bsd.port.mk expects ports to work with a "stage directory".
This means that a port must not install files directly to the regular destination directories (that is, under PREFIX
, for example) but instead into a separate directory from which the package is then built.
In many cases, this does not require root privileges, making it possible to build packages as an unprivileged user.
With staging, the port is built and installed into the stage directory, STAGEDIR
.
A package is created from the stage directory and then installed on the system. Automake tools refer to this concept as DESTDIR
, but in FreeBSD, DESTDIR
has a different meaning (see PREFIX
and DESTDIR
).
No port really needs to be root.
It can mostly be avoided by using |
Meta ports, or ports that do not install files themselves but only depend on other ports, must avoid needlessly extracting the mtree(8) to the stage directory. This is the basic directory layout of the package, and these empty directories will be seen as orphans. To prevent mtree(8) extraction, add this line:
NO_MTREE= yes
Metaports should use |
Staging is enabled by prepending STAGEDIR
to paths used in the pre-install
, do-install
, and post-install
targets (see the examples through the book).
Typically, this includes PREFIX
, ETCDIR
, DATADIR
, EXAMPLESDIR
, MANPREFIX
, DOCSDIR
, and so on.
Directories should be created as part of the post-install
target.
Avoid using absolute paths whenever possible.
Ports that install kernel modules must prepend |
6.1.1. Handling Symbolic Links
When creating a symbolic link, relative ones are strongly recommended.
Use ${RLN}
to create relative symbolic links.
It uses install(1) under the hood to automatically figure out the relative link to create.
${RLN}
uses install(1)'s relative symbolic feature which frees the porter of computing the relative path.
${RLN} ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/lib/libfoo.so.42 ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/lib/libfoo.so ${RLN} ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/libexec/foo/bar ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/bin/bar ${RLN} ${STAGEDIR}/var/cache/foo ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/share/foo
Will generate:
% ls -lF ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/lib
lrwxr-xr-x 1 nobody nobody 181 Aug 3 11:27 libfoo.so@ -> libfoo.so.42
-rwxr-xr-x 1 nobody nobody 15 Aug 3 11:24 libfoo.so.42*
% ls -lF ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/bin
lrwxr-xr-x 1 nobody nobody 181 Aug 3 11:27 bar@ -> ../libexec/foo/bar
% ls -lF ${STAGEDIRDIR}${PREFIX}/share
lrwxr-xr-x 1 nobody nobody 181 Aug 3 11:27 foo@ -> ../../../var/cache/foo
6.2. Bundled Libraries
This section explains why bundled dependencies are considered bad and what to do about them.
6.2.1. Why Bundled Libraries Are Bad
Some software requires the porter to locate third-party libraries and add the required dependencies to the port. Other software bundles all necessary libraries into the distribution file. The second approach seems easier at first, but there are some serious drawbacks:
This list is loosely based on the Fedora and Gentoo wikis, both licensed under the CC-BY-SA 3.0 license.
- Security
If vulnerabilities are found in the upstream library and fixed there, they might not be fixed in the library bundled with the port. One reason could be that the author is not aware of the problem. This means that the porter must fix them, or upgrade to a non-vulnerable version, and send a patch to the author. This all takes time, which results in software being vulnerable longer than necessary. This in turn makes it harder to coordinate a fix without unnecessarily leaking information about the vulnerability.
- Bugs
This problem is similar to the problem with security in the last paragraph, but generally less severe.
- Forking
It is easier for the author to fork the upstream library once it is bundled. While convenient on first sight, it means that the code diverges from upstream making it harder to address security or other problems with the software. A reason for this is that patching becomes harder.
Another problem of forking is that because code diverges from upstream, bugs get solved over and over again instead of just once at a central location. This defeats the idea of open source software in the first place.
- Symbol collision
When a library is installed on the system, it might collide with the bundled version. This can cause immediate errors at compile or link time. It can also cause errors when running the program which might be harder to track down. The latter problem could be caused because the versions of the two libraries are incompatible.
- Licensing
When bundling projects from different sources, license issues can arise more easily, especially when licenses are incompatible.
- Waste of resources
Bundled libraries waste resources on several levels. It takes longer to build the actual application, especially if these libraries are already present on the system. At run-time, they can take up unnecessary memory when the system-wide library is already loaded by one program and the bundled library is loaded by another program.
- Waste of effort
When a library needs patches for FreeBSD, these patches have to be duplicated again in the bundled library. This wastes developer time because the patches might not apply cleanly. It can also be hard to notice that these patches are required in the first place.
6.2.2. What to do About Bundled Libraries
Whenever possible, use the unbundled version of the library by adding a LIB_DEPENDS
to the port.
If such a port does not exist yet, consider creating it.
Only use bundled libraries if the upstream has a good track record on security and using unbundled versions leads to overly complex patches.
In some very special cases, for example emulators, like Wine, a port has to bundle libraries, because they are in a different architecture, or they have been modified to fit the software’s use.
In that case, those libraries should not be exposed to other ports for linking.
Add |
6.3. Shared Libraries
If the port installs one or more shared libraries, define a USE_LDCONFIG
make variable, which will instruct a bsd.port.mk to run ${LDCONFIG} -m
on the directory where the new library is installed (usually PREFIX/lib) during post-install
target to register it into the shared library cache.
This variable, when defined, will also facilitate addition of an appropriate @exec /sbin/ldconfig -m
and @unexec /sbin/ldconfig -R
pair into pkg-plist, so that a user who installed the package can start using the shared library immediately and de-installation will not cause the system to still believe the library is there.
USE_LDCONFIG= yes
The default directory can be overridden by setting USE_LDCONFIG
to a list of directories into which shared libraries are to be installed.
For example, if the port installs shared libraries into PREFIX/lib/foo and PREFIX/lib/bar use this in Makefile:
USE_LDCONFIG= ${PREFIX}/lib/foo ${PREFIX}/lib/bar
Please double-check, often this is not necessary at all or can be avoided through -rpath
or setting LD_RUN_PATH
during linking (see lang/mosml for an example), or through a shell-wrapper which sets LD_LIBRARY_PATH
before invoking the binary, like www/seamonkey does.
When installing 32-bit libraries on a 64-bit system, use USE_LDCONFIG32
instead.
If the software uses autotools, and specifically libtool
, add USES=libtool
.
When the major library version number increments in the update to the new port version, all other ports that link to the affected library must have their PORTREVISION
incremented, to force recompilation with the new library version.
6.4. Ports with Distribution Restrictions or Legal Concerns
Licenses vary, and some of them place restrictions on how the application can be packaged, whether it can be sold for profit, and so on.
It is the responsibility of a porter to read the licensing terms of the software and make sure that the FreeBSD project will not be held accountable for violating them by redistributing the source or compiled binaries either via FTP/HTTP or CD-ROM. If in doubt, please contact the FreeBSD ports 郵遞論壇. |
In situations like this, the variables described in the next sections can be set.
6.4.1. NO_PACKAGE
This variable indicates that we may not generate a binary package of the application. For instance, the license may disallow binary redistribution, or it may prohibit distribution of packages created from patched sources.
However, the port’s DISTFILES
may be freely mirrored on FTP/HTTP.
They may also be distributed on a CD-ROM (or similar media) unless NO_CDROM
is set as well.
If the binary package is not generally useful, and the application must always be compiled from the source code, use NO_PACKAGE
.
For example, if the application has configuration information that is site specific hard coded into it at compile time, set NO_PACKAGE
.
Set NO_PACKAGE
to a string describing the reason why the package cannot be generated.
6.4.2. NO_CDROM
This variable alone indicates that, although we are allowed to generate binary packages, we may put neither those packages nor the port’s DISTFILES
onto a CD-ROM (or similar media) for resale.
However, the binary packages and the port’s DISTFILES
will still be available via FTP/HTTP.
If this variable is set along with NO_PACKAGE
, then only the port’s DISTFILES
will be available, and only via FTP/HTTP.
Set NO_CDROM
to a string describing the reason why the port cannot be redistributed on CD-ROM.
For instance, use this if the port’s license is for "non-commercial" use only.
6.4.3. NOFETCHFILES
Files defined in NOFETCHFILES
are not fetchable from any of MASTER_SITES
.
An example of such a file is when the file is supplied on CD-ROM by the vendor.
Tools which check for the availability of these files on MASTER_SITES
have to ignore these files and not report about them.
6.4.4. RESTRICTED
Set this variable alone if the application’s license permits neither mirroring the application’s DISTFILES
nor distributing the binary package in any way.
Do not set NO_CDROM
or NO_PACKAGE
along with RESTRICTED
, since the latter variable implies the former ones.
Set RESTRICTED
to a string describing the reason why the port cannot be redistributed.
Typically, this indicates that the port contains proprietary software and that the user will need to manually download the DISTFILES
,
possibly after registering for the software or agreeing to accept the terms of an EULA.
6.4.5. RESTRICTED_FILES
When RESTRICTED
or NO_CDROM
is set, this variable defaults to ${DISTFILES} ${PATCHFILES}
, otherwise it is empty.
If only some of the distribution files are restricted, then set this variable to list them.
6.4.6. LEGAL_TEXT
If the port has legal concerns not addressed by the above variables, set LEGAL_TEXT
to a string explaining the concern.
For example, if special permission was obtained for FreeBSD to redistribute the binary, this variable must indicate so.
6.4.7. /usr/ports/LEGAL and LEGAL
A port which sets any of the above variables must also be added to /usr/ports/LEGAL.
The first column is a glob which matches the restricted distfiles.
The second column is the port’s origin.
The third column is the output of make -VLEGAL
.
6.4.8. Examples
The preferred way to state "the distfiles for this port must be fetched manually" is as follows:
.if !exists(${DISTDIR}/${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX}) IGNORE= may not be redistributed because of licensing reasons. Please visit some-website to accept their license and download ${DISTFILES} into ${DISTDIR} .endif
This both informs the user, and sets the proper metadata on the user’s machine for use by automated programs.
Note that this stanza must be preceded by an inclusion of bsd.port.pre.mk.
6.5. Building Mechanisms
6.5.1. Building Ports in Parallel
The FreeBSD ports framework supports parallel building using multiple make
sub-processes,
which allows SMP systems to utilize all of their available CPU power, allowing port builds to be faster and more effective.
This is achieved by passing -jX
flag to make(1) running on vendor code.
This is the default build behavior of ports.
Unfortunately, not all ports handle parallel building well and it may be required to explicitly disable this feature by adding the MAKE_JOBS_UNSAFE=yes
variable.
It is used when a port is known to be broken with -jX
due to race conditions causing intermittent build failures.
When setting |
6.5.2. make
, gmake
, and imake
Several differing make
implementations exist. Ported software often requires a particular implementation, like GNU`make`, known in FreeBSD as gmake
.
If the port uses GNU make, add gmake
to USES
.
MAKE_CMD
can be used to reference the specific command configured by the USES
setting in the port’s Makefile.
Only use MAKE_CMD
within the application Makefiles in WRKSRC
to call the make
implementation expected by the ported software.
If the port is an X application that uses imake to create Makefiles from Imakefiles, set USES= imake
.
See the USES=imake
section of Using USES
Macros for more details.
If the port’s source Makefile has something other than all
as the main build target, set ALL_TARGET
accordingly.
The same goes for install
and INSTALL_TARGET
.
6.5.3. configure
Script
If the port uses the configure
script to generate Makefile from Makefile.in, set GNU_CONFIGURE=yes
.
To give extra arguments to the configure
script (the default argument is --prefix=${PREFIX} --infodir=${PREFIX}/${INFO_PATH} --mandir=${MANPREFIX}/man --build=${CONFIGURE_TARGET}
), set those extra arguments in CONFIGURE_ARGS
.
Extra environment variables can be passed using CONFIGURE_ENV
.
Variable | Means |
---|---|
| The port uses |
| Same as |
| Additional arguments passed to |
| Additional environment variables to be set for |
| Override default configure target. Default value is |
6.5.4. Using cmake
For ports that use CMake, define USES= cmake
.
Variable | Means |
---|---|
| Port specific CMake flags to be passed to the |
| For each entry in |
| For each entry in |
| Type of build (CMake predefined build profiles). Default is |
| Path to the source directory. Default is |
| Additional environment variables to be set for the |
Variable | Means |
---|---|
| Disables color build output. Default not set, unless |
CMake supports these build profiles: Debug
, Release
, RelWithDebInfo
and MinSizeRel
.
Debug
and Release
profiles respect system *FLAGS
, RelWithDebInfo
and MinSizeRel
will set CFLAGS
to -O2 -g
and -Os -DNDEBUG
correspondingly.
The lower-cased value of CMAKE_BUILD_TYPE
is exported to PLIST_SUB
and must be used if the port installs *.cmake depending on the build type (see devel/kf5-kcrash for an example).
Please note that some projects may define their own build profiles and/or force particular build type by setting CMAKE_BUILD_TYPE
in CMakeLists.txt.
To make a port for such a project respect CFLAGS
and WITH_DEBUG
, the CMAKE_BUILD_TYPE
definitions must be removed from those files.
Most CMake-based projects support an out-of-source method of building.
The out-of-source build for a port is the default setting.
An in-source build can be requested by using the :insource
suffix.
With out-of-source builds, CONFIGURE_WRKSRC
, BUILD_WRKSRC
and INSTALL_WRKSRC
will be set to ${WRKDIR}/.build
and this directory will be used to keep all files generated during configuration and build stages, leaving the source directory intact.
USES= cmake
ExampleThis snippet demonstrates the use of CMake for a port.
CMAKE_SOURCE_PATH
is not usually required, but can be set when the sources are not located in the top directory, or if only a subset of the project is intended to be built by the port.
USES= cmake CMAKE_SOURCE_PATH= ${WRKSRC}/subproject
CMAKE_ON
and CMAKE_OFF
When adding boolean values to CMAKE_ARGS
, it is easier to use the CMAKE_ON
and CMAKE_OFF
variables instead. This:
CMAKE_ON= VAR1 VAR2 CMAKE_OFF= VAR3
Is equivalent to:
CMAKE_ARGS= -DVAR1:BOOL=TRUE -DVAR2:BOOL=TRUE -DVAR3:BOOL=FALSE
This is only for the default values off |
6.5.5. Using scons
If the port uses SCons, define USES=scons
.
To make third party SConstruct respect everything that is passed to SCons in the environment (that is, most importantly, CC/CXX/CFLAGS/CXXFLAGS
), patch SConstruct so build Environment
is constructed like this:
env = Environment(**ARGUMENTS)
It may be then modified with env.Append
and env.Replace
.
6.5.6. Building Rust Applications with cargo
For ports that use Cargo, define USES=cargo
.
Variable | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
| List of crates the port depends on. Each entry needs to have a format like | |
| List of application features to build (space separated list). To deactivate all default features add the special token | |
|
| The path to the Cargo.toml to use. |
|
| The path to the Cargo.lock to use for |
| A list of environment variables to pass to Cargo similar to | |
| Flags to pass to the Rust compiler. | |
|
| Use the default |
| Extra arguments to pass to Cargo during the configure phase. Valid arguments can be looked up with | |
|
| Add a build dependency on lang/rust. |
|
| Location of the |
|
| Use the default |
| Extra arguments to pass to Cargo during the build phase. Valid arguments can be looked up with | |
|
| Use the default |
| Extra arguments to pass to Cargo during the install phase. Valid arguments can be looked up with | |
|
| Path to the crate to install. This is passed to |
|
| Use the default |
| Extra arguments to pass to Cargo during the test phase. Valid arguments can be looked up with | |
|
| Location of the cargo output directory. |
| rust/crates | Directory relative to |
|
| Location of the vendor directory where all crates will be extracted to. Try to keep this under |
|
| Enable fetching of crates locked to specific Git commits on GitHub via |
|
| Same as |
Creating a Cargo based port is a three stage process. First we need to provide a ports template that fetches the application distribution file:
PORTNAME= tokei DISTVERSIONPREFIX= v DISTVERSION= 7.0.2 CATEGORIES= devel MAINTAINER= tobik@FreeBSD.org COMMENT= Display statistics about your code USES= cargo USE_GITHUB= yes GH_ACCOUNT= Aaronepower .include <bsd.port.mk>
Generate an initial distinfo:
% make makesum
=> Aaronepower-tokei-v7.0.2_GH0.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist in /usr/ports/distfiles/.
=> Attempting to fetch https://codeload.github.com/Aaronepower/tokei/tar.gz/v7.0.2?dummy=/Aaronepower-tokei-v7.0.2_GH0.tar.gz
fetch: https://codeload.github.com/Aaronepower/tokei/tar.gz/v7.0.2?dummy=/Aaronepower-tokei-v7.0.2_GH0.tar.gz: size of remote file is not known
Aaronepower-tokei-v7.0.2_GH0.tar.gz 45 kB 239 kBps 00m00s
Now the distribution file is ready to use and we can go ahead and extract crate dependencies from the bundled Cargo.lock:
% make cargo-crates
CARGO_CRATES= aho-corasick-0.6.4 \
ansi_term-0.11.0 \
arrayvec-0.4.7 \
atty-0.2.9 \
bitflags-1.0.1 \
byteorder-1.2.2 \
[...]
The output of this command needs to be pasted directly into the Makefile:
PORTNAME= tokei DISTVERSIONPREFIX= v DISTVERSION= 7.0.2 CATEGORIES= devel MAINTAINER= tobik@FreeBSD.org COMMENT= Display statistics about your code USES= cargo USE_GITHUB= yes GH_ACCOUNT= Aaronepower CARGO_CRATES= aho-corasick-0.6.4 \ ansi_term-0.11.0 \ arrayvec-0.4.7 \ atty-0.2.9 \ bitflags-1.0.1 \ byteorder-1.2.2 \ [...] .include <bsd.port.mk>
distinfo needs to be regenerated to contain all the crate distribution files:
% make makesum
=> rust/crates/aho-corasick-0.6.4.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist in /usr/ports/distfiles/.
=> Attempting to fetch https://crates.io/api/v1/crates/aho-corasick/0.6.4/download?dummy=/rust/crates/aho-corasick-0.6.4.tar.gz
rust/crates/aho-corasick-0.6.4.tar.gz 100% of 24 kB 6139 kBps 00m00s
=> rust/crates/ansi_term-0.11.0.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist in /usr/ports/distfiles/.
=> Attempting to fetch https://crates.io/api/v1/crates/ansi_term/0.11.0/download?dummy=/rust/crates/ansi_term-0.11.0.tar.gz
rust/crates/ansi_term-0.11.0.tar.gz 100% of 16 kB 21 MBps 00m00s
=> rust/crates/arrayvec-0.4.7.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist in /usr/ports/distfiles/.
=> Attempting to fetch https://crates.io/api/v1/crates/arrayvec/0.4.7/download?dummy=/rust/crates/arrayvec-0.4.7.tar.gz
rust/crates/arrayvec-0.4.7.tar.gz 100% of 22 kB 3237 kBps 00m00s
=> rust/crates/atty-0.2.9.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist in /usr/ports/distfiles/.
=> Attempting to fetch https://crates.io/api/v1/crates/atty/0.2.9/download?dummy=/rust/crates/atty-0.2.9.tar.gz
rust/crates/atty-0.2.9.tar.gz 100% of 5898 B 81 MBps 00m00s
=> rust/crates/bitflags-1.0.1.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist in /usr/ports/distfiles/.
[...]
The port is now ready for a test build and further adjustments like creating a plist, writing a description, adding license information, options, etc. as normal.
If you are not testing your port in a clean environment like with Poudriere, remember to run make clean
before any testing.
Some applications define additional features in their Cargo.toml.
They can be compiled in by setting CARGO_FEATURES
in the port.
Here we enable Tokei’s json
and yaml
features:
CARGO_FEATURES= json yaml
An example [features]
section in Cargo.toml could look like this:
[features] pulseaudio_backend = ["librespot-playback/pulseaudio-backend"] portaudio_backend = ["librespot-playback/portaudio-backend"] default = ["pulseaudio_backend"]
pulseaudio_backend
is a default feature.
It is always enabled unless we explicitly turn off default features by adding --no-default-features
to CARGO_FEATURES
.
Here we turn the portaudio_backend
and pulseaudio_backend
features into port options:
CARGO_FEATURES= --no-default-features OPTIONS_DEFINE= PORTAUDIO PULSEAUDIO PORTAUDIO_VARS= CARGO_FEATURES+=portaudio_backend PULSEAUDIO_VARS= CARGO_FEATURES+=pulseaudio_backend
Crates have their own licenses.
It is important to know what they are when adding a LICENSE
block to the port (see Licenses).
The helper target cargo-crates-licenses
will try to list all the licenses of all crates defined in CARGO_CRATES
.
% make cargo-crates-licenses
aho-corasick-0.6.4 Unlicense/MIT
ansi_term-0.11.0 MIT
arrayvec-0.4.7 MIT/Apache-2.0
atty-0.2.9 MIT
bitflags-1.0.1 MIT/Apache-2.0
byteorder-1.2.2 Unlicense/MIT
[...]
The license names |
6.5.7. Using meson
For ports that use Meson, define USES=meson
.
Variable | Description |
---|---|
| Port specific Meson flags to be passed to the |
| Path to the build directory relative to |
USES=meson
ExampleThis snippet demonstrates the use of Meson for a port.
USES= meson MESON_ARGS= -Dfoo=enabled
6.5.8. Building Go Applications
For ports that use Go, define USES=go
.
Refer to go
for a list of variables that can be set to control the build process.
In most cases, it is sufficient to set the GO_MODULE
variable to the value specified by the module
directive in go.mod
:
PORTNAME= hey PORTVERSION= 0.1.4 DISTVERSIONPREFIX= v CATEGORIES= benchmarks MAINTAINER= dmgk@FreeBSD.org COMMENT= Tiny program that sends some load to a web application LICENSE= APACHE20 LICENSE_FILE= ${WRKSRC}/LICENSE USES= go:modules GO_MODULE= github.com/rakyll/hey PLIST_FILES= bin/hey .include <bsd.port.mk>
If the "easy" way is not adequate or more control over dependencies is needed, the full porting process is described below.
Creating a Go based port is a five stage process. First we need to provide a ports template that fetches the application distribution file:
PORTNAME= ghq DISTVERSIONPREFIX= v DISTVERSION= 0.12.5 CATEGORIES= devel MAINTAINER= tobik@FreeBSD.org COMMENT= Remote repository management made easy USES= go:modules USE_GITHUB= yes GH_ACCOUNT= motemen .include <bsd.port.mk>
Generate an initial distinfo:
% make makesum
===> License MIT accepted by the user
=> motemen-ghq-v0.12.5_GH0.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist in /usr/ports/distfiles/.
=> Attempting to fetch https://codeload.github.com/motemen/ghq/tar.gz/v0.12.5?dummy=/motemen-ghq-v0.12.5_GH0.tar.gz
fetch: https://codeload.github.com/motemen/ghq/tar.gz/v0.12.5?dummy=/motemen-ghq-v0.12.5_GH0.tar.gz: size of remote file is not known
motemen-ghq-v0.12.5_GH0.tar.gz 32 kB 177 kBps 00s
Now the distribution file is ready to use and we can extract the required Go module dependencies. This step requires having ports-mgmt/modules2tuple installed:
% make gomod-vendor
[...]
GH_TUPLE= \
Songmu:gitconfig:v0.0.2:songmu_gitconfig/vendor/github.com/Songmu/gitconfig \
daviddengcn:go-colortext:186a3d44e920:daviddengcn_go_colortext/vendor/github.com/daviddengcn/go-colortext \
go-yaml:yaml:v2.2.2:go_yaml_yaml/vendor/gopkg.in/yaml.v2 \
golang:net:3ec191127204:golang_net/vendor/golang.org/x/net \
golang:sync:112230192c58:golang_sync/vendor/golang.org/x/sync \
golang:xerrors:3ee3066db522:golang_xerrors/vendor/golang.org/x/xerrors \
motemen:go-colorine:45d19169413a:motemen_go_colorine/vendor/github.com/motemen/go-colorine \
urfave:cli:v1.20.0:urfave_cli/vendor/github.com/urfave/cli
The output of this command needs to be pasted directly into the Makefile:
PORTNAME= ghq DISTVERSIONPREFIX= v DISTVERSION= 0.12.5 CATEGORIES= devel MAINTAINER= tobik@FreeBSD.org COMMENT= Remote repository management made easy USES= go:modules USE_GITHUB= yes GH_ACCOUNT= motemen GH_TUPLE= Songmu:gitconfig:v0.0.2:songmu_gitconfig/vendor/github.com/Songmu/gitconfig \ daviddengcn:go-colortext:186a3d44e920:daviddengcn_go_colortext/vendor/github.com/daviddengcn/go-colortext \ go-yaml:yaml:v2.2.2:go_yaml_yaml/vendor/gopkg.in/yaml.v2 \ golang:net:3ec191127204:golang_net/vendor/golang.org/x/net \ golang:sync:112230192c58:golang_sync/vendor/golang.org/x/sync \ golang:xerrors:3ee3066db522:golang_xerrors/vendor/golang.org/x/xerrors \ motemen:go-colorine:45d19169413a:motemen_go_colorine/vendor/github.com/motemen/go-colorine \ urfave:cli:v1.20.0:urfave_cli/vendor/github.com/urfave/cli .include <bsd.port.mk>
distinfo needs to be regenerated to contain all the distribution files:
% make makesum
=> Songmu-gitconfig-v0.0.2_GH0.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist in /usr/ports/distfiles/.
=> Attempting to fetch https://codeload.github.com/Songmu/gitconfig/tar.gz/v0.0.2?dummy=/Songmu-gitconfig-v0.0.2_GH0.tar.gz
fetch: https://codeload.github.com/Songmu/gitconfig/tar.gz/v0.0.2?dummy=/Songmu-gitconfig-v0.0.2_GH0.tar.gz: size of remote file is not known
Songmu-gitconfig-v0.0.2_GH0.tar.gz 5662 B 936 kBps 00s
=> daviddengcn-go-colortext-186a3d44e920_GH0.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist in /usr/ports/distfiles/.
=> Attempting to fetch https://codeload.github.com/daviddengcn/go-colortext/tar.gz/186a3d44e920?dummy=/daviddengcn-go-colortext-186a3d44e920_GH0.tar.gz
fetch: https://codeload.github.com/daviddengcn/go-colortext/tar.gz/186a3d44e920?dummy=/daviddengcn-go-colortext-186a3d44e920_GH0.tar.gz: size of remote file is not known
daviddengcn-go-colortext-186a3d44e920_GH0.tar. 4534 B 1098 kBps 00s
[...]
The port is now ready for a test build and further adjustments like creating a plist, writing a description, adding license information, options, etc. as normal.
If you are not testing your port in a clean environment like with Poudriere, remember to run make clean
before any testing.
Some ports need to install the resulting binary under a different name or to a path other than the default ${PREFIX}/bin
.
This can be done by using GO_TARGET
tuple syntax, for example:
GO_TARGET= ./cmd/ipfs:ipfs-go
will install ipfs
binary as ${PREFIX}/bin/ipfs-go
and
GO_TARGET= ./dnscrypt-proxy:${PREFIX}/sbin/dnscrypt-proxy
will install dnscrypt-proxy
to ${PREFIX}/sbin
.
6.5.9. Building Haskell Applications with cabal
For ports that use Cabal, build system defines USES=cabal
.
Refer to cabal
for a list of variables that can be set to control the build process.
When preparing a Haskell Cabal port, the devel/hs-cabal-install program is required, so make sure it is installed beforehand. First we need to define common ports variables that allows cabal-install to fetch the package distribution file:
PORTNAME= ShellCheck DISTVERSION= 0.6.0 CATEGORIES= devel MAINTAINER= haskell@FreeBSD.org COMMENT= Shell script analysis tool USES= cabal .include <bsd.port.mk>
This minimal Makefile allows us to fetch the distribution file:
% make cabal-extract
[...]
Downloading the latest package list from hackage.haskell.org
cabal get ShellCheck-0.6.0
Downloading ShellCheck-0.6.0
Downloaded ShellCheck-0.6.0
Unpacking to ShellCheck-0.6.0/
Now we have ShellCheck.cabal package description file, which allows us to fetch all package’s dependencies, including transitive ones:
% make cabal-extract-deps
[...]
Resolving dependencies...
Downloading base-orphans-0.8.2
Downloaded base-orphans-0.8.2
Downloading primitive-0.7.0.0
Starting base-orphans-0.8.2 (lib)
Building base-orphans-0.8.2 (lib)
Downloaded primitive-0.7.0.0
Downloading dlist-0.8.0.7
[...]
As a side effect, the package’s dependencies are also compiled, so the command may take some time. Once done, a list of required dependencies can generated:
% make make-use-cabal
USE_CABAL=QuickCheck-2.12.6.1 \
hashable-1.3.0.0 \
integer-logarithms-1.0.3 \
[...]
Haskell packages may contain revisions, just like FreeBSD ports.
Revisions can affect only .cabal files, but it is still important to pull them in.
To check USE_CABAL
items for available revision updates, run following command:
% make make-use-cabal-revs
USE_CABAL=QuickCheck-2.12.6.1_1 \
hashable-1.3.0.0 \
integer-logarithms-1.0.3_2 \
[...]
Note additional version numbers after _
symbol.
Put newly generated USE_CABAL
list instead of an old one.
Finally, distinfo needs to be regenerated to contain all the distribution files:
% make makesum
=> ShellCheck-0.6.0.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist in /usr/local/poudriere/ports/git/distfiles/cabal.
=> Attempting to fetch https://hackage.haskell.org/package/ShellCheck-0.6.0/ShellCheck-0.6.0.tar.gz
ShellCheck-0.6.0.tar.gz 136 kB 642 kBps 00s
=> QuickCheck-2.12.6.1/QuickCheck-2.12.6.1.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist in /usr/local/poudriere/ports/git/distfiles/cabal.
=> Attempting to fetch https://hackage.haskell.org/package/QuickCheck-2.12.6.1/QuickCheck-2.12.6.1.tar.gz
QuickCheck-2.12.6.1/QuickCheck-2.12.6.1.tar.gz 65 kB 361 kBps 00s
[...]
The port is now ready for a test build and further adjustments like creating a plist, writing a description, adding license information, options, etc. as normal.
If you are not testing your port in a clean environment like with Poudriere, remember to run make clean
before any testing.
6.6. Using GNU Autotools
If a port needs any of the GNU Autotools software, add USES=autoreconf
.
See autoreconf
for more information.
6.7. Using GNU gettext
6.7.1. Basic Usage
If the port requires gettext
, set USES= gettext
, and the port will inherit a dependency on libintl.so from devel/gettext.
Other values for gettext
usage are listed in USES=gettext
.
A rather common case is a port using gettext
and configure
.
Generally, GNU configure
should be able to locate gettext
automatically.
USES= gettext GNU_CONFIGURE= yes
If it ever fails to, hints at the location of gettext
can be passed in CPPFLAGS
and LDFLAGS
using localbase
as follows:
USES= gettext localbase:ldflags GNU_CONFIGURE= yes
6.7.2. Optional Usage
Some software products allow for disabling NLS.
For example, through passing --disable-nls
to configure
.
In that case, the port must use gettext
conditionally, depending on the status of the NLS
option.
For ports of low to medium complexity, use this idiom:
GNU_CONFIGURE= yes OPTIONS_DEFINE= NLS OPTIONS_SUB= yes NLS_USES= gettext NLS_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= nls .include <bsd.port.mk>
Or using the older way of using options:
GNU_CONFIGURE= yes OPTIONS_DEFINE= NLS .include <bsd.port.options.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MNLS} USES+= gettext PLIST_SUB+= NLS="" .else CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --disable-nls PLIST_SUB+= NLS="@comment " .endif .include <bsd.port.mk>
The next item on the to-do list is to arrange so that the message catalog files are included in the packing list conditionally.
The Makefile part of this task is already provided by the idiom.
It is explained in the section on advanced pkg-plist practices.
In a nutshell, each occurrence of %%NLS%%
in pkg-plist will be replaced by "`@comment " if NLS is disabled, or by a null string if NLS is enabled.
Consequently, the lines prefixed by `%%NLS%%
will become mere comments in the final packing list if NLS is off;
otherwise the prefix will be just left out. Then insert %%NLS%%
before each path to a message catalog file in pkg-plist.
For example:
%%NLS%%share/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/foobar.mo %%NLS%%share/locale/no/LC_MESSAGES/foobar.mo
In high complexity cases, more advanced techniques may be needed, such as dynamic packing list generation.
6.7.3. Handling Message Catalog Directories
There is a point to note about installing message catalog files. The target directories for them, which reside under LOCALBASE/share/locale, must not be created and removed by a port. The most popular languages have their respective directories listed in PORTSDIR/Templates/BSD.local.dist. The directories for many other languages are governed by the devel/gettext port. Consult its pkg-plist and see whether the port is going to install a message catalog file for a unique language.
6.8. Using Perl
If MASTER_SITES
is set to CPAN
, the correct subdirectory is usually selected automatically.
If the default subdirectory is wrong, CPAN/Module
can be used to change it.
MASTER_SITES
can also be set to the old MASTER_SITE_PERL_CPAN
, then the preferred value of MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
is the top-level hierarchy name.
For example, the recommended value for p5-Module-Name
is Module
.
The top-level hierarchy can be examined at cpan.org.
This keeps the port working when the author of the module changes.
The exception to this rule is when the relevant directory does not exist or the distfile does not exist in that directory.
In such case, using author’s id as MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR
is allowed.
The CPAN:AUTHOR
macro can be used, which will be translated to the hashed author directory.
For example, CPAN:AUTHOR
will be converted to authors/id/A/AU/AUTHOR
.
When a port needs Perl support, it must set USES=perl5
with the optional USE_PERL5
described in the perl5 USES description.
Read only variables | Means |
---|---|
| The full path of the Perl 5 interpreter, either in the system or installed from a port, but without the version number. Use this when the software needs the path to the Perl interpreter. To replace " |
| The full version of Perl installed (for example, |
| The installed Perl version as an integer of the form |
| Where Perl stores architecture dependent libraries. Defaults to |
| Name of the Perl port that is installed (for example, |
| Directory name where site specific Perl packages go. This value is added to |
Ports of Perl modules which do not have an official website must link to |
Do not use |
p5-IO-Tee>=0.64:devel/p5-IO-Tee
For Perl ports that install manual pages, the macro PERL5_MAN3
and PERL5_MAN1
can be used inside pkg-plist. For example,
lib/perl5/5.14/man/man1/event.1.gz lib/perl5/5.14/man/man3/AnyEvent::I3.3.gz
can be replaced with
%%PERL5_MAN1%%/event.1.gz %%PERL5_MAN3%%/AnyEvent::I3.3.gz
There are no |
As the default USE_PERL5 value is build and run, set it to:
USES= perl5 USE_PERL5= build
ExtUtils::MakeMaker
to BuildMost Perl modules come with a Makefile.PL configure script. In this case, set:
USES= perl5 USE_PERL5= configure
Module::Build
to BuildWhen a Perl module comes with a Build.PL configure script, it can require Module::Build, in which case, set
USES= perl5 USE_PERL5= modbuild
If it instead requires Module::Build::Tiny, set
USES= perl5 USE_PERL5= modbuildtiny
6.9. Using X11
6.9.1. X.Org Components
The X11 implementation available in The Ports Collection is X.Org.
If the application depends on X components, add USES= xorg
and set USE_XORG
to the list of required components.
A full list can be found in xorg
.
The Mesa Project is an effort to provide free OpenGL implementation.
To specify a dependency on various components of this project, use USES= gl
and USE_GL
.
See gl
for a full list of available components.
For backwards compatibility, the value of yes
maps to glu
.
USE_XORG
ExampleUSES= gl xorg USE_GL= glu USE_XORG= xrender xft xkbfile xt xaw
| The port uses |
| Set to the path of |
# Use some X11 libraries USES= xorg USE_XORG= x11 xpm
6.9.2. Ports That Require Motif
If the port requires a Motif library, define USES= motif
in the Makefile.
Default Motif implementation is x11-toolkits/open-motif.
Users can choose x11-toolkits/lesstif instead by setting WANT_LESSTIF
in their make.conf.
MOTIFLIB
will be set by motif.mk to reference the appropriate Motif library.
Please patch the source of the port to use ${MOTIFLIB}
wherever the Motif library is referenced in the original Makefile or Imakefile.
There are two common cases:
If the port refers to the Motif library as
-lXm
in its Makefile or Imakefile, substitute${MOTIFLIB}
for it.If the port uses
XmClientLibs
in its Imakefile, change it to${MOTIFLIB} ${XTOOLLIB} ${XLIB}
.
Note that MOTIFLIB
(usually) expands to -L/usr/local/lib -lXm -lXp
or /usr/local/lib/libXm.a
, so there is no need to add -L
or -l
in front.
6.9.3. X11 Fonts
If the port installs fonts for the X Window System, put them in LOCALBASE/lib/X11/fonts/local.
6.9.4. Getting a Fake DISPLAY
with Xvfb
Some applications require a working X11 display for compilation to succeed.
This poses a problem for machines that operate headless.
When this variable is used, the build infrastructure will start the virtual framebuffer X server.
The working DISPLAY
is then passed to the build.
See USES=display
for the possible arguments.
USES= display
6.9.5. Desktop Entries
Desktop entries (a Freedesktop standard) provide a way to automatically adjust desktop features when a new program is installed, without requiring user intervention. For example, newly-installed programs automatically appear in the application menus of compatible desktop environments. Desktop entries originated in the GNOME desktop environment, but are now a standard and also work with KDE and Xfce. This bit of automation provides a real benefit to the user, and desktop entries are encouraged for applications which can be used in a desktop environment.
6.9.5.1. Using Predefined .desktop Files
Ports that include predefined *.desktop must include those files in pkg-plist and install them in the $LOCALBASE/share/applications directory.
The INSTALL_DATA
macro is useful for installing these files.
6.9.5.2. Updating Desktop Database
If a port has a MimeType entry in its portname.desktop, the desktop database must be updated after install and deinstall.
To do this, define USES
= desktop-file-utils.
6.9.5.3. Creating Desktop Entries with DESKTOP_ENTRIES
Desktop entries can be easily created for applications by using DESKTOP_ENTRIES
.
A file named name.desktop will be created, installed, and added to pkg-plist automatically.
Syntax is:
DESKTOP_ENTRIES= "NAME" "COMMENT" "ICON" "COMMAND" "CATEGORY" StartupNotify
The list of possible categories is available on the Freedesktop website.
StartupNotify
indicates whether the application is compatible with startup notifications.
These are typically a graphic indicator like a clock that appear at the mouse pointer, menu, or panel to give the user an indication when a program is starting.
A program that is compatible with startup notifications clears the indicator after it has started.
Programs that are not compatible with startup notifications would never clear the indicator (potentially confusing and infuriating the user), and must have StartupNotify
set to false
so the indicator is not shown at all.
Example:
DESKTOP_ENTRIES= "ToME" "Roguelike game based on JRR Tolkien's work" \ "${DATADIR}/xtra/graf/tome-128.png" \ "tome -v -g" "Application;Game;RolePlaying;" \ false
6.10. Using GNOME
6.10.1. Introduction
This chapter explains the GNOME framework as used by ports. The framework can be loosely divided into the base components, GNOME desktop components, and a few special macros that simplify the work of port maintainers.
6.10.2. Using USE_GNOME
Adding this variable to the port allows the use of the macros and components defined in bsd.gnome.mk.
The code in bsd.gnome.mk adds the needed build-time, run-time or library dependencies or the handling of special files.
GNOME applications under FreeBSD use the USE_GNOME
infrastructure.
Include all the needed components as a space-separated list.
The USE_GNOME
components are divided into these virtual lists: basic components, GNOME 3 components and legacy components.
If the port needs only GTK3 libraries, this is the shortest way to define it:
USE_GNOME= gtk30
USE_GNOME
components automatically add the dependencies they need.
Please see GNOME Components for an exhaustive list of all USE_GNOME
components and which other components they imply and their dependencies.
Here is an example Makefile for a GNOME port that uses many of the techniques outlined in this document. Please use it as a guide for creating new ports.
# $FreeBSD$ PORTNAME= regexxer DISTVERSION= 0.10 CATEGORIES= devel textproc gnome MASTER_SITES= GNOME MAINTAINER= kwm@FreeBSD.org COMMENT= Interactive tool for performing search and replace operations USES= gettext gmake localbase:ldflags pathfix pkgconfig tar:xz GNU_CONFIGURE= yes USE_GNOME= gnomeprefix intlhack gtksourceviewmm3 GLIB_SCHEMAS= org.regexxer.gschema.xml .include <bsd.port.mk>
The |
6.10.3. Variables
This section explains which macros are available and how they are used.
Like they are used in the above example.
The GNOME Components has a more in-depth explanation.
USE_GNOME
has to be set for these macros to be of use.
GLIB_SCHEMAS
List of all the glib schema files the port installs. The macro will add the files to the port plist and handle the registration of these files on install and deinstall.
The glib schema files are written in XML and end with the gschema.xml extension. They are installed in the share/glib-2.0/schemas/ directory. These schema files contain all application config values with their default settings. The actual database used by the applications is built by glib-compile-schema, which is run by the
GLIB_SCHEMAS
macro.GLIB_SCHEMAS=foo.gschema.xml
Do not add glib schemas to the pkg-plist. If they are listed in pkg-plist, they will not be registered and the applications might not work properly.
GCONF_SCHEMAS
List all the gconf schema files. The macro will add the schema files to the port plist and will handle their registration on install and deinstall.
GConf is the XML-based database that virtually all GNOME applications use for storing their settings. These files are installed into the etc/gconf/schemas directory. This database is defined by installed schema files that are used to generate %gconf.xml key files. For each schema file installed by the port, there must be an entry in the Makefile:
GCONF_SCHEMAS=my_app.schemas my_app2.schemas my_app3.schemas
Gconf schemas are listed in the
GCONF_SCHEMAS
macro rather than pkg-plist. If they are listed in pkg-plist, they will not be registered and the applications might not work properly.INSTALLS_OMF
Open Source Metadata Framework (OMF) files are commonly used by GNOME 2 applications. These files contain the application help file information, and require special processing by ScrollKeeper/rarian. To properly register OMF files when installing GNOME applications from packages, make sure that
omf
files are listed inpkg-plist
and that the port Makefile hasINSTALLS_OMF
defined:INSTALLS_OMF=yes
When set, bsd.gnome.mk automatically scans pkg-plist and adds appropriate
@exec
and@unexec
directives for each .omf to track in the OMF registration database.
6.11. GNOME Components
For further help with a GNOME port, look at some of the existing ports for examples. The FreeBSD GNOME page has contact information if more help is needed. The components are divided into GNOME components that are currently in use and legacy components. If the component supports argument, they are listed between parenthesis in the description. The first is the default. "Both" is shown if the component defaults to adding to both build and run dependencies.
Component | Associated program | Description |
---|---|---|
| accessibility/atk | Accessibility toolkit (ATK) |
| accessibility/atkmm | c++ bindings for atk |
| graphics/cairo | Vector graphics library with cross-device output support |
| graphics/cairomm | c++ bindings for cairo |
| devel/dconf | Configuration database system (both, build, run) |
| databases/evolution-data-server | Data backends for the Evolution integrated mail/PIM suite |
| graphics/gdk-pixbuf2 | Graphics library for GTK+ |
| devel/glib20 | GNOME core library |
| devel/glibmm | c++ bindings for glib20 |
| sysutils/gnome-control-center | GNOME 3 Control Center |
| x11/gnome-desktop | GNOME 3 desktop UI library |
| audio/gsound | GObject library for playing system sounds (both, build, run) |
| graphics/gtk-update-icon-cache | Gtk-update-icon-cache utility from the Gtk+ toolkit |
| x11-toolkits/gtk20 | Gtk+ 2 toolkit |
| x11-toolkits/gtk30 | Gtk+ 3 toolkit |
| x11-toolkits/gtkmm20 | c++ bindings 2.0 for the gtk20 toolkit |
| x11-toolkits/gtkmm24 | c++ bindings 2.4 for the gtk20 toolkit |
| x11-toolkits/gtkmm30 | c++ bindings 3.0 for the gtk30 toolkit |
| x11-toolkits/gtksourceview2 | Widget that adds syntax highlighting to GtkTextView |
| x11-toolkits/gtksourceview3 | Text widget that adds syntax highlighting to the GtkTextView widget |
| x11-toolkits/gtksourceviewmm3 | c++ bindings for the gtksourceview3 library |
| devel/gvfs | GNOME virtual file system |
| textproc/intltool | Tool for internationalization (also see intlhack) |
| devel/gobject-introspection | Basic introspection bindings and tools to generate introspection bindings. Most of the time :build is enough, :both/:run is only need for applications that use introspection bindings. (both, build, run) |
| databases/libgda5 | Provides uniform access to different kinds of data sources |
| databases/libgda5-ui | UI library from the libgda5 library |
| databases/libgdamm5 | c++ bindings for the libgda5 library |
| devel/libgsf | Extensible I/O abstraction for dealing with structured file formats |
| graphics/librsvg2 | Library for parsing and rendering SVG vector-graphic files |
| devel/libsigc++20 | Callback Framework for C++ |
| textproc/libxml++26 | c++ bindings for the libxml2 library |
| textproc/libxml2 | XML parser library (both, build, run) |
| textproc/libxslt | XSLT C library (both, build, run) |
| x11-wm/metacity | Window manager from GNOME |
| x11-fm/nautilus | GNOME file manager |
| x11-toolkits/pango | Open-source framework for the layout and rendering of i18n text |
| x11-toolkits/pangomm | c++ bindings for the pango library |
| devel/py3-gobject3 | Python 3, GObject 3.0 bindings |
| devel/py-gobject3 | Python 2, GObject 3.0 bindings |
| x11-toolkits/vte3 | Terminal widget with improved accessibility and I18N support |
Component | Description |
---|---|
| Supply |
| Same as intltool, but patches to make sure share/locale/ is used. Please only use when |
| This macro is there to help splitting of the API or reference documentation into its own port. |
Component | Associated program | Description |
---|---|---|
| accessibility/at-spi | Assistive Technology Service Provider Interface |
| audio/esound | Enlightenment sound package |
| x11-toolkits/gal2 | Collection of widgets taken from GNOME 2 gnumeric |
| devel/gconf2 | Configuration database system for GNOME 2 |
| devel/gconfmm26 | c++ bindings for gconf2 |
| graphics/gdk-pixbuf | Graphics library for GTK+ |
| devel/glib12 | glib 1.2 core library |
| textproc/gnome-doc-utils | GNOME doc utils |
| misc/gnome-mime-data | MIME and Application database for GNOME 2 |
| x11-toolkits/gnome-sharp20 | GNOME 2 interfaces for the .NET runtime |
| accessibility/gnome-speech | GNOME 2 text-to-speech API |
| devel/gnome-vfs | GNOME 2 Virtual File System |
| x11-toolkits/gtk12 | Gtk+ 1.2 toolkit |
| www/gtkhtml3 | Lightweight HTML rendering/printing/editing engine |
| www/gtkhtml4 | Lightweight HTML rendering/printing/editing engine |
| x11-toolkits/gtk-sharp20 | GTK+ and GNOME 2 interfaces for the .NET runtime |
| x11-toolkits/gtksourceview | Widget that adds syntax highlighting to GtkTextView |
| graphics/libart_lgpl | Library for high-performance 2D graphics |
| devel/libbonobo | Component and compound document system for GNOME 2 |
| x11-toolkits/libbonoboui | GUI frontend to the libbonobo component of GNOME 2 |
| databases/libgda4 | Provides uniform access to different kinds of data sources |
| devel/libglade2 | GNOME 2 glade library |
| x11/libgnome | Libraries for GNOME 2, a GNU desktop environment |
| graphics/libgnomecanvas | Graphics library for GNOME 2 |
| x11/libgnomekbd | GNOME 2 keyboard shared library |
| print/libgnomeprint | Gnome 2 print support library |
| x11-toolkits/libgnomeprintui | Gnome 2 print support library |
| x11-toolkits/libgnomeui | Libraries for the GNOME 2 GUI, a GNU desktop environment |
| www/libgtkhtml | Lightweight HTML rendering/printing/editing engine |
| x11-toolkits/libgtksourceviewmm | c++ binding of GtkSourceView |
| devel/libIDL | Library for creating trees of CORBA IDL file |
| devel/libsigc++12 | Callback Framework for C++ |
| x11-toolkits/libwnck | Library used for writing pagers and taskslists |
| x11-toolkits/libwnck3 | Library used for writing pagers and taskslists |
| devel/ORBit2 | High-performance CORBA ORB with support for the C language |
| x11-toolkits/py-gnome2 | Python bindings for GNOME 2 |
| devel/py-gobject | Python 2, GObject 2.0 bindings |
| x11-toolkits/py-gtk2 | Set of Python bindings for GTK+ |
| x11-toolkits/py-gtksourceview | Python bindings for GtkSourceView 2 |
| x11-toolkits/vte | Terminal widget with improved accessibility and I18N support |
Component | Description |
---|---|
| pangox-compat has been deprecated and split off from the pango package. |
6.12. Using Qt
For ports that are part of Qt itself, see |
6.12.1. Ports That Require Qt
The Ports Collection provides support for Qt 5 with USES+=qt:5
.
Set USE_QT
to the list of required Qt components (libraries, tools, plugins).
The Qt framework exports a number of variables which can be used by ports, some of them listed below:
| Full path to |
| Full path to |
| Full path to |
| Full path to |
| Full path to |
| Qt include directory. |
| Qt libraries path. |
| Qt plugins path. |
6.12.2. Component Selection
Individual Qt tool and library dependencies must be specified in USE_QT
.
Every component can be suffixed with _build
or _run
, the suffix indicating whether the dependency on the component is at buildtime or runtime.
If unsuffixed, the component will be depended on at both build- and runtime.
Usually, library components are specified unsuffixed, tool components are mostly specified with the _build
suffix and plugin components are specified with the _run
suffix.
The most commonly used components are listed below (all available components are listed in _USE_QT_ALL
, and _USE_QT5_ONLY
in /usr/ports/Mk/Uses/qt.mk):
Name | Description |
---|---|
| Qt3D module |
| Qt 5 documentation browser |
| Qt canvas3d module |
| Qt 5 charts module |
| Qt multi-threading module |
| Qt connectivity (Bluetooth/NFC) module |
| Qt core non-graphical module |
| Qt 5 3D data visualization module |
| Qt D-Bus inter-process communication module |
| Qt declarative framework for dynamic user interfaces |
| Qt 5 graphical user interface designer |
| Tool for reporting diagnostic information about Qt and its environment |
| Qt 5 documentation |
| Qt 5 examples sourcecode |
| Qt 5 Gamepad Module |
| Qt Quick graphical effects |
| Qt graphical user interface module |
| Qt online help integration module |
| Qt localized messages |
| Qt 5 translation tool |
| Qt location module |
| Qt audio, video, radio and camera support module |
| Qt network module |
| Qt network auth module |
| Qt 5-compatible OpenGL support module |
| Command line client to QStandardPaths |
| KDE multimedia framework |
| Qt 5 screen magnifier |
| Qt5 plugin metadata dumper |
| Qt print support module |
| Qt command-line interface to D-Bus |
| Qt 5 graphical interface to D-Bus |
| Qt documentation generator |
| QDoc configuration files |
| Qt QWidget events introspection tool |
| Qt Makefile generator |
| Set of controls for building complete interfaces in Qt Quick |
| Set of controls for building complete interfaces in Qt Quick |
| Qt5 SXCML module |
| Qt 4-compatible scripting module |
| Qt Script additional components |
| Qt5 SXCML module |
| Qt sensors module |
| Qt functions to access industrial bus systems |
| Qt functions to access serial ports |
| Accessibilty features for Qt5 |
| Qt SQL database integration module |
| Qt InterBase/Firebird database plugin |
| Qt MySQL database plugin |
| Qt Open Database Connectivity plugin |
| Qt PostgreSQL database plugin |
| Qt SQLite 2 database plugin |
| Qt SQLite 3 database plugin |
| Qt TDS Database Connectivity database plugin |
| Qt SVG support module |
| Qt unit testing module |
| Custom Qt widget plugin interface for Qt Designer |
| Qt Designer UI forms support module |
| Qt 5 Virtual Keyboard Module |
| Qt5 wrapper for Wayland |
| Qt 5 library for integration of C++/QML with HTML/js clients |
| Qt 5 library to render web content |
| QtWebKit with a more modern WebKit code base |
| Qt implementation of WebSocket protocol |
| Qt implementation of WebSocket protocol (QML bindings) |
| Qt component for displaying web content |
| Qt C++ widgets module |
| Qt platform-specific features for X11-based systems |
| Qt SAX and DOM implementations |
| Qt support for XPath, XQuery, XSLT and XML Schema |
To determine the libraries an application depends on, run ldd
on the main executable after a successful compilation.
Name | Description |
---|---|
| build tools ( |
| localization tools: |
| Makefile generator/build utility |
Name | Description |
---|---|
| plugins for TGA, TIFF, and MNG image formats |
In this example, the ported application uses the Qt 5 graphical user interface library, the Qt 5 core library, all of the Qt 5 code generation tools and Qt 5’s Makefile generator.
Since the gui
library implies a dependency on the core library, core
does not need to be specified.
The Qt 5 code generation tools moc
, uic
and rcc
, as well as the Makefile generator qmake
are only needed at buildtime, thus they are specified with the _build
suffix:
USES= qt:5 USE_QT= gui buildtools_build qmake_build
6.12.3. Using qmake
If the application provides a qmake project file (*.pro), define USES= qmake
along with USE_QT
.
USES= qmake
already implies a build dependency on qmake, therefore the qmake component can be omitted from USE_QT
.
Similar to CMake, qmake supports out-of-source builds, which can be enabled by specifying the outsource
argument (see USES= qmake
example).
Also see Possible Arguments for USES= qmake
.
Variable | Description |
---|---|
| Do not add the configure target. This is implied by |
| Suppress modification of the configure and make environments. It is only required when |
| Do not pass the |
| Perform an out-of-source build. |
Variable | Description |
---|---|
| Port specific qmake flags to be passed to the |
| Environment variables to be set for the |
| Path to qmake project files (.pro). The default is |
When using USES= qmake
, these settings are deployed:
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --with-qt-includes=${QT_INCDIR} \ --with-qt-libraries=${QT_LIBDIR} \ --with-extra-libs=${LOCALBASE}/lib \ --with-extra-includes=${LOCALBASE}/include CONFIGURE_ENV+= QTDIR="${QT_PREFIX}" QMAKE="${QMAKE}" \ MOC="${MOC}" RCC="${RCC}" UIC="${UIC}" \ QMAKESPEC="${QMAKESPEC}" PLIST_SUB+= QT_INCDIR=${QT_INCDIR_REL} \ QT_LIBDIR=${QT_LIBDIR_REL} \ QT_PLUGINDIR=${QT_PLUGINDIR_REL}
Some configure scripts do not support the arguments above.
To suppress modification of CONFIGURE_ENV
and CONFIGURE_ARGS
, set USES= qmake:no_env
.
USES= qmake
ExampleThis snippet demonstrates the use of qmake for a Qt 5 port:
USES= qmake:outsource qt:5 USE_QT= buildtools_build
Qt applications are often written to be cross-platform and often X11/Unix is not the platform they are developed on, which in turn leads to certain loose ends, like:
Missing additional include paths. Many applications come with system tray icon support, but neglect to look for includes and/or libraries in the X11 directories. To add directories to `qmake’s include and library search paths via the command line, use:
QMAKE_ARGS+= INCLUDEPATH+=${LOCALBASE}/include \ LIBS+=-L${LOCALBASE}/lib
Bogus installation paths. Sometimes data such as icons or .desktop files are by default installed into directories which are not scanned by XDG-compatible applications. editors/texmaker is an example for this - look at patch-texmaker.pro in the files directory of that port for a template on how to remedy this directly in the
qmake
project file.
6.13. Using KDE
6.13.1. KDE Variable Definitions
If the application depends on KDE, set USES+=kde:5
and USE_KDE
to the list of required components.
_build
and _run
suffixes can be used to force components dependency type (for example, baseapps_run
).
If no suffix is set, a default dependency type will be used.
To force both types, add the component twice with both suffixes (for example, ecm_build ecm_run
).
Available components are listed below (up-to-date components are also listed in /usr/ports/Mk/Uses/kde.mk):
Name | Description |
---|---|
| KF5 runtime and library to organize work in separate activities |
| KF5 statistics for activities |
| System service to manage user’s activities, track the usage patterns |
| Storage server for KDE-Pim |
| Akonadi Calendar Integration |
| Akonadi management and debugging console |
| Libraries and daemons to implement Contact Management in Akonadi |
| Import data from other mail clients to KMail |
| Libraries and daemons to implement basic email handling |
| KDE library for accessing mail storages in MBox format |
| Libraries and daemons to implement searching in Akonadi |
| A Feed Reader by KDE |
| KDE API for KAlarm alarms |
| KF5 API Documentation Tools |
| KF5 library that provides classes for handling archive formats |
| Open Collaboration Services API library KDE5 version |
| Open Collaboration Services API library KDE5 version |
| KF5 abstraction to system policy and authentication features |
| KF5 Framework for searching and managing user metadata |
| BalooWidgets library |
| KF5 Framework for searching and managing user metadata |
| KDE API for weblogging access |
| KF5 library for bookmarks and the XBEL format |
| Plasma5 artwork, styles and assets for the Breeze visual style |
| Plasma5 Breeze visual style for Gtk |
| Breeze icon theme for KDE |
| KDE calendar access library |
| Calendar support libraries for KDEPim |
| KDE utility and user interface functions for accessing calendar |
| KF5 library for string manipulation |
| KF5 text completion helpers and widgets |
| KF5 widgets for configuration dialogs |
| KF5 widgets for configuration dialogs |
| KDE api to manage contact information |
| KF5 addons to QtCore |
| KF5 library to handle crash analysis and bug report from apps |
| KF5 addons to QtDBus |
| Plasma5 library to create window decorations |
| KF5 integration of Frameworks widgets in Qt Designer/Creator |
| Plasma5 package management tools |
| KF5 abstraction to system DNSSD features |
| KF5 documentation generation from docbook |
| Plasma5 crash handler |
| Extra modules and scripts for CMake |
| KF5 library to convert emoticons |
| Event view libriares for KDEPim |
| KF5 library for extracting file metadata |
| KF5 workspace and cross-framework integration plugins |
| KDE based library to access google services |
| KF5 library to add support for global workspace shortcuts |
| Editor for Grantlee themes |
| KDE PIM grantleetheme |
| Library for gravatar support |
| KF5 addons to QtGui |
| KDE library for calendar holidays |
| Plasma5 library for hotkeys |
| KF5 advanced internationalization framework |
| KF5 library for handling icons in applications |
| KDE pim identities |
| KF5 library for monitoring user activity |
| KDE API for IMAP support |
| Incidence editor libriares for KDEPim |
| Plasma5 utility providing system information |
| KF5 process launcher to speed up launching KDE applications |
| KF5 models for Qt Model/View system |
| KF5 widget addons for Qt Model/View |
| KF5 widgets for tracking KJob instance |
| KF5 library providing an ECMAScript interpreter |
| KF5 library for binding JavaScript objects to QObjects |
| KDE contact manager |
| Personal alarm scheduler |
| Personal alarm scheduler |
| Basic editor framework for the KDE system |
| KF5 utilities for working with KCModules |
| Plasma5 non-interactive system tools |
| Plasma5 GTK2 and GTK3 configurator |
| KF5 library providing integration of QML and KDE Frameworks |
| KF5 extensible daemon for providing system level services |
| KF5 porting aid from KDELibs4 |
| KDE PIM addons |
| KDE PIM mail related libraries |
| KDE PIM tools and services |
| Plasma5 addons to improve the Plasma experience |
| KF5 integration with su for elevated privileges |
| KF5 library providing integration of QtWebKit |
| Plasma5 monitor’s gamma settings |
| KF5 KTHML rendering engine |
| KF5 library providing support for additional image formats |
| KF5 resource and network access abstraction |
| QtQuick based components set |
| Data Model and Extraction System for Travel Reservation information |
| KDE mail client |
| KDE mail client |
| KDE mail account wizard |
| Plasma5 menu editor |
| Popup notes |
| KDE Personal Information Manager |
| KDE Personal Information Manager |
| KDE glue for embedding KParts into Kontact |
| Calendar and scheduling Program |
| A DAV protocol implementation with KJobs |
| Library to deal with Apple Wallet pass files |
| KF5 multi-language application scripting |
| Plasma5 screen management library |
| Plasma5 secure lock screen architecture |
| Job-based library to send email through an SMTP server |
| Plasma5 ssh-add frontend |
| Plasma5 utility to track and control the running processes |
| Plasma5 KWallet PAM Integration |
| Integration plugins for a Wayland-based desktop |
| Plasma5 window manager |
| Plasma5 daemon listening for wall and write messages |
| LDAP access API for KDE |
| KDE CDDB library |
| KDE library for interfacing with audio CDs |
| LibRaw interface for KDE |
| Libraries used by KDE games |
| KDE PIM Libraries |
| Library for reading and writing vocabulary files |
| Exiv2 library interface for KDE |
| KDE Image Plugin Interface |
| Certificate manager for KDE |
| SANE library interface for KDE |
| Plasma5 screen management library |
| Sieve libriares for KDEPim |
| Plasma5 library to track and control running processes |
| Common libriares for KDEPim |
| Import mbox files to KMail |
| KDE library to managing mail transport |
| Virtual globe and world atlas for KDE |
| KDE library for accessing mail storages in MBox format |
| Import mbox files to KMail |
| KF5 plugin interface for media player features |
| Library for handling messages |
| Plasma5 Plasmoid for search |
| Library for handling MIME data |
| KF5 library for downloading application assets from the network |
| KF5 abstraction for system notifications |
| KF5 configuration system for KNotify |
| KDE universal document viewer |
| Plasma5 Oxygen style |
| The Oxygen icon theme for KDE |
| KF5 library to load and install packages |
| KF5 document centric plugin system |
| KF5 library providing access to contacts |
| Import and export KDE PIM settings |
| Common libriares for KDEPim |
| KDE library for PIM-specific text editing utilities |
| Plasma5 components to integrate browsers into the desktop |
| Plasma5 plasma desktop |
| KF5 plugin based UI runtime used to write user interfaces |
| Qt Platform Theme integration plugins for the Plasma workspaces |
| Plasma5 Plasma pulse audio mixer |
| Plasma5 applications useful for Plasma development |
| Plasma5 Plasma workspace |
| Plasma5 wallpapers |
| KF5 lightweight plotting framework |
| Plasma5 daemon providing a polkit authentication UI |
| Plasma5 tool to manage the power consumption settings |
| API to produce barcodes |
| KF5 pty abstraction |
| Offers available actions for a specific purpose |
| Qt QuickControl2 style for KDE |
| KF5 parallelized query system |
| KF5 advanced plugin and service introspection |
| KF5 hardware integration and detection |
| KF5 plugin-based spell checking library |
| KDE RSS feed handling library |
| KF5 syntax highlighting engine for structured text and code |
| Plasma5 system settings |
| KF5 advanced embeddable text editor |
| KF5 advanced text editing widgets |
| KF5 addons to QtDBus |
| KDE API for the handling of TNEF data |
| KF5 library for unit conversion |
| Plasma5 user manager |
| KF5 secure and unified container for user passwords |
| KF5 Client and Server library wrapper for the Wayland libraries |
| KF5 addons to QtWidgets |
| KF5 library for access to the windowing system |
| KF5 user configurable main windows |
| KF5 interaction with XMLRPC services |
USE_KDE
ExampleThis is a simple example for a KDE port.
USES= cmake
instructs the port to utilize CMake, a configuration tool widely used by KDE projects (see Using cmake
for detailed usage).
USE_KDE
brings dependency on KDE libraries.
Required KDE components and other dependencies can be determined through the configure log.
USE_KDE
does not imply USE_QT
.
If a port requires some Qt components, specify them in USE_QT
.
USES= cmake kde:5 qt:5 USE_KDE= ecm USE_QT= core buildtools_build qmake_build
6.14. Using LXQt
Applications depending on LXQt should set USES+= lxqt
and set USE_LXQT
to the list of required components from the table below
Name | Description |
---|---|
| Helpers for additional CMake modules |
| Libfm Qt bindings |
| LXQt core library |
| Qt implementation of freedesktop.org XDG specifications |
USE_LXQT
ExampleThis is a simple example, USE_LXQT
adds a dependency on LXQt libraries.
Required LXQt components and other dependencies can be determined from the configure log.
USES= cmake lxqt qt:5 tar:xz USE_QT= core dbus widgets buildtools_build qmake_build USE_LXQT= buildtools libfmqt
6.15. Using Java
6.15.1. Variable Definitions
If the port needs a Java™ Development Kit (JDK™) to either build, run or even extract the distfile, then define USE_JAVA
.
There are several JDKs in the ports collection, from various vendors, and in several versions.
If the port must use a particular version, specify it using the JAVA_VERSION
variable.
The most current version is java/openjdk16, with java/openjdk15, java/openjdk14, java/openjdk13, java/openjdk12, java/openjdk11, java/openjdk8, and java/openjdk7 also available.
Variable | Means |
---|---|
| Define for the remaining variables to have any effect. |
| List of space-separated suitable Java versions for the port. An optional |
| List of space-separated suitable JDK port operating systems for the port (allowed values: |
| List of space-separated suitable JDK port vendors for the port (allowed values: |
| When set, add the selected JDK port to the build dependencies. |
| When set, add the selected JDK port to the run dependencies. |
| When set, add the selected JDK port to the extract dependencies. |
Below is the list of all settings a port will receive after setting USE_JAVA
:
Variable | Value |
---|---|
| The name of the JDK port (for example, |
| The full version of the JDK port (for example, |
| The operating system used by the JDK port (for example, |
| The vendor of the JDK port (for example, |
| Description of the operating system used by the JDK port (for example, |
| Description of the vendor of the JDK port (for example, |
| Path to the installation directory of the JDK (for example, '/usr/local/openjdk6'). |
| Path to the Java compiler to use (for example, '/usr/local/openjdk6/bin/javac'). |
| Path to the |
| Path to the |
| Path to the |
| Path to the |
| Path to the |
| Path to the |
| Path to the |
| Path to the |
| Path to the |
| Path to the |
| Path to the RMI stub/skeleton generator, |
| Path to the RMI registry program, |
| Path to the RMI daemon program |
| Path to the archive that contains the JDK class files, ${JAVA_HOME}/jre/lib/rt.jar. |
Use the java-debug
make target to get information for debugging the port.
It will display the value of many of the previously listed variables.
Additionally, these constants are defined so all Java ports may be installed in a consistent way:
Constant | Value |
---|---|
| The base directory for everything related to Java. Default: ${PREFIX}/share/java. |
| The directory where JAR files is installed. Default: ${JAVASHAREDIR}/classes. |
| The directory where JAR files installed by other ports are located. Default: ${LOCALBASE}/share/java/classes. |
The related entries are defined in both PLIST_SUB
(documented in Changing pkg-plist Based on Make Variables) and SUB_LIST
.
6.15.2. Building with Ant
When the port is to be built using Apache Ant, it has to define USE_ANT
.
Ant is thus considered to be the sub-make command.
When no do-build
target is defined by the port, a default one will be set that runs Ant according to MAKE_ENV
, MAKE_ARGS
and ALL_TARGET
.
This is similar to the USES= gmake
mechanism, which is documented in Building Mechanisms.
6.15.3. Best Practices
When porting a Java library, the port has to install the JAR file(s) in ${JAVAJARDIR}, and everything else under ${JAVASHAREDIR}/${PORTNAME} (except for the documentation, see below). To reduce the packing file size, reference the JAR file(s) directly in the Makefile. Use this statement (where myport.jar is the name of the JAR file installed as part of the port):
PLIST_FILES+= ${JAVAJARDIR}/myport.jar
When porting a Java application, the port usually installs everything under a single directory (including its JAR dependencies). The use of ${JAVASHAREDIR}/${PORTNAME} is strongly encouraged in this regard. It is up the porter to decide whether the port installs the additional JAR dependencies under this directory or uses the already installed ones (from ${JAVAJARDIR}).
When porting a Java™ application that requires an application server such as www/tomcat7 to run the service, it is quite common for a vendor to distribute a .war. A .war is a Web application ARchive and is extracted when called by the application. Avoid adding a .war to pkg-plist. It is not considered best practice. An application server will expand war archive, but not clean it up properly if the port is removed. A more desirable way of working with this file is to extract the archive, then install the files, and lastly add these files to pkg-plist.
TOMCATDIR= ${LOCALBASE}/apache-tomcat-7.0 WEBAPPDIR= myapplication post-extract: @${MKDIR} ${WRKDIR}/${PORTDIRNAME} @${TAR} xf ${WRKDIR}/myapplication.war -C ${WRKDIR}/${PORTDIRNAME} do-install: cd ${WRKDIR} && \ ${INSTALL} -d -o ${WWWOWN} -g ${WWWGRP} ${TOMCATDIR}/webapps/${PORTDIRNAME} cd ${WRKDIR}/${PORTDIRNAME} && ${COPYTREE_SHARE} \* ${WEBAPPDIR}/${PORTDIRNAME}
Regardless of the type of port (library or application), the additional documentation is installed in the same location as for any other port.
The Javadoc tool is known to produce a different set of files depending on the version of the JDK that is used.
For ports that do not enforce the use of a particular JDK, it is therefore a complex task to specify the packing list (pkg-plist).
This is one reason why porters are strongly encouraged to use PORTDOCS
.
Moreover, even if the set of files that will be generated by javadoc
can be predicted, the size of the resulting pkg-plist advocates for the use of PORTDOCS
.
The default value for DATADIR
is ${PREFIX}/share/${PORTNAME}.
It is a good idea to override DATADIR
to ${JAVASHAREDIR}/${PORTNAME} for Java ports.
Indeed, DATADIR
is automatically added to PLIST_SUB
(documented in Changing pkg-plist Based on Make Variables) so use %%DATADIR%%
directly in pkg-plist.
As for the choice of building Java ports from source or directly installing them from a binary distribution, there is no defined policy at the time of writing. However, people from the FreeBSD Java Project encourage porters to have their ports built from source whenever it is a trivial task.
All the features that have been presented in this section are implemented in bsd.java.mk. If the port needs more sophisticated Java support, please first have a look at the bsd.java.mk Git log as it usually takes some time to document the latest features. Then, if the needed support that is lacking would be beneficial to many other Java ports, feel free to discuss it on the freebsd-java.
Although there is a java
category for PRs, it refers to the JDK porting effort from the FreeBSD Java project.
Therefore, submit the Java port in the ports
category as for any other port, unless the issue is related to either a JDK implementation or bsd.java.mk.
Similarly, there is a defined policy regarding the CATEGORIES
of a Java port, which is detailed in Categorization.
6.16. Web Applications, Apache and PHP
6.16.1. Apache
| The port requires Apache. Possible values: |
| Full path to the |
| Full path to the |
| The version of present Apache installation (read-only variable). This variable is only available after inclusion of bsd.port.pre.mk. Possible values: |
| Directory for Apache modules. This variable is automatically expanded in pkg-plist. |
| Directory for Apache headers. This variable is automatically expanded in pkg-plist. |
| Directory for Apache configuration files. This variable is automatically expanded in pkg-plist. |
| Name of the module. Default value is |
| Short name of the module. Automatically derived from |
| Use |
| Also automatically creates a pkg-plist. |
| Adds a directory to a header search path during compilation. |
| Adds a directory to a library search path during compilation. |
| Additional flags to pass to |
6.16.2. Web Applications
Web applications must be installed into PREFIX/www/appname.
This path is available both in Makefile and in pkg-plist as WWWDIR
, and the path relative to PREFIX
is available in Makefile as WWWDIR_REL
.
The user and group of web server process are available as WWWOWN
and WWWGRP
, in case the ownership of some files needs to be changed.
The default values of both are www
.
Use WWWOWN?= myuser
and WWWGRP?= mygroup
if the port needs different values.
This allows the user to override them easily.
Use |
Do not depend on Apache unless the web app explicitly needs Apache. Respect that users may wish to run a web application on a web server other than Apache.
6.16.3. PHP
PHP web applications declare their dependency on it with USES=php
.
See php
for more information.
6.16.4. PEAR Modules
Porting PEAR modules is a very simple process.
Add USES=pear
to the port’s Makefile.
The framework will install the relevant files in the right places and automatically generate the plist at install time.
PORTNAME= Date DISTVERSION= 1.4.3 CATEGORIES= devel www pear MAINTAINER= example@domain.com COMMENT= PEAR Date and Time Zone Classes USES= pear .include <bsd.port.mk>
PEAR modules will automatically be flavorized using PHP flavors. |
If a non default |
PEAR modules do not need to defined |
6.16.4.1. Horde Modules
In the same way, porting Horde modules is a simple process.
Add USES=horde
to the port’s Makefile.
The framework will install the relevant files in the right places and automatically generate the plist at install time.
The USE_HORDE_BUILD
and USE_HORDE_RUN
variables can be used to add buildtime and runtime dependencies on other Horde modules.
See Mk/Uses/horde.mk for a complete list of available modules.
PORTNAME= Horde_Core DISTVERSION= 2.14.0 CATEGORIES= devel www pear MAINTAINER= horde@FreeBSD.org COMMENT= Horde Core Framework libraries OPTIONS_DEFINE= KOLAB SOCKETS KOLAB_DESC= Enable Kolab server support SOCKETS_DESC= Depend on sockets PHP extension USES= horde USE_PHP= session USE_HORDE_BUILD= Horde_Role USE_HORDE_RUN= Horde_Role Horde_History Horde_Pack \ Horde_Text_Filter Horde_View KOLAB_USE= HORDE_RUN=Horde_Kolab_Server,Horde_Kolab_Session SOCKETS_USE= PHP=sockets .include <bsd.port.mk>
As Horde modules are also PEAR modules they will also automatically be flavorized using PHP flavors. |
6.17. Using Python
The Ports Collection supports parallel installation of multiple Python versions.
Ports must use a correct python
interpreter, according to the user-settable PYTHON_VERSION
.
Most prominently, this means replacing the path to python
executable in scripts with the value of PYTHON_CMD
.
Ports that install files under PYTHON_SITELIBDIR
must use the pyXY-
package name prefix, so their package name embeds the version of Python they are installed into.
PKGNAMEPREFIX= ${PYTHON_PKGNAMEPREFIX}
| The port needs Python. The minimal required version can be specified with values such as |
| Use Python distutils for configuring, compiling, and installing. This is required when the port comes with setup.py. This overrides the |
| Create the packaging list automatically. This also requires |
| The port will use an unique prefix, typically |
| The port does not use distutils but still supports multiple Python versions. |
| If the current Python version is not the default version, the port will gain |
| Used as a |
| Location of the site-packages tree, that contains installation path of Python (usually |
| The PREFIX-clean variant of PYTHON_SITELIBDIR. Always use |
| Python interpreter command line, including version number. |
| Dependency line for numeric extension. |
| Dependency line for the new numeric extension, numpy. (PYNUMERIC is deprecated by upstream vendor). |
| Dependency line for XML extension (not needed for Python 2.0 and higher as it is also in base distribution). |
| Conditional dependency on devel/py-enum34 depending on the Python version. |
| Conditional dependency on devel/py-enum-compat depending on the Python version. |
| Conditional dependency on devel/py-pathlib depending on the Python version. |
| Conditional dependency on net/py-ipaddress depending on the Python version. |
| Conditional dependency on devel/py-futures depending on the Python version. |
A complete list of available variables can be found in /usr/ports/Mk/Uses/python.mk.
All dependencies to Python ports using Python flavors (either with |
PORTNAME= sample DISTVERSION= 1.2.3 CATEGORIES= devel MAINTAINER= john@doe.tld COMMENT= Python sample module RUN_DEPENDS= ${PYTHON_PKGNAMEPREFIX}six>0:devel/py-six@${PY_FLAVOR} USES= python USE_PYTHON= autoplist distutils .include <bsd.port.mk>
Some Python applications claim to have DESTDIR
support (which would be required for staging) but it is broken (Mailman up to 2.1.16, for instance).
This can be worked around by recompiling the scripts.
This can be done, for example, in the post-build
target.
Assuming the Python scripts are supposed to reside in PYTHONPREFIX_SITELIBDIR
after installation, this solution can be applied:
(cd ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX} \ && ${PYTHON_CMD} ${PYTHON_LIBDIR}/compileall.py \ -d ${PREFIX} -f ${PYTHONPREFIX_SITELIBDIR:S;${PREFIX}/;;})
This recompiles the sources with a path relative to the stage directory, and prepends the value of PREFIX
to the file name recorded in the byte-compiled output file by -d
. -f
is required to force recompilation, and the :S;${PREFIX}/;;
strips prefixes from the value of PYTHONPREFIX_SITELIBDIR
to make it relative to PREFIX
.
6.18. Using Tcl/Tk
The Ports Collection supports parallel installation of multiple Tcl/Tk versions.
Ports should try to support at least the default Tcl/Tk version and higher with USES=tcl
.
It is possible to specify the desired version of tcl
by appending :_xx_
, for example, USES=tcl:85
.
| chosen major.minor version of Tcl |
| full path of the Tcl interpreter |
| path of the Tcl libraries |
| path of the Tcl C header files |
| chosen major.minor version of Tk |
| full path of the Tk interpreter |
| path of the Tk libraries |
| path of the Tk C header files |
See the USES=tcl
and USES=tk
of Using USES
Macros for a full description of those variables.
A complete list of those variables is available in /usr/ports/Mk/Uses/tcl.mk.
6.19. Using Ruby
Variable | Description |
---|---|
| Adds build and run dependencies on Ruby. |
| The port uses extconf.rb to configure. |
| The port uses setup.rb to configure. |
| Override the name of the setup script from setup.rb. Another common value is install.rb. |
This table shows the selected variables available to port authors via the ports infrastructure. These variables are used to install files into their proper locations. Use them in pkg-plist as much as possible. Do not redefine these variables in the port.
Variable | Description | Example value |
---|---|---|
| Used as a |
|
| Full version of Ruby in the form of |
|
| Architecture independent libraries installation path. |
|
| Architecture dependent libraries installation path. |
|
| Module documentation installation path. |
|
| Module examples installation path. |
|
A complete list of available variables can be found in /usr/ports/Mk/bsd.ruby.mk.
6.20. Using SDL
USE_SDL
is used to autoconfigure the dependencies for ports which use an SDL based library like devel/sdl12 and graphics/sdl_image.
These SDL libraries for version 1.2 are recognized:
sdl: devel/sdl12
console: devel/sdl_console
gfx: graphics/sdl_gfx
image: graphics/sdl_image
mixer: audio/sdl_mixer
mm: devel/sdlmm
net: net/sdl_net
pango: x11-toolkits/sdl_pango
sound: audio/sdl_sound
ttf: graphics/sdl_ttf
These SDL libraries for version 2.0 are recognized:
sdl: devel/sdl20
gfx: graphics/sdl2_gfx
image: graphics/sdl2_image
mixer: audio/sdl2_mixer
net: net/sdl2_net
ttf: graphics/sdl2_ttf
Therefore, if a port has a dependency on net/sdl_net and audio/sdl_mixer, the syntax will be:
USE_SDL= net mixer
The dependency devel/sdl12, which is required by net/sdl_net and audio/sdl_mixer, is automatically added as well.
Using USE_SDL
with entries for SDL 1.2, it will automatically:
Add a dependency on sdl12-config to
BUILD_DEPENDS
Add the variable
SDL_CONFIG
toCONFIGURE_ENV
Add the dependencies of the selected libraries to
LIB_DEPENDS
Using USE_SDL
with entries for SDL 2.0, it will automatically:
Add a dependency on sdl2-config to
BUILD_DEPENDS
Add the variable
SDL2_CONFIG
toCONFIGURE_ENV
Add the dependencies of the selected libraries to
LIB_DEPENDS
6.21. Using wxWidgets
This section describes the status of the wxWidgets libraries in the ports tree and its integration with the ports system.
6.21.1. Introduction
There are many versions of the wxWidgets libraries which conflict between them (install files under the same name). In the ports tree this problem has been solved by installing each version under a different name using version number suffixes.
The obvious disadvantage of this is that each application has to be modified to find the expected version.
Fortunately, most of the applications call the wx-config
script to determine the necessary compiler and linker flags.
The script is named differently for every available version.
Majority of applications respect an environment variable, or accept a configure argument, to specify which wx-config
script to call.
Otherwise they have to be patched.
6.21.2. Version Selection
To make the port use a specific version of wxWidgets there are two variables available for defining (if only one is defined the other will be set to a default value):
Variable | Description | Default value |
---|---|---|
| List of versions the port can use | All available versions |
| List of versions the port cannot use | None |
The available wxWidgets versions and the corresponding ports in the tree are:
Version | Port |
---|---|
| |
|
The variables in Variables to Select wxWidgets Versions can be set to one or more of these combinations separated by spaces:
Description | Example |
---|---|
Single version |
|
Ascending range |
|
Descending range |
|
Full range (must be ascending) |
|
There are also some variables to select the preferred versions from the available ones. They can be set to a list of versions, the first ones will have higher priority.
Name | Designed for |
---|---|
| the port |
| the user |
6.21.3. Component Selection
There are other applications that, while not being wxWidgets libraries, are related to them.
These applications can be specified in WX_COMPS
. These components are available:
Name | Description | Version restriction |
---|---|---|
| main library | none |
| contributed libraries |
|
| wxPython (Python bindings) |
|
The dependency type can be selected for each component by adding a suffix separated by a semicolon. If not present then a default type will be used (see Default wxWidgets Dependency Types). These types are available:
Name | Description |
---|---|
| Component is required for building, equivalent to |
| Component is required for running, equivalent to |
| Component is required for building and running, equivalent to |
The default values for the components are detailed in this table:
Component | Dependency type |
---|---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This fragment corresponds to a port which uses wxWidgets version 2.4
and its contributed libraries.
USE_WX= 2.8 WX_COMPS= wx contrib
6.21.4. Detecting Installed Versions
To detect an installed version, define WANT_WX
.
If it is not set to a specific version then the components will have a version suffix.
HAVE_WX
will be filled after detection.
This fragment can be used in a port that uses wxWidgets if it is installed, or an option is selected.
WANT_WX= yes .include <bsd.port.pre.mk> .if defined(WITH_WX) || !empty(PORT_OPTIONS:MWX) || !empty(HAVE_WX:Mwx-2.8) USE_WX= 2.8 CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-wx .endif
This fragment can be used in a port that enables wxPython support if it is installed or if an option is selected, in addition to wxWidgets, both version 2.8
.
USE_WX= 2.8 WX_COMPS= wx WANT_WX= 2.8 .include <bsd.port.pre.mk> .if defined(WITH_WXPYTHON) || !empty(PORT_OPTIONS:MWXPYTHON) || !empty(HAVE_WX:Mpython) WX_COMPS+= python CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-wxpython .endif
6.21.5. Defined Variables
These variables are available in the port (after defining one from Variables to Select wxWidgets Versions).
Name | Description |
---|---|
| The path to the wxWidgets`wx-config` script (with different name) |
| The path to the wxWidgets`wxrc` program (with different name) |
| The wxWidgets version that is going to be used (for example, |
6.21.6. Processing in bsd.port.pre.mk
Define WX_PREMK
to be able to use the variables right after including bsd.port.pre.mk.
When defining |
This fragment illustrates the use of WX_PREMK
by running the wx-config
script to obtain the full version string, assign it to a variable and pass it to the program.
USE_WX= 2.8 WX_PREMK= yes .include <bsd.port.pre.mk> .if exists(${WX_CONFIG}) VER_STR!= ${WX_CONFIG} --release PLIST_SUB+= VERSION="${VER_STR}" .endif
The wxWidgets variables can be safely used in commands when they are inside targets without the need of |
6.21.7. Additional configure
Arguments
Some GNU configure
scripts cannot find wxWidgets with just the WX_CONFIG
environment variable set, requiring additional arguments. WX_CONF_ARGS
can be used for provide them.
Possible value | Resulting argument |
---|---|
|
|
|
|
6.22. Using Lua
This section describes the status of the Lua libraries in the ports tree and its integration with the ports system.
6.22.1. Introduction
There are many versions of the Lua libraries and corresponding interpreters, which conflict between them (install files under the same name). In the ports tree this problem has been solved by installing each version under a different name using version number suffixes.
The obvious disadvantage of this is that each application has to be modified to find the expected version. But it can be solved by adding some additional flags to the compiler and linker.
Applications that use Lua should normally build for just one version.
However, loadable modules for Lua are built in a separate flavor for each Lua version that they support, and dependencies on such modules should specify the flavor using the @${LUA_FLAVOR}
suffix on the port origin.
6.22.2. Version Selection
A port using Lua should have a line of this form:
USES= lua
If a specific version of Lua, or range of versions, is needed, it can be specified as a parameter in the form XY
(which may be used multiple times), XY+
, -XY
, or XY-ZA
.
The default version of Lua as set via DEFAULT_VERSIONS
will be used if it falls in the requested range, otherwise the closest requested version to the default will be used.
For example:
USES= lua:52-53
Note that no attempt is made to adjust the version selection based on the presence of any already-installed Lua version.
The |
6.22.3. Configuration and Compiler flags
Software that uses Lua may have been written to auto-detect the Lua version in use. In general ports should override this assumption, and force the use of the specific Lua version selected as described above. Depending on the software being ported, this might require any or all of:
Using
LUA_VER
as part of a parameter to the software’s configuration script viaCONFIGURE_ARGS
orCONFIGURE_ENV
(or equivalent for other build systems);Adding
-I${LUA_INCDIR}
,-L${LUA_LIBDIR}
, and-llua-${LUA_VER}
toCFLAGS
,LDFLAGS
,LIBS
respectively as appropriate;Patch the software’s configuration or build files to select the correct version.
6.22.4. Version Flavors
A port which installs a Lua module (rather than an application that simply makes use of Lua) should build a separate flavor for each supported Lua version.
This is done by adding the module
parameter:
USES= lua:module
A version number or range of versions can be specified as well; use a comma to separate parameters.
Since each flavor must have a different package name, the variable LUA_PKGNAMEPREFIX
is provided which will be set to an appropriate value; the intended usage is:
PKGNAMEPREFIX= ${LUA_PKGNAMEPREFIX}
Module ports should normally install files only to LUA_MODLIBDIR
, LUA_MODSHAREDIR
, LUA_DOCSDIR
, and LUA_EXAMPLESDIR
, all of which are set up to refer to version-specific subdirectories.
Installing any other files must be done with care to avoid conflicts between versions.
A port (other than a Lua module) which wishes to build a separate package for each Lua version should use the flavors
parameter:
USES= lua:flavors
This operates the same way as the module
parameter described above, but without the assumption that the package should be documented as a Lua module (so LUA_DOCSDIR
and LUA_EXAMPLESDIR
are not defined by default).
However, the port may choose to define LUA_DOCSUBDIR
as a suitable subdirectory name (usually the port’s PORTNAME
as long as this does not conflict with the PORTNAME
of any module), in which case the framework will define both LUA_DOCSDIR
and LUA_EXAMPLESDIR
.
As with module ports, a flavored port should avoid installing files that would conflict between versions.
Typically this is done by adding LUA_VER_STR
as a suffix to program names (e.g. using uniquefiles
), and otherwise using either LUA_VER
or LUA_VER_STR
as part of any other files or subdirectories used outside of LUA_MODLIBDIR
and LUA_MODSHAREDIR
.
6.22.5. Defined Variables
These variables are available in the port.
Name | Description |
---|---|
| The Lua version that is going to be used (for example, |
| The Lua version without the dots (for example, |
| The flavor name corresponding to the selected Lua version, to be used for specifying dependencies |
| The prefix that should be used to locate Lua (and components) that are already installed |
| The prefix where Lua (and components) are to be installed by this port |
| The directory where Lua header files are installed |
| The directory where Lua libraries are installed |
| The directory where Lua module libraries (.so) that are already installed are to be found |
| The directory where Lua modules (.lua) that are already installed are to be found |
| The directory where Lua module libraries (.so) are to be installed by this port |
| The directory where Lua modules (.lua) are to be installed by this port |
| The package name prefix used by Lua modules |
| The name of the Lua interpreter (e.g. |
| The name of the Lua compiler (e.g. |
These additional variables are available for ports that specified the module
parameter:
Name | Description |
---|---|
| the directory to which the module’s documentation should be installed. |
| the directory to which the module’s example files should be installed. |
6.22.6. Examples
This example shows how to reference a Lua module required at run time. Notice that the reference must specify a flavor.
PORTNAME= sample DISTVERSION= 1.2.3 CATEGORIES= whatever MAINTAINER= john@doe.tld COMMENT= Sample RUN_DEPENDS= ${LUA_REFMODLIBDIR}/lpeg.so:devel/lua-lpeg@${LUA_FLAVOR} USES= lua .include <bsd.port.mk>
PORTNAME= sample DISTVERSION= 1.2.3 CATEGORIES= whatever PKGNAMEPREFIX= ${LUA_PKGNAMEPREFIX} MAINTAINER= john@doe.tld COMMENT= Sample USES= lua:module DOCSDIR= ${LUA_DOCSDIR} .include <bsd.port.mk>
6.23. Using iconv
FreeBSD has a native iconv
in the operating system.
For software that needs iconv
, define USES=iconv
.
When a port defines USES=iconv
, these variables will be available:
Variable name | Purpose | Port iconv (when using WCHAR_T or //TRANSLIT extensions) | Base iconv |
---|---|---|---|
| Directory where the |
| /usr/bin/iconv |
|
|
| (empty) |
| Directory where the |
| /usr |
| Preconstructed configure argument for configure scripts |
| (empty) |
| Preconstructed configure argument for configure scripts |
| (empty) |
These two examples automatically populate the variables with the correct value for systems using converters/libiconv or the native iconv
respectively:
iconv
UsageUSES= iconv LDFLAGS+= -L${LOCALBASE}/lib ${ICONV_LIB}
iconv
Usage with configure
USES= iconv CONFIGURE_ARGS+=${ICONV_CONFIGURE_ARG}
As shown above, ICONV_LIB
is empty when a native iconv
is present.
This can be used to detect the native iconv
and respond appropriately.
Sometimes a program has an ld
argument or search path hardcoded in a Makefile or configure script.
This approach can be used to solve that problem:
-liconv
USES= iconv post-patch: @${REINPLACE_CMD} -e 's/-liconv/${ICONV_LIB}/' ${WRKSRC}/Makefile
In some cases it is necessary to set alternate values or perform operations depending on whether there is a native iconv
.
bsd.port.pre.mk must be included before testing the value of ICONV_LIB
:
iconv
AvailabilityUSES= iconv .include <bsd.port.pre.mk> post-patch: .if empty(ICONV_LIB) # native iconv detected @${REINPLACE_CMD} -e 's|iconv||' ${WRKSRC}/Config.sh .endif .include <bsd.port.post.mk>
6.24. Using Xfce
Ports that need Xfce libraries or applications set USES=xfce
.
Specific Xfce library and application dependencies are set with values assigned to USE_XFCE
.
They are defined in /usr/ports/Mk/Uses/xfce.mk.
The possible values are:
USE_XFCE
- garcon
- libexo
- libgui
- libmenu
- libutil
- panel
- thunar
- xfconf
USES=xfce
ExampleUSES= xfce USE_XFCE= libmenu
In this example, the ported application uses the GTK2-specific widgets x11/libxfce4menu and x11/xfce4-conf.
USES= xfce:gtk2 USE_XFCE= libmenu xfconf
Xfce components included this way will automatically include any dependencies they need. It is no longer necessary to specify the entire list. If the port only needs x11-wm/xfce4-panel, use: USES= xfce USE_XFCE= panel There is no need to list the components x11-wm/xfce4-panel needs itself like this: USES= xfce USE_XFCE= libexo libmenu libutil panel However, Xfce components and non-Xfce dependencies of the port must be included explicitly. Do not count on an Xfce component to provide a sub-dependency other than itself for the main port. |
6.25. Using Databases
Use one of the USES
macros from Database USES
Macros to add a dependency on a database.
Database | USES Macro |
---|---|
Berkeley DB | |
MariaDB, MySQL, Percona | |
PostgreSQL | |
SQLite |
USES= bdb:6
See bdb
for more information.
When a port needs the PostgreSQL server version 9.6 or later add
USES= pgsql:9.6+ WANT_PGSQL= server
See pgsql
for more information.
USES= sqlite:3
See sqlite
for more information.
6.26. Starting and Stopping Services (rc
Scripts)
rc.d scripts are used to start services on system startup, and to give administrators a standard way of stopping, starting and restarting the service. Ports integrate into the system rc.d framework. Details on its usage can be found in the rc.d Handbook chapter. Detailed explanation of the available commands is provided in rc(8) and rc.subr(8). Finally, there is an article on practical aspects of rc.d scripting.
With a mythical port called doorman, which needs to start a doormand daemon. Add the following to the Makefile:
USE_RC_SUBR= doormand
Multiple scripts may be listed and will be installed.
Scripts must be placed in the files subdirectory and a .in
suffix must be added to their filename.
Standard SUB_LIST
expansions will be ran against this file.
Use of the %%PREFIX%%
and %%LOCALBASE%%
expansions is strongly encouraged as well.
More on SUB_LIST
in the relevant section.
As of FreeBSD 6.1-RELEASE, local rc.d scripts (including those installed by ports) are included in the overall rcorder(8) of the base system.
An example simple rc.d script to start the doormand daemon:
#!/bin/sh # $FreeBSD$ # # PROVIDE: doormand # REQUIRE: LOGIN # KEYWORD: shutdown # # Add these lines to /etc/rc.conf.local or /etc/rc.conf # to enable this service: # # doormand_enable (bool): Set to NO by default. # Set it to YES to enable doormand. # doormand_config (path): Set to %%PREFIX%%/etc/doormand/doormand.cf # by default. . /etc/rc.subr name=doormand rcvar=doormand_enable load_rc_config $name : ${doormand_enable:="NO"} : ${doormand_config="%%PREFIX%%/etc/doormand/doormand.cf"} command=%%PREFIX%%/sbin/${name} pidfile=/var/run/${name}.pid command_args="-p $pidfile -f $doormand_config" run_rc_command "$1"
Unless there is a very good reason to start the service earlier, or it runs as a particular user (other than root), all ports scripts must use:
REQUIRE: LOGIN
If the startup script launches a daemon that must be shutdown, the following will trigger a stop of the service on system shutdown:
KEYWORD: shutdown
If the script is not starting a persistent service this is not necessary.
For optional configuration elements the "=" style of default variable assignment is preferable to the ":=" style here, since the former sets a default value only if the variable is unset, and the latter sets one if the variable is unset or null. A user might very well include something like:
doormand_flags=""
in their rc.conf.local, and a variable substitution using ":=" would inappropriately override the user’s intention.
The _enable
variable is not optional, and must use the ":" for the default.
Ports must not start and stop their services when installing and deinstalling. Do not abuse the plist keywords described in the @preexec command,@postexec command,@preunexec command,@postunexec command section by running commands that modify the currently running system, including starting or stopping services. |
6.26.1. Pre-Commit Checklist
Before contributing a port with an rc.d script, and more importantly, before committing one, please consult this checklist to be sure that it is ready.
The devel/rclint port can check for most of these, but it is not a substitute for proper review.
If this is a new file, does it have a .sh extension? If so, that must be changed to just file.in since rc.d files may not end with that extension.
Does the file have a
$FreeBSD$
tag?Do the name of the file (minus .in), the
PROVIDE
line, and$
name all match? The file name matchingPROVIDE
makes debugging easier, especially for rcorder(8) issues. Matching the file name and `$`name makes it easier to figure out which variables are relevant in rc.conf[.local]. It is also a policy for all new scripts, including those in the base system.Is the
REQUIRE
line set toLOGIN
? This is mandatory for scripts that run as a non-root user. If it runs as root, is there a good reason for it to run prior toLOGIN
? If not, it must run after so that local scrips can be loosely grouped to a point in rcorder(8) after most everything in the base is already running.Does the script start a persistent service? If so, it must have
KEYWORD: shutdown
.Make sure there is no
KEYWORD: FreeBSD
present. This has not been necessary nor desirable for years. It is also an indication that the new script was copy/pasted from an old script, so extra caution must be given to the review.If the script uses an interpreted language like
perl
,python
, orruby
, make certain thatcommand_interpreter
is set appropriately, for example, for Perl, by addingPERL=${PERL}
toSUB_LIST
and using%%PERL%%
. Otherwise,# service name stop
will probably not work properly. See service(8) for more information.
Have all occurrences of /usr/local been replaced with
%%PREFIX%%
?Do the default variable assignments come after
load_rc_config
?Are there default assignments to empty strings? They should be removed, but double-check that the option is documented in the comments at the top of the file.
Are things that are set in variables actually used in the script?
Are options listed in the default name`_flags` things that are actually mandatory? If so, they must be in
command_args
.-d
is a red flag (pardon the pun) here, since it is usually the option to "daemonize" the process, and therefore is actually mandatory._name__flags
must never be included incommand_args
(and vice versa, although that error is less common).Does the script execute any code unconditionally? This is frowned on. Usually these things must be dealt with through a
start_precmd
.All boolean tests must use the
checkyesno
function. No hand-rolled tests for[Yy][Ee][Ss]
, etc.If there is a loop (for example, waiting for something to start) does it have a counter to terminate the loop? We do not want the boot to be stuck forever if there is an error.
Does the script create files or directories that need specific permissions, for example, a pid that needs to be owned by the user that runs the process? Rather than the traditional touch(1)/chown(8)/chmod(1) routine, consider using install(1) with the proper command line arguments to do the whole procedure with one step.
6.27. Adding Users and Groups
Some ports require a particular user account to be present, usually for daemons that run as that user. For these ports, choose a unique UID from 50 to 999 and register it in ports/UIDs (for users) and ports/GIDs (for groups). The unique identification should be the same for users and groups.
Please include a patch against these two files when requiring a new user or group to be created for the port.
Then use USERS
and GROUPS
in Makefile, and the user will be automatically created when installing the port.
USERS= pulse GROUPS= pulse pulse-access pulse-rt
The current list of reserved UIDs and GIDs can be found in ports/UIDs and ports/GIDs.
6.28. Ports That Rely on Kernel Sources
Some ports (such as kernel loadable modules) need the kernel source files so that the port can compile. Here is the correct way to determine if the user has them installed:
USES= kmod
Apart from this check, the kmod
feature takes care of most items that these ports need to take into account.
6.29. Go Libraries
Ports must not package or install Go libs or source code. Go ports must fetch the required deps at the normal fetch time and should only install the programs and things users need, not the things Go developers would need.
Ports should (in order of preference):
Use vendored dependencies included with the package source.
Fetch the versions of deps specified by upstream (in the case of go.mod, vendor.json or similar).
As a last resort (deps are not included nor versions specified exactly) fetch versions of dependencies available at the time of upstream development/release.
6.30. Haskell Libraries
Just like in case of Go language, Ports must not package or install Haskell libraries. Haskell ports must link statically to their dependencies and fetch all distribution files on fetch stage.
6.31. Shell Completion Files
Many modern shells (including bash, fish, tcsh and zsh) support parameter and/or option tab-completion. This support usually comes from completion files, which contain the definitions for how tab completion will work for a certain command. Ports sometimes ship with their own completion files, or porters may have created them themselves.
When available, completion files should always be installed.
It is not necessary to make an option for it.
If an option is used, though, always enable it in OPTIONS_DEFAULT
.
| ${PREFIX}/etc/bash_completion.d |
| ${PREFIX}/share/fish/vendor_completions.d |
| ${PREFIX}/share/zsh/site-functions |
Do not register any dependencies on the shells themselves.
Chapter 7. Flavors
7.1. An Introduction to Flavors
Flavors are a way to have multiple variations of a port. The port is built multiple times, with variations.
For example, a port can have a normal version with many features and quite a few dependencies, and a light "lite" version with only basic features and minimal dependencies.
Another example could be, a port can have a GTK flavor and a QT flavor, depending on which toolkit it uses.
7.2. Using FLAVORS
To declare a port having multiple flavors, add FLAVORS
to its Makefile.
The first flavor in FLAVORS
is the default flavor.
It can help simplify the logic of the Makefile to also define FLAVOR?= ${FLAVORS:[1]} |
To distinguish flavors from options, which are always uppercase letters, flavor names can only contain lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore |
If a port has a "lite" slave port, the slave port can be removed, and the port can be converted to flavors with:
FLAVORS= default lite lite_PKGNAMESUFFIX= -lite [...] .if ${FLAVOR:U} != lite [enable non lite features] .endif
If a port has a -nox11
slave port, the slave port can be removed, and the port can be converted to flavors with:
FLAVORS= x11 nox11 FLAVOR?= ${FLAVORS:[1]} nox11_PKGNAMESUFFIX= -nox11 [...] .if ${FLAVOR} == x11 [enable x11 features] .endif
Here is a slightly edited excerpt of what is present in devel/libpeas, a port that uses the Python flavors.
With the default Python 2 and 3 versions being 2.7 and 3.6, it will automatically get FLAVORS=py27 py36
USES= gnome python USE_PYTHON= flavors .if ${FLAVOR:Upy27:Mpy2*} USE_GNOME= pygobject3 CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-python2 --disable-python3 BUILD_WRKSRC= ${WRKSRC}/loaders/python INSTALL_WRKSRC= ${WRKSRC}/loaders/python .else # py3* USE_GNOME+= py3gobject3 CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --disable-python2 --enable-python3 \ ac_cv_path_PYTHON3_CONFIG=${LOCALBASE}/bin/python${PYTHON_VER}-config BUILD_WRKSRC= ${WRKSRC}/loaders/python3 INSTALL_WRKSRC= ${WRKSRC}/loaders/python3 .endif py34_PLIST= ${.CURDIR}/pkg-plist-py3 py35_PLIST= ${.CURDIR}/pkg-plist-py3 py36_PLIST= ${.CURDIR}/pkg-plist-py3
This port does not use USE_PYTHON=distutils
but needs Python flavors anyway.
To guard against FLAVOR
being empty, which would cause a make(1) error, use ${FLAVOR:U}
in string comparisons instead of ${FLAVOR}
.
The Gnome Python gobject3 bindings have two different names, one for Python 2, pygobject3 and one for Python 3, py3gobject3.
The configure
script has to run in ${WRKSRC}, but we are only interested in building and installing the Python 2 or Python 3 parts of the software, so set the build and install base directories appropriately.
Hint about the correct Python 3 config script path name.
The packing list is different when the built with Python 3. As there are three possible Python 3 versions, set PLIST
for all three using the helper.
7.2.1. Flavors Helpers
To make the Makefile easier to write, a few flavors helpers exist.
This list of helpers will set their variable:
_flavor__PKGNAMEPREFIX
_flavor__PKGNAMESUFFIX
_flavor__PLIST
_flavor__DESCR
This list of helpers will append to their variable:
_flavor__CONFLICTS
_flavor__CONFLICTS_BUILD
_flavor__CONFLICTS_INSTALL
_flavor__PKG_DEPENDS
_flavor__EXTRACT_DEPENDS
_flavor__PATCH_DEPENDS
_flavor__FETCH_DEPENDS
_flavor__BUILD_DEPENDS
_flavor__LIB_DEPENDS
_flavor__RUN_DEPENDS
_flavor__TEST_DEPENDS
PKGNAME
As all packages must have a different package name, flavors must change theirs, using _flavorPKGNAMEPREFIX
and _flavor
PKGNAMESUFFIX
makes this easy:
FLAVORS= normal lite lite_PKGNAMESUFFIX= -lite
7.3. USES=php
and Flavors
When using php
with one of these arguments, phpize
, ext
, zend
, or pecl
,
the port will automatically have FLAVORS
filled in with the PHP versions it supports.
USES=php
ExtensionThis will generate package for all the supported versions:
PORTNAME= some-ext PORTVERSION= 0.0.1 PKGNAMEPREFIX= ${PHP_PKGNAMEPREFIX} USES= php:ext
This will generate package for all the supported versions but 7.2:
PORTNAME= some-ext PORTVERSION= 0.0.1 PKGNAMEPREFIX= ${PHP_PKGNAMEPREFIX} USES= php:ext IGNORE_WITH_PHP= 72
7.3.1. PHP Flavors with PHP Applications
PHP applications can also be flavorized.
This allows generating packages for all PHP versions, so that users can use them with whatever version they need on their servers.
PHP applications that are flavorized must append |
Adding Flavors support to a PHP application is straightforward:
PKGNAMESUFFIX= ${PHP_PKGNAMESUFFIX} USES= php:flavors
When adding a dependency on a PHP flavored port, use |
7.4. USES=python
and Flavors
When using python
and USE_PYTHON=distutils
,
the port will automatically have FLAVORS
filled in with the Python versions it supports.
USES=python
Supposing the current Python supported versions are 2.7, 3.4, 3.5, and 3.6, and the default Python 2 and 3 versions are 2.7 and 3.6, a port with:
USES= python USE_PYTHON= distutils
Will get these flavors: py27
, and py36
.
USES= python USE_PYTHON= distutils allflavors
Will get these flavors: py27
, py34
, py35
and py36
.
USES=python
with Version RequirementsSupposing the current Python supported versions are 2.7, 3.4, 3.5, and 3.6, and the default Python 2 and 3 versions are 2.7 and 3.6, a port with:
USES= python:-3.5 USE_PYTHON= distutils
Will get this flavor: py27
.
USES= python:-3.5 USE_PYTHON= distutils allflavors
Will get these flavors: py27
, py34
, and py35
.
USES= python:3.4+ USE_PYTHON= distutils
Will get this flavor: py36
.
USES= python:3.4+ USE_PYTHON= distutils allflavors
Will get these flavors: py34
, py35
, and py36
.
PY_FLAVOR
is available to depend on the correct version of Python modules.
All dependencies on flavored Python ports should use PY_FLAVOR
, and not FLAVOR
directly..
distutils
If the default Python 3 version is 3.6, the following will set PY_FLAVOR
to py36
:
RUN_DEPENDS= ${PYTHON_PKGNAMEPREFIX}mutagen>0:audio/py-mutagen@${PY_FLAVOR} USES= python:3.5+
7.5. USES=lua
and Flavors
When using lua:module
or lua:flavors
,
the port will automatically have FLAVORS
filled in with the Lua versions it supports.
However, it is not expected that ordinary applications (rather than Lua modules) should use this feature;
most applications that embed or otherwise use Lua should simply use USES=lua
.
LUA_FLAVOR
is available (and must be used) to depend on the correct version of dependencies regardless of whether the port used the flavors
or module
parameters.
See Using Lua for further information.
Chapter 8. Advanced pkg-plist Practices
8.1. Changing pkg-plist Based on Make Variables
Some ports, particularly the p5-
ports, need to change their pkg-plist depending on what options they are configured with (or version of perl
, in the case of p5-
ports).
To make this easy, any instances in pkg-plist of %%OSREL%%
, %%PERL_VER%%
, and %%PERL_VERSION%%
will be substituted appropriately.
The value of %%OSREL%%
is the numeric revision of the operating system (for example, 4.9
).
%%PERL_VERSION%%
and %%PERL_VER%%
is the full version number of perl
(for example, 5.8.9
).
Several other %%VARS%%
related to port’s documentation files are described in the relevant section.
To make other substitutions, set PLIST_SUB
with a list of VAR=VALUE
pairs and instances of %%VAR%%
will be substituted with VALUE in pkg-plist.
For instance, if a port installs many files in a version-specific subdirectory, use a placeholder for the version so that pkg-plist does not have to be regenerated every time the port is updated. For example, set:
OCTAVE_VERSION= ${PORTREVISION} PLIST_SUB= OCTAVE_VERSION=${OCTAVE_VERSION}
in the Makefile and use %%OCTAVE_VERSION%%
wherever the version shows up in pkg-plist.
When the port is upgraded, it will not be necessary to edit dozens (or in some cases, hundreds) of lines in pkg-plist.
If files are installed conditionally on the options set in the port, the usual way of handling it is prefixing pkg-plist lines with a %%OPT%%
for lines needed when the option is enabled, or %%NO_OPT%%
when the option is disabled, and adding OPTIONS_SUB=yes
to the Makefile.
See OPTIONS_SUB
for more information.
For instance, if there are files that are only installed when the X11
option is enabled, and Makefile has:
OPTIONS_DEFINE= X11 OPTIONS_SUB= yes
In pkg-plist, put %%X11%%
in front of the lines only being installed when the option is enabled, like this :
%%X11%%bin/foo-gui
This substitution will be done between the pre-install
and do-install
targets, by reading from PLIST and writing to TMPPLIST (default: WRKDIR/.PLIST.mktmp).
So if the port builds PLIST on the fly, do so in or before pre-install
.
Also, if the port needs to edit the resulting file, do so in post-install
to a file named TMPPLIST.
Another way of modifying a port’s packing list is based on setting the variables PLIST_FILES
and PLIST_DIRS
.
The value of each variable is regarded as a list of pathnames to write to TMPPLIST along with PLIST contents.
While names listed in PLIST_FILES
and PLIST_DIRS
are subject to %%VAR%%
substitution as described above, it is better to use the ${VAR}
directly.
Except for that, names from PLIST_FILES
will appear in the final packing list unchanged, while @dir
will be prepended to names from PLIST_DIRS
.
To take effect, PLIST_FILES
and PLIST_DIRS
must be set before TMPPLIST is written, that is, in pre-install
or earlier.
From time to time, using OPTIONS_SUB
is not enough.
In those cases, adding a specific TAG
to PLIST_SUB
inside the Makefile with a special value of @comment
, makes package tools to ignore the line.
For instance, if some files are only installed when the X11
option is on and the architecture is i386
:
.include <bsd.port.pre.mk> .if ${PORT_OPTIONS:MX11} && ${ARCH} == "i386" PLIST_SUB+= X11I386="" .else PLIST_SUB+= X11I386="@comment " .endif
8.2. Empty Directories
8.2.1. Cleaning Up Empty Directories
When being de-installed, a port has to remove empty directories it created.
Most of these directories are removed automatically by pkg(8), but for directories created outside of ${PREFIX}, or empty directories, some more work needs to be done.
This is usually accomplished by adding @dir
lines for those directories.
Subdirectories must be deleted before deleting parent directories.
[...] @dir /var/games/oneko/saved-games @dir /var/games/oneko
8.2.2. Creating Empty Directories
Empty directories created during port installation need special attention. They must be present when the package is created. If they are not created by the port code, create them in the Makefile:
post-install: ${MKDIR} ${STAGEDIR}${PREFIX}/some/directory
Add the directory to pkg-plist like any other. For example:
@dir some/directory
8.3. Configuration Files
If the port installs configuration files to PREFIX/etc (or elsewhere) do not list them in pkg-plist.
That will cause pkg delete
to remove files that have been carefully edited by the user, and a re-installation will wipe them out.
Instead, install sample files with a filename.sample extension.
The @sample
macro automates this, see @sample
file [file] for what it does exactly.
For each sample file, add a line to pkg-plist:
@sample etc/orbit.conf.sample
If there is a very good reason not to install a working configuration file by default, only list the sample filename in pkg-plist,
without the @sample
followed by a space part, and add a message pointing out that the user must copy and edit the file before the software will work.
When a port installs its configuration in a subdirectory of ${PREFIX}/etc, use |
The sample configuration files should always have the .sample suffix. If for some historical reason using the standard suffix is not possible, or if the sample files come from some other directory, use this construct: @sample etc/orbit.conf-dist etc/orbit.conf or @sample %%EXAMPLESDIR%%/orbit.conf etc/orbit.conf The format is |
8.4. Dynamic Versus Static Package List
A static package list is a package list which is available in the Ports Collection either as pkg-plist (with or without variable substitution), or embedded into the Makefile via PLIST_FILES
and PLIST_DIRS
.
Even if the contents are auto-generated by a tool or a target in the Makefile before the inclusion into the Ports Collection by a committer (for example, using make makeplist
), this is still considered a static list, since it is possible to examine it without having to download or compile the distfile.
A dynamic package list is a package list which is generated at the time the port is compiled based upon the files and directories which are installed.
It is not possible to examine it before the source code of the ported application is downloaded and compiled, or after running a make clean
.
While the use of dynamic package lists is not forbidden, maintainers should use static package lists wherever possible, as it enables users to grep(1) through available ports to discover, for example, which port installs a certain file. Dynamic lists should be primarily used for complex ports where the package list changes drastically based upon optional features of the port (and thus maintaining a static package list is infeasible), or ports which change the package list based upon the version of dependent software used. For example, ports which generate docs with Javadoc.
8.5. Automated Package List Creation
First, make sure the port is almost complete, with only pkg-plist missing.
Running make makeplist
will show an example for pkg-plist.
The output of makeplist
must be double checked for correctness as it tries to automatically guess a few things, and can get it wrong.
User configuration files should be installed as filename.sample, as it is described in Configuration Files. info/dir must not be listed and appropriate install-info lines must be added as noted in the info files section. Any libraries installed by the port must be listed as specified in the shared libraries section.
8.5.1. Expanding PLIST_SUB
with Regular Expressions
Strings to be replaced sometimes need to be very specific to avoid undesired replacements. This is a common problem with shorter values.
To address this problem, for each PLACEHOLDER=value
, a PLACEHOLDER_regex=regex
can be set, with the regex
part matching value more precisely.
Perl ports can install architecture dependent files in a specific tree.
On FreeBSD to ease porting, this tree is called mach
.
For example, a port that installs a file whose path contains mach
could have that part of the path string replaced with the wrong values.
Consider this Makefile:
PORTNAME= Machine-Build DISTVERSION= 1 CATEGORIES= devel perl5 MASTER_SITES= CPAN PKGNAMEPREFIX= p5- MAINTAINER= perl@FreeBSD.org COMMENT= Building machine USES= perl5 USE_PERL5= configure PLIST_SUB= PERL_ARCH=mach
The files installed by the port are:
/usr/local/bin/machine-build /usr/local/lib/perl5/site_perl/man/man1/machine-build.1.gz /usr/local/lib/perl5/site_perl/man/man3/Machine::Build.3.gz /usr/local/lib/perl5/site_perl/Machine/Build.pm /usr/local/lib/perl5/site_perl/mach/5.20/Machine/Build/Build.so
Running make makeplist
wrongly generates:
bin/%%PERL_ARCH%%ine-build %%PERL5_MAN1%%/%%PERL_ARCH%%ine-build.1.gz %%PERL5_MAN3%%/Machine::Build.3.gz %%SITE_PERL%%/Machine/Build.pm %%SITE_PERL%%/%%PERL_ARCH%%/%%PERL_VER%%/Machine/Build/Build.so
Change the PLIST_SUB
line from the Makefile to:
PLIST_SUB= PERL_ARCH=mach \ PERL_ARCH_regex=\bmach\b
Now make makeplist
correctly generates:
bin/machine-build %%PERL5_MAN1%%/machine-build.1.gz %%PERL5_MAN3%%/Machine::Build.3.gz %%SITE_PERL%%/Machine/Build.pm %%SITE_PERL%%/%%PERL_ARCH%%/%%PERL_VER%%/Machine/Build/Build.so
8.6. Expanding Package List with Keywords
All keywords can also take optional arguments in parentheses. The arguments are owner, group, and mode. This argument is used on the file or directory referenced. To change the owner, group, and mode of a configuration file, use:
@sample(games,games,640) etc/config.sample
The arguments are optional. If only the group and mode need to be changed, use:
@sample(,games,660) etc/config.sample
If a keyword is used on an optional entry, it must to be added after the helper: %%FOO%%@sample etc/orbit.conf.sample This is because the options plist helpers are used to comment out the line, so they need to be put first.
See |
8.6.1. @desktop-file-utils
Will run update-desktop-database -q
after installation and deinstallation.
Never use directly, add USES=desktop-file-utils
to the Makefile.
8.6.2. @fc
directory
Add a @dir
entry for the directory passed as an argument, and run fc-cache -fs
on that directory after installation and deinstallation.
8.6.3. @fcfontsdir
directory
Add a @dir
entry for the directory passed as an argument, and run fc-cache -fs
, mkfontscale
and mkfontdir
on that directory after installation and deinstallation.
Additionally, on deinstallation, it removes the fonts.scale and fonts.dir cache files if they are empty.
This keyword is equivalent to adding both @fc
directory and @fontsdir
directory.
8.6.4. @fontsdir
directory
Add a @dir
entry for the directory passed as an argument, and run mkfontscale
and mkfontdir
on that directory after installation and deinstallation.
Additionally, on deinstallation, it removes the fonts.scale and fonts.dir cache files if they are empty.
8.6.6. @info
file
Add the file passed as argument to the plist, and updates the info document index on installation and deinstallation.
Additionally, it removes the index if empty on deinstallation.
This should never be used manually, but always through INFO
.
See Info Files for more information.
8.6.7. @kld
directory
Runs kldxref
on the directory on installation and deinstallation.
Additionally, on deinstallation, it will remove the directory if empty.
8.6.8. @rmtry
file
Will remove the file on deinstallation, and not give an error if the file is not there.
8.6.9. @sample
file [file]
This is used to handle installation of configuration files, through example files bundled with the package. The "actual", non-sample, file is either the second filename, if present, or the first filename without the .sample extension.
This does three things. First, add the first file passed as argument, the sample file, to the plist. Then, on installation, if the actual file is not found, copy the sample file to the actual file. And finally, on deinstallation, remove the actual file if it has not been modified. See Configuration Files for more information.
8.6.10. @shared-mime-info
directory
Runs update-mime-database
on the directory on installation and deinstallation.
8.6.11. @shell
file
Add the file passed as argument to the plist.
On installation, add the full path to file to /etc/shells, while making sure it is not added twice. On deinstallation, remove it from /etc/shells.
8.6.12. @terminfo
Do not use by itself.
If the port installs *.terminfo files, add USES=terminfo
to its Makefile.
On installation and deinstallation, if tic
is present, refresh ${PREFIX}/shared/misc/terminfo.db from the *.terminfo files in ${PREFIX}/shared/misc.
8.6.13. Base Keywords
There are a few keywords that are hardcoded, and documented in pkg-create(8). For the sake of completeness, they are also documented here.
8.6.13.1. @
[file]
The empty keyword is a placeholder to use when the file’s owner, group, or mode need to be changed.
For example, to set the group of the file to games
and add the setgid bit, add:
@(,games,2755) sbin/daemon
8.6.13.2. @preexec
command, @postexec
command, @preunexec
command, @postunexec
command
Execute command as part of the package installation or deinstallation process.
@preexec
commandExecute command as part of the pre-install scripts.
@postexec
commandExecute command as part of the post-install scripts.
@preunexec
commandExecute command as part of the pre-deinstall scripts.
@postunexec
commandExecute command as part of the post-deinstall scripts.
If command contains any of these sequences somewhere in it, they are expanded inline.
For these examples, assume that @cwd
is set to /usr/local and the last extracted file was bin/emacs.
%F
Expand to the last filename extracted (as specified). In the example case bin/emacs.
%D
Expand to the current directory prefix, as set with
@cwd
. In the example case /usr/local.%B
Expand to the basename of the fully qualified filename, that is, the current directory prefix plus the last filespec, minus the trailing filename. In the example case, that would be /usr/local/bin.
%f
Expand to the filename part of the fully qualified name, or the converse of
%B
. In the example case, emacs.
These keywords are here to help you set up the package so that it is as ready to use as possible. They must not be abused to start services, stop services, or run any other commands that will modify the currently running system. |
8.6.13.3. @mode
mode
Set default permission for all subsequently extracted files to mode. Format is the same as that used by chmod(1). Use without an arg to set back to default permissions (mode of the file while being packed).
This must be a numeric mode, like |
8.6.13.4. @owner
user
Set default ownership for all subsequent files to user.
Use without an argument to set back to default ownership (root
).
8.6.13.5. @group
group
Set default group ownership for all subsequent files to group.
Use without an arg to set back to default group ownership (wheel
).
8.6.13.7. @dir
directory
Declare directory name. By default, directories created under PREFIX
by a package installation are automatically removed.
Use this when an empty directory under PREFIX
needs to be created, or when the directory needs to have non default owner, group, or mode.
Directories outside of PREFIX
need to be registered.
For example, /var/db/${PORTNAME} needs to have a @dir
entry whereas ${PREFIX}/shared/${PORTNAME} does not if it contains files or uses the default owner, group, and mode.
8.6.13.8. @exec
command, @unexec
command (Deprecated)
Execute command as part of the installation or deinstallation process.
Please use @preexec
command, @postexec
command, @preunexec
command, @postunexec
command instead.
8.6.14. Creating New Keywords
Package list files can be extended by keywords that are defined in the ${PORTSDIR}/Keywords directory. The settings for each keyword are stored in a UCL file named keyword.ucl. The file must contain at least one of these sections:
attributes
action
pre-install
post-install
pre-deinstall
post-deinstall
pre-upgrade
post-upgrade
8.6.14.1. attributes
Changes the owner, group, or mode used by the keyword.
Contains an associative array where the possible keys are owner
, group
, and mode
.
The values are, respectively, a user name, a group name, and a file mode.
For example:
attributes: { owner: "games", group: "games", mode: 0555 }
8.6.14.2. action
Defines what happens to the keyword’s parameter. Contains an array where the possible values are:
setprefix
Set the prefix for the next plist entries.
dir
Register a directory to be created on install and removed on deinstall.
dirrm
Register a directory to be deleted on deinstall. Deprecated.
dirrmtry
Register a directory to try and deleted on deinstall. Deprecated.
file
Register a file.
setmode
Set the mode for the next plist entries.
setowner
Set the owner for the next plist entries.
setgroup
Set the group for the next plist entries.
comment
Does not do anything, equivalent to not entering an
action
section.ignore_next
Ignore the next entry in the plist.
8.6.14.3. arguments
If set to true
, adds argument handling, splitting the whole line, %@
, into numbered arguments, %1
, %2
, and so on.
For example, for this line:
@foo some.content other.content
%1
and %2
will contain:
some.content other.content
It also affects how the action
entry works.
When there is more than one argument, the argument number must be specified.
For example:
actions: [file(1)]
8.6.14.4. pre-install
, post-install
, pre-deinstall
, post-deinstall
, pre-upgrade
, post-upgrade
These keywords contains a sh(1) script to be executed before or after installation, deinstallation, or upgrade of the package.
In addition to the usual @exec %foo
placeholders described in @preexec
command, @postexec
command, @preunexec
command, @postunexec
command, there is a new one, %@
, which represents the argument of the keyword.
8.6.14.5. Custom Keyword Examples
@dirrmtryecho
KeywordThis keyword does two things, it adds a @dirrmtry directory
line to the packing list, and echoes the fact that the directory is removed when deinstalling the package.
actions: [dirrmtry] post-deinstall: <<EOD echo "Directory %D/%@ removed." EOD
@sample
is ImplementedThis keyword does three things.
It adds the first filename passed as an argument to @sample
to the packing list, it adds to the post-install
script instructions to copy the sample to the actual configuration file if it does not already exist, and it adds to the post-deinstall
instructions to remove the configuration file if it has not been modified.
actions: [file(1)] arguments: true post-install: <<EOD case "%1" in /*) sample_file="%1" ;; *) sample_file="%D/%1" ;; esac target_file="${sample_file%.sample}" set -- %@ if [ $# -eq 2 ]; then target_file=${2} fi case "${target_file}" in /*) target_file="${target_file}" ;; *) target_file="%D/${target_file}" ;; esac if ! [ -f "${target_file}" ]; then /bin/cp -p "${sample_file}" "${target_file}" && \ /bin/chmod u+w "${target_file}" fi EOD pre-deinstall: <<EOD case "%1" in /*) sample_file="%1" ;; *) sample_file="%D/%1" ;; esac target_file="${sample_file%.sample}" set -- %@ if [ $# -eq 2 ]; then set -- %@ target_file=${2} fi case "${target_file}" in /*) target_file="${target_file}" ;; *) target_file="%D/${target_file}" ;; esac if cmp -s "${target_file}" "${sample_file}"; then rm -f "${target_file}" else echo "You may need to manually remove ${target_file} if it is no longer needed." fi EOD
Chapter 9. pkg-*
There are some tricks we have not mentioned yet about the pkg-* files that come in handy sometimes.
9.1. pkg-message
To display a message when the package is installed, place the message in pkg-message.
This capability is often useful to display additional installation steps to be taken after a pkg install
or pkg upgrade
.
|
pkg-message supports two formats:
- raw
A regular plain text file. Its message is only displayed on install.
- UCL
If the file starts with “[” then it is considered to be a UCL file. The UCL format is described on libucl’s GitHub page.
Do not add an entry for pkg-message in pkg-plist. |
9.1.1. UCL in pkg-message
The format is the following. It should be an array of objects. The objects themselves can have these keywords:
message
The actual message to be displayed. This keyword is mandatory.
type
When the message should be displayed.
maximum_version
Only if
type
isupgrade
. Display if upgrading from a version strictly lower than the version specified.minimum_version
Only if
type
isupgrade
. Display if upgrading from a version stictly greater than the version specified.
The maximum_version
and minimum_version
keywords can be combined.
The type
keyword can have three values:
install
The message should only be displayed when the package is installed.
remove
The message should only be displayed when the package is removed.
upgrade
the message should only be displayed during an upgrade of the package..
To preserve the compatibility with non UCL pkg-message files, the first line of a UCL pkg-message MUST be a single “[”, and the last line MUST be a single “]”. |
The message is delimited by double quotes "
, this is used for simple single line strings:
[ { type: install message: "Simple message" } ]
Multiline strings use the standard here document notation.
The multiline delimiter must start just after <<
symbols without any whitespace and it must consist of capital letters only.
To finish a multiline string, add the delimiter string on a line of its own without any whitespace.
The message from UCL Short Strings can be written as:
[ { type: install message: <<EOM Simple message EOM } ]
When a message only needs to be displayed on installation or uninstallation, set the type:
[ { type: remove message: "package being removed." } { type: install, message: "package being installed."} ]
When a port is upgraded, the message displayed can be even more tailored to the port’s needs.
[ { type: upgrade message: "Package is being upgraded." } { type: upgrade maximum_version: "1.0" message: "Upgrading from before 1.0 need to do this." } { type: upgrade minimum_version: "1.0" message: "Upgrading from after 1.0 should do that." } { type: upgrade maximum_version: "3.0" minimum_version: "1.0" message: "Upgrading from > 1.0 and < 3.0 remove that file." } ]
9.2. pkg-install
If the port needs to execute commands when the binary package is installed with pkg add
or pkg install
, use pkg-install.
This script will automatically be added to the package.
It will be run twice by pkg
, the first time as ${SH} pkg-install ${PKGNAME} PRE-INSTALL
before the package is installed, and the second time as ${SH} pkg-install ${PKGNAME} POST-INSTALL
after it has been installed.
$2
can be tested to determine which mode the script is being run in.
The PKG_PREFIX
environmental variable will be set to the package installation directory.
This script is here to help you set up the package so that it is as ready to use as possible. It must not be abused to start services, stop services, or run any other commands that will modify the currently running system. |
9.3. pkg-deinstall
This script executes when a package is removed.
This script will be run twice by pkg delete
.
The first time as ${SH} pkg-deinstall ${PKGNAME} DEINSTALL
before the port is de-installed and the second time as ${SH} pkg-deinstall ${PKGNAME} POST-DEINSTALL
after the port has been de-installed.
$2
can be tested to determine which mode the script is being run in.
The PKG_PREFIX
environmental variable will be set to the package installation directory
This script is here to help you set up the package so that it is as ready to use as possible. It must not be abused to start services, stop services, or run any other commands that will modify the currently running system. |
9.4. Changing the Names of pkg-*
All the names of pkg-* are defined using variables that can be changed in the Makefile if needed.
This is especially useful when sharing the same pkg-* files among several ports or when it is necessary to write to one of these files.
See writing to places other than WRKDIR
for why it is a bad idea to write directly into the directory containing the pkg-* files.
Here is a list of variable names and their default values.
(PKGDIR
defaults to ${MASTERDIR}
.)
Variable | Default value |
---|---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
9.5. Making Use of SUB_FILES
and SUB_LIST
SUB_FILES
and SUB_LIST
are useful for dynamic values in port files, such as the installation PREFIX
in pkg-message.
SUB_FILES
specifies a list of files to be automatically modified.
Each file in the SUB_FILES
list must have a corresponding file.in present in FILESDIR
.
A modified version will be created as ${WRKDIR}/file.
Files defined as a value of USE_RC_SUBR
are automatically added to SUB_FILES
.
For the files pkg-message, pkg-install, and pkg-deinstall, the corresponding Makefile variable is automatically set to point to the processed version.
SUB_LIST
is a list of VAR=VALUE
pairs.
For each pair, %%VAR%%
will be replaced with VALUE
in each file listed in SUB_FILES
.
Several common pairs are automatically defined: PREFIX
, LOCALBASE
, DATADIR
, DOCSDIR
, EXAMPLESDIR
, WWWDIR
, and ETCDIR
.
Any line beginning with @comment
followed by a space, will be deleted from resulting files after a variable substitution.
This example replaces %%ARCH%%
with the system architecture in a pkg-message:
SUB_FILES= pkg-message SUB_LIST= ARCH=${ARCH}
Note that for this example, pkg-message.in must exist in FILESDIR
.
Example of a good pkg-message.in:
Now it is time to configure this package. Copy %%PREFIX%%/shared/examples/putsy/%%ARCH%%.conf into your home directory as .putsy.conf and edit it.
Chapter 10. Testing the Port
10.1. Running make describe
Several of the FreeBSD port maintenance tools, such as portupgrade(1), rely on a database called /usr/ports/INDEX which keeps track of such items as port dependencies.
INDEX is created by the top-level ports/Makefile via make index
, which descends into each port subdirectory and executes make describe
there.
Thus, if make describe
fails in any port, no one can generate INDEX, and many people will quickly become unhappy.
It is important to be able to generate this file no matter what options are present in make.conf, so please avoid doing things such as using |
If make describe
produces a string rather than an error message, everything is probably safe.
See bsd.port.mk for the meaning of the string produced.
Also note that running a recent version of portlint
(as specified in the next section) will cause make describe
to be run automatically.
10.2. Portclippy / Portfmt
Those tools come from ports-mgmt/portfmt.
Portclippy is a linter that checks if variables in the Makefile are in the correct order according to Order of Variables in Port Makefiles.
Portfmt is a tool for automatically formatting Makefile.
10.3. Portlint
Do check the port with portlint
before submitting or committing it.
portlint
warns about many common errors, both functional and stylistic.
For a new (or repocopied) port, portlint -A
is the most thorough; for an existing port, portlint -C
is sufficient.
Since portlint
uses heuristics to try to figure out errors, it can produce false positive warnings.
In addition, occasionally something that is flagged as a problem really cannot be done in any other way due to limitations in the ports framework.
When in doubt, the best thing to do is ask on FreeBSD ports 郵遞論壇.
10.4. Port Tools
The ports-mgmt/porttools program is part of the Ports Collection.
port
is the front-end script, which can help simplify the testing job.
Whenever a new port or an update to an existing one needs testing, use port test
to test the port, including the portlint
checking.
This command also detects and lists any files that are not listed in pkg-plist. For example:
# port test /usr/ports/net/csup
10.5. PREFIX
and DESTDIR
PREFIX
determines where the port will be installed.
It defaults to /usr/local, but can be set by the user to a custom path like /opt.
The port must respect the value of this variable.
DESTDIR
, if set by the user, determines the complete alternative environment, usually a jail or an installed system mounted somewhere other than /.
A port will actually install into DESTDIR/PREFIX, and register with the package database in DESTDIR/var/db/pkg.
DESTDIR
is handled automatically by the ports infrastructure with chroot(8).
There is no need for modifications or any extra care to write DESTDIR
-compliant ports.
The value of PREFIX
will be set to LOCALBASE
(defaulting to /usr/local).
If USE_LINUX_PREFIX
is set, PREFIX
will be LINUXBASE
(defaulting to /compat/linux).
Avoiding hard-coded /usr/local paths in the source makes the port much more flexible and able to cater to the needs of other sites.
Often, this can be accomplished by replacing occurrences of /usr/local in the port’s various Makefiles with ${PREFIX}
.
This variable is automatically passed down to every stage of the build and install processes.
Make sure the application is not installing things in /usr/local instead of PREFIX
.
A quick test for such hard-coded paths is:
% make clean; make package PREFIX=/var/tmp/`make -V PORTNAME`
If anything is installed outside of PREFIX
, the package creation process will complain that it cannot find the files.
In addition, it is worth checking the same with the stage directory support (see Staging):
% make stage && make check-plist && make stage-qa && make package
check-plist
checks for files missing from the plist, and files in the plist that are not installed by the port.stage-qa
checks for common problems like bad shebang, symlinks pointing outside the stage directory, setuid files, and non-stripped libraries…
These tests will not find hard-coded paths inside the port’s files, nor will it verify that LOCALBASE
is being used to correctly refer to files from other ports.
The temporarily-installed port in /var/tmp/make -V PORTNAME
must be tested for proper operation to make sure there are no problems with paths.
PREFIX
must not be set explicitly in a port’s Makefile.
Users installing the port may have set PREFIX
to a custom location, and the port must respect that setting.
Refer to programs and files from other ports with the variables mentioned above, not explicit pathnames.
For instance, if the port requires a macro PAGER
to have the full pathname of less
, do not use a literal path of /usr/local/bin/less.
Instead, use ${LOCALBASE}
:
-DPAGER=\"${LOCALBASE}/bin/less\"
The path with LOCALBASE
is more likely to still work if the system administrator has moved the whole /usr/local tree somewhere else.
All these tests are done automatically when running |
10.6. Poudriere
For a ports contributor, Poudriere is one of the most important and helpful testing and build tools. Its main features include:
Bulk building of the entire ports tree, specific subsets of the ports tree, or a single port including its dependencies
Automatic packaging of build results
Generation of build log files per port
Providing a signed pkg(8) repository
Testing of port builds before submitting a patch to the FreeBSD bug tracker or committing to the ports tree
Testing for successful ports builds using different options
Because Poudriere performs its building in a clean jail(8) environment and uses zfs(8) features, it has several advantages over traditional testing on the host system:
No pollution of the host environment: No leftover files, no accidental removals, no changes of existing configuration files.
Verify pkg-plist for missing or superfluous entries
Ports committers sometimes ask for a Poudriere log alongside a patch submission to assess whether the patch is ready for integration into the ports tree
It is also quite straightforward to set up and use, has no dependencies, and will run on any supported FreeBSD release. This section shows how to install, configure, and run Poudriere as part of the normal workflow of a ports contributor.
The examples in this section show a default file layout, as standard in FreeBSD.
Substitute any local changes accordingly.
The ports tree, represented by ${PORTSDIR}
, is located in /usr/ports.
Both ${LOCALBASE}
and ${PREFIX}
are /usr/local by default.
10.6.1. Installing Poudriere
Poudriere is available in the ports tree in ports-mgmt/poudriere. It can be installed using pkg(8) or from ports:
# pkg install poudriere
or
# make -C /usr/ports/ports-mgmt/poudriere install clean
There is also a work-in-progress version of Poudriere which will eventually become the next release. It is available in ports-mgmt/poudriere-devel. This development version is used for the official FreeBSD package builds, so it is well tested. It often has newer interesting features. A ports committer will want to use the development version because it is what is used in production, and has all the new features that will make sure everything is exactly right. A contributor will not necessarily need those as the most important fixes are backported to released version. The main reason for the use of the development version to build the official package is because it is faster, in a way that will shorten a full build from 18 hours to 17 hours when using a high end 32 CPU server with 128GB of RAM. Those optimizations will not matter a lot when building ports on a desktop machine.
10.6.2. Setting Up Poudriere
The port installs a default configuration file, /usr/local/etc/poudriere.conf. Each parameter is documented in the configuration file and in poudriere(8). Here is a minimal example config file:
ZPOOL=tank ZROOTFS=/poudriere BASEFS=/poudriere DISTFILES_CACHE=/usr/ports/distfiles RESOLV_CONF=/etc/resolv.conf FREEBSD_HOST=ftp://ftp.freebsd.org SVN_HOST=svn.FreeBSD.org
ZPOOL
The name of the ZFS storage pool which Poudriere shall use. Must be listed in the output of
zpool status
.ZROOTFS
The root of Poudriere-managed file systems. This entry will cause Poudriere to create zfs(8) file systems under
tank/poudriere
.BASEFS
The root mount point for Poudriere file systems. This entry will cause Poudriere to mount
tank/poudriere
to/poudriere
.DISTFILES_CACHE
Defines where distfiles are stored. In this example, Poudriere and the host share the distfiles storage directory. This avoids downloading tarballs which are already present on the system. Please create this directory if it does not already exist so that Poudriere can find it.
RESOLV_CONF
Use the host /etc/resolv.conf inside jails for DNS. This is needed so jails can resolve the URLs of distfiles when downloading. It is not needed when using a proxy. Refer to the default configuration file for proxy configuration.
FREEBSD_HOST
The FTP/HTTP server to use when the jails are installed from FreeBSD releases and updated with freebsd-update(8). Choose a server location which is close, for example if the machine is located in Australia, use
ftp.au.freebsd.org
.SVN_HOST
The server from where jails are installed and updated when using Subversion. Also used for ports tree when not using portsnap(8). Again, choose a nearby location. A list of official Subversion mirrors can be found in the FreeBSD Handbook Subversion section.
10.6.3. Creating Poudriere Jails
Create the base jails which Poudriere will use for building:
# poudriere jail -c -j 114Ramd64 -v 11.4-RELEASE -a amd64
Fetch a 11.4-RELEASE
for amd64
from the FTP server given by FREEBSD_HOST
in poudriere.conf,
create the zfs file system tank/poudriere/jails/114Ramd64
,
mount it on /poudriere/jails/114Ramd64 and extract the 11.4-RELEASE
tarballs into this file system.
# poudriere jail -c -j 11i386 -v stable/11 -a i386 -m git+https
Create tank/poudriere/jails/11i386
, mount it on /poudriere/jails/11i386,
then check out the tip of the Subversion branch of FreeBSD-11-STABLE
from SVN_HOST
in poudriere.conf into /poudriere/jails/11i386/usr/src,
then complete a buildworld
and install it into /poudriere/jails/11i386.
If a specific Subversion revision is needed, append it to the version string. For example:
|
While it is possible to build a newer version of FreeBSD on an older version, most of the time it will not run.
For example, if a |
To create a Poudriere jail for
In order to run a |
The default |
A list of jails currently known to Poudriere can be shown with poudriere jail -l
:
# poudriere jail -l
JAILNAME VERSION ARCH METHOD
114Ramd64 11.4-RELEASE amd64 ftp
11i386 11.4-STABLE i386 svn+https
10.6.4. Keeping Poudriere Jails Updated
Managing updates is very straightforward. The command:
# poudriere jail -u -j JAILNAME
updates the specified jail to the latest version available. For FreeBSD releases, update to the latest patchlevel with freebsd-update(8). For FreeBSD versions built from source, update to the latest Subversion revision in the branch.
For jails employing a
|
10.6.5. Setting Up Ports Trees for Use with Poudriere
There are multiple ways to use ports trees in Poudriere. The most straightforward way is to have Poudriere create a default ports tree for itself, using either portsnap(8) (if running FreeBSD 12.1 or 11.4) or Git (if running FreeBSD-CURRENT):
# poudriere ports -c -m portsnap
or
# poudriere ports -c -m git+https -B main
These commands create tank/poudriere/ports/default
, mount it on /poudriere/ports/default, and populate it using Git, portsnap(8), or Subversion.
Afterward it is included in the list of known ports trees:
# poudriere ports -l
PORTSTREE METHOD TIMESTAMP PATH
default git+https 2020-07-20 04:23:56 /poudriere/ports/default
Note that the "default" ports tree is special.
Each of the build commands explained later will implicitly use this ports tree unless specifically specified otherwise.
To use another tree, add |
While useful for regular bulk builds, having this default ports tree with the portsnap(8) method may not be the best way to deal with local modifications for a ports contributor. As with the creation of jails, it is possible to use a different method for creating the ports tree. To add an additional ports tree for testing local modifications and ports development, checking out the tree via Subversion (as described above) is preferable.
The http and https methods need devel/subversion built with the |
The |
10.6.6. Using Manually Managed Ports Trees with Poudriere
Depending on the workflow, it can be extremely helpful to use ports trees which are maintained manually. For instance, if there is a local copy of the ports tree in /work/ports, point Poudriere to the location:
For Poudriere older than version 3.1.20:
# poudriere ports -c -F -f none -M /work/ports -p development
For Poudriere version 3.1.20 and later:
# poudriere ports -c -m null -M /work/ports -p development
This will be listed in the table of known trees:
# poudriere ports -l
PORTSTREE METHOD TIMESTAMP PATH
development null 2020-07-20 05:06:33 /work/ports
The dash or |
10.6.7. Keeping Poudriere Ports Trees Updated
As straightforward as with jails described earlier:
# poudriere ports -u -p PORTSTREE
Will update the given PORTSTREE, one tree given by the output of poudriere -l
, to the latest revision available on the official servers.
Ports trees without a method, see Using Manually Managed Ports Trees with Poudriere, cannot be updated like this. They must be updated manually by the porter. |
10.6.8. Testing Ports
After jails and ports trees have been set up, the result of a contributor’s modifications to the ports tree can be tested.
For example, local modifications to the www/firefox port located in /work/ports/www/firefox can be tested in the previously created 11.4-RELEASE jail:
# poudriere testport -j 114Ramd64 -p development -o www/firefox
This will build all dependencies of Firefox. If a dependency has been built previously and is still up-to-date, the pre-built package is installed. If a dependency has no up-to-date package, one will be built with default options in a jail. Then Firefox itself is built.
The complete build of every port is logged to /poudriere/data/logs/bulk/114Ri386-development/build-time/logs.
The directory name 114Ri386-development
is derived from the arguments to -j
and -p
, respectively.
For convenience, a symbolic link /poudriere/data/logs/bulk/114Ri386-development/latest is also maintained.
The link points to the latest build-time directory.
Also in this directory is an index.html for observing the build process with a web browser.
By default, Poudriere cleans up the jails and leaves log files in the directories mentioned above.
To ease investigation, jails can be kept running after the build by adding -i
to testport
:
# poudriere testport -j 114Ramd64 -p development -i -o www/firefox
After the build completes, and regardless of whether it was successful, a shell is provided within the jail.
The shell is used to investigate further.
Poudriere can be told to leave the jail running after the build finishes with -I
.
Poudriere will show the command to run when the jail is no longer needed.
It is then possible to jexec(8) into it:
# poudriere testport -j 114Ramd64 -p development -I -o www/firefox
[...]
====>> Installing local Pkg repository to /usr/local/etc/pkg/repos
====>> Leaving jail 114Ramd64-development-n running, mounted at /poudriere/data/.m/114Ramd64-development/ref for interactive run testing
====>> To enter jail: jexec 114Ramd64-development-n env -i TERM=$TERM /usr/bin/login -fp root
====>> To stop jail: poudriere jail -k -j 114Ramd64 -p development
# jexec 114Ramd64-development-n env -i TERM=$TERM /usr/bin/login -fp root
# [do some stuff in the jail]
# exit
# poudriere jail -k -j 114Ramd64 -p development
====>> Umounting file systems
An integral part of the FreeBSD ports build infrastructure is the ability to tweak ports to personal preferences with options.
These can be tested with Poudriere as well. Adding the -c
:
# poudriere testport -c -o www/firefox
Presents the port configuration dialog before the port is built.
The ports given after -o
in the format category/portname
will use the specified options, all dependencies will use the default options.
Testing dependent ports with non-default options can be accomplished using sets, see Using Sets.
When testing ports where pkg-plist is altered during build depending on the selected options, it is recommended to perform a test run with all options selected and one with all options deselected. |
10.6.9. Using Sets
For all actions involving builds, a so-called set can be specified using -z setname
.
A set refers to a fully independent build.
This allows, for instance, usage of testport
with non-standard options for the dependent ports.
To use sets, Poudriere expects an existing directory structure similar to PORT_DBDIR
, defaults to /var/db/ports in its configuration directory.
This directory is then nullfs(5)-mounted into the jails where the ports and their dependencies are built.
Usually a suitable starting point can be obtained by recursively copying the existing PORT_DBDIR
to /usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/jailname-portname-setname-options.
This is described in detail in poudriere(8).
For instance, testing www/firefox in a specific set named devset
, add the -z devset
parameter to the testport command:
# poudriere testport -j 114Ramd64 -p development -z devset -o www/firefox
This will look for the existence of these directories in this order:
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/114Ramd64-development-devset-options
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/114Ramd64-devset-options
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/114Ramd64-development-options
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/devset-options
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/development-options
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/114Ramd64-options
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/options
From this list, Poudriere nullfs(5)-mounts the first existing directory tree into the /var/db/ports directory of the build jails.
Hence, all custom options are used for all the ports during this run of testport
.
After the directory structure for a set is provided, the options for a particular port can be altered. For example:
# poudriere options -c www/firefox -z devset
The configuration dialog for www/firefox is shown, and options can be edited.
The selected options are saved to the devset
set.
Poudriere is very flexible in the option configuration. They can be set for particular jails, ports trees, and for multiple ports by one command. Refer to poudriere(8) for details. |
10.6.10. Providing a Custom make.conf File
Similar to using sets, Poudriere will also use a custom make.conf if it is provided. No special command line argument is necessary. Instead, Poudriere looks for existing files matching a name scheme derived from the command line. For instance:
# poudriere testport -j 114Ramd64 -p development -z devset -o www/firefox
causes Poudriere to check for the existence of these files in this order:
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/make.conf
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/devset-make.conf
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/development-make.conf
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/114Ramd64-make.conf
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/114Ramd64-development-make.conf
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/114Ramd64-devset-make.conf
/usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/114Ramd64-development-devset-make.conf
Unlike with sets, all of the found files will be appended, in that order, into one make.conf inside the build jails. It is hence possible to have general make variables, intended to affect all builds in /usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/make.conf. Special variables, intended to affect only certain jails or sets can be set in specialised make.conf files, such as /usr/local/etc/poudriere.d/114Ramd64-development-devset-make.conf.
To build a set with a non default Perl version, for example, 5.20
, using a set named perl5-20
, create a perl5-20-make.conf with this line:
DEFAULT_VERSIONS+= perl=5.20
10.6.11. Pruning no Longer Needed Distfiles
Poudriere comes with a built-in mechanism to remove outdated distfiles that are no longer used by any port of a given tree. The command
# poudriere distclean -p portstree
will scan the distfiles folder, DISTFILES_CACHE
in poudriere.conf,
versus the ports tree given by the -p portstree
argument and prompt for removal of those distfiles.
To skip the prompt and remove all unused files unconditionally, the -y
argument can be added:
# poudriere distclean -p portstree -y
Chapter 11. Upgrading a Port
When a port is not the most recent version available from the authors, update the local working copy of /usr/ports. The port might have already been updated to the new version.
When working with more than a few ports, it will probably be easier to use Git to keep the whole ports collection up-to-date, as described in the Handbook. This will have the added benefit of tracking all the port’s dependencies.
The next step is to see if there is an update already pending.
To do this, there are two options.
There is a searchable interface to the FreeBSD Problem Report (PR) or bug database.
Select Ports & Packages
in the Product
multiple select menu, and enter the name of the port in the Summary
field.
However, sometimes people forget to put the name of the port into the Summary field in an unambiguous fashion.
In that case, try searching in the Comment
field in the Detailled Bug Information
section, or try the FreeBSD Ports Monitoring System (also known as portsmon
).
This system attempts to classify port PRs by portname.
To search for PRs about a particular port, use the Overview of One Port.
The FreeBSD Ports Monitoring System (portsmon) is currently not working due to latest Python updates. |
If there is no pending PR, the next step is to send an email to the port’s maintainer, as shown by make maintainer
.
That person may already be working on an upgrade, or have a reason to not upgrade the port right now (because of, for example, stability problems of the new version), and there is no need to duplicate their work.
Note that unmaintained ports are listed with a maintainer of ports@FreeBSD.org
, which is just the general ports mailing list, so sending mail there probably will not help in this case.
If the maintainer asks you to do the upgrade or there is no maintainer, then help out FreeBSD by preparing the update! Please do this by using the diff(1) command in the base system.
To create a suitable diff
for a single patch, copy the file that needs patching to something.orig, save the changes to something and then create the patch:
% diff -u something.orig something > something.diff
Otherwise, either use the git diff
method (Using Git to Make Patches) or copy the contents of the port to an entire different directory and use the result of the recursive diff(1) output of the new and old ports directories (for example, if the modified port directory is called superedit and the original is in our tree as superedit.bak, then save the result of diff -ruN superedit.bak superedit
).
Either unified or context diff is fine, but port committers generally prefer unified diffs.
Note the use of the -N
option-this is the accepted way to force diff to properly deal with the case of new files being added or old files being deleted.
Before sending us the diff, please examine the output to make sure all the changes make sense.
(In particular, make sure to first clean out the work directories with make clean
).
If some files have been added, copied, moved, or removed, add this information to the problem report so that the committer picking up the patch will know what git(1) commands to run. |
To simplify common operations with patch files, use make makepatch
as described in Patching.
Other tools exists, like /usr/ports/Tools/scripts/patchtool.py.
Before using it, please read /usr/ports/Tools/scripts/README.patchtool.
If the port is unmaintained, and you are actively using it, please consider volunteering to become its maintainer. FreeBSD has over 4000 ports without maintainers, and this is an area where more volunteers are always needed. (For a detailed description of the responsibilities of maintainers, refer to the section in the Developer’s Handbook.)
To submit the diff, use the bug submit form (product Ports & Packages
, component Individual Port(s)
).
Always include the category with the port name, followed by colon, and brief descripton of the issue.
Examples: category/portname: add FOO option
; category/portname: Update to X.Y
.
Please mention any added or deleted files in the message, as they have to be explicitly specified to git(1) when doing a commit.
Do not compress or encode the diff.
Before submitting the bug, review the Writing the problem report section in the Problem Reports article. It contains far more information about how to write useful problem reports.
If the upgrade is motivated by security concerns or a serious fault in the currently committed port,
please notify the Ports Management Team <portmgr@FreeBSD.org> to request immediate rebuilding and redistribution of the port’s package.
Unsuspecting users of |
Please use diff(1) or |
Now that all of that is done, read about how to keep up-to-date in Keeping Up.
11.1. Using Git to Make Patches
When possible, please submit a git(1) patch or diff. They are easier to handle than diffs between "new and old" directories. It is easier to see what has changed, and to update the diff if something was modified in the Ports Collection since the work on it began, or if the committer asks for something to be fixed. Also, a patch generated with git-format-patch(1) or git-diff(1) can be easily applied with git-am(1) or git-apply(1) and will save some time for the committer. Finally, the git patch generated by git-format-patch(1) includes your author information and commit messages. These will be recorded in the log of the repository and this is the recommended way to submit your changes.
% git clone https://git.FreeBSD.org/ports.git ~/my_wrkdir (1) (2)
% cd ~/my_wrkdir
1 | This can be anywhere, of course. Building ports is not limited to within /usr/ports/. |
2 | git.FreeBSD.org is the FreeBSD public Git server. See FreeBSD Git Repository URL Table for more information. |
While in the port directory, make any changes that are needed.
If adding, moving, or removing a file, use git
to track these changes:
% git add new_file
% git mv old_name new_name
% git rm deleted_file
Make sure to check the port using the checklist in Testing the Port and Checking the Port with portlint
.
Before making the patch, fetch the latest repository and rebase the changes on top of it. Watch and follow the output carefully. If any of the files failed to rebase, it means that the upstream files changed while you were editing the same file, and the conflicts need to be resolved manually.
% git fetch origin main
% git rebase origin/main
Check the changes staged for the patch:
% git status
% git diff --staged
The last step is to make an unified diff or patch of the changes:
To generate an unified diff with git-diff(1):
% git diff --staged > ../`make -VPKGNAME`.diff
This will generate a diff named like foo-1.2.3.diff
.
Where foo
is replaced with the first line of the commit message, i.e., the subject of the commit message.
To generate a patch with git-format-patch(1):
% git checkout -b my_branch
% git commit
% git format-patch main
This will generate a patch named like 0001-foo.patch
.
After patch has been created, you can switch to the main branch for starting other developments.
% git checkout main
Once the patch is accepted and merged, you can delete the local development branch if you want:
% git branch -D my_branch
If files have been added, moved, or removed, include the git(1) |
Send the patch following the problem report submission guidelines.
11.2. UPDATING and MOVED
11.2.1. /usr/ports/UPDATING
If upgrading the port requires special steps like changing configuration files or running a specific program, it must be documented in this file. The format of an entry in this file is:
YYYYMMDD: AFFECTS: users of portcategory/portname AUTHOR: Your name <Your email address> Special instructions
When including exact portmaster, portupgrade, and/or pkg instructions, please make sure to get the shell escaping right. For example, do not use:
As shown, the command will only work with bourne shells. Instead, use the form shown below, which will work with both bourne shell and c-shell:
|
It is recommended that the AFFECTS line contains a glob matching all the ports affected by the entry so that automated tools can parse it as easily as possible.
If an update concerns all the existing BIND 9 versions the |
11.2.2. /usr/ports/MOVED
This file is used to list moved or removed ports.
Each line in the file is made up of the name of the port, where the port was moved, when, and why.
If the port was removed, the section detailing where it was moved can be left blank.
Each section must be separated by the |
(pipe) character, like so:
old name|new name (blank for deleted)|date of move|reason
The date must be entered in the form YYYY-MM-DD
.
New entries are added to the end of the list to keep it in chronological order, with the oldest entry at the top of the list.
If a port was removed but has since been restored, delete the line in this file that states that it was removed.
If a port was renamed and then renamed back to its original name, add a new one with the intermediate name to the old name, and remove the old entry as to not create a loop.
Any changes must be validated with If using a ports directory other than /usr/ports, use:
|
Chapter 12. Security
12.1. Why Security is So Important
Bugs are occasionally introduced to the software. Arguably, the most dangerous of them are those opening security vulnerabilities. From the technical viewpoint, such vulnerabilities are to be closed by exterminating the bugs that caused them. However, the policies for handling mere bugs and security vulnerabilities are very different.
A typical small bug affects only those users who have enabled some combination of options triggering the bug. The developer will eventually release a patch followed by a new version of the software, free of the bug, but the majority of users will not take the trouble of upgrading immediately because the bug has never vexed them. A critical bug that may cause data loss represents a graver issue. Nevertheless, prudent users know that a lot of possible accidents, besides software bugs, are likely to lead to data loss, and so they make backups of important data; in addition, a critical bug will be discovered really soon.
A security vulnerability is all different. First, it may remain unnoticed for years because often it does not cause software malfunction. Second, a malicious party can use it to gain unauthorized access to a vulnerable system, to destroy or alter sensitive data; and in the worst case the user will not even notice the harm caused. Third, exposing a vulnerable system often assists attackers to break into other systems that could not be compromised otherwise. Therefore closing a vulnerability alone is not enough: notify the audience of it in the most clear and comprehensive manner, which will allow them to evaluate the danger and take appropriate action.
12.2. Fixing Security Vulnerabilities
While on the subject of ports and packages, a security vulnerability may initially appear in the original distribution or in the port files.
In the former case, the original software developer is likely to release a patch or a new version instantly.
Update the port promptly with respect to the author’s fix.
If the fix is delayed for some reason, either mark the port as FORBIDDEN
or introduce a patch file to the port.
In the case of a vulnerable port, just fix the port as soon as possible.
In either case, follow the standard procedure for submitting changes unless having rights to commit it directly to the ports tree.
Being a ports committer is not enough to commit to an arbitrary port. Remember that ports usually have maintainers, must be respected. |
Please make sure that the port’s revision is bumped as soon as the vulnerability has been closed.
That is how the users who upgrade installed packages on a regular basis will see they need to run an update.
Besides, a new package will be built and distributed over FTP and WWW mirrors, replacing the vulnerable one.
Bump PORTREVISION
unless DISTVERSION
has changed in the course of correcting the vulnerability.
That is, bump PORTREVISION
if adding a patch file to the port, but do not bump it if updating the port to the latest software version and thus already touched DISTVERSION
.
Please refer to the corresponding section for more information.
12.3. Keeping the Community Informed
12.3.1. The VuXML Database
A very important and urgent step to take as early after a security vulnerability is discovered as possible is to notify the community of port users about the jeopardy. Such notification serves two purposes. First, if the danger is really severe it will be wise to apply an instant workaround. For example, stop the affected network service or even deinstall the port completely until the vulnerability is closed. Second, a lot of users tend to upgrade installed packages only occasionally. They will know from the notification that they must update the package without delay as soon as a corrected version is available.
Given the huge number of ports in the tree, a security advisory cannot be issued on each incident without creating a flood and losing the attention of the audience when it comes to really serious matters. Therefore security vulnerabilities found in ports are recorded in the FreeBSD VuXML database. The Security Officer Team members also monitor it for issues requiring their intervention.
Committers can update the VuXML database themselves, assisting the Security Officer Team and delivering crucial information to the community more quickly. Those who are not committers or have discovered an exceptionally severe vulnerability should not hesitate to contact the Security Officer Team directly, as described on the FreeBSD Security Information page.
The VuXML database is an XML document. Its source file vuln.xml is kept right inside the port security/vuxml. Therefore the file’s full pathname will be PORTSDIR/security/vuxml/vuln.xml. Each time a security vulnerability is discovered in a port, please add an entry for it to that file. Until familiar with VuXML, the best thing to do is to find an existing entry fitting the case at hand, then copy it and use it as a template.
12.3.2. A Short Introduction to VuXML
The full-blown XML format is complex, and far beyond the scope of this book. However, to gain basic insight on the structure of a VuXML entry only the notion of tags is needed. XML tag names are enclosed in angle brackets. Each opening <tag> must have a matching closing </tag>. Tags may be nested. If nesting, the inner tags must be closed before the outer ones. There is a hierarchy of tags, that is, more complex rules of nesting them. This is similar to HTML. The major difference is that XML is eXtensible, that is, based on defining custom tags. Due to its intrinsic structure XML puts otherwise amorphous data into shape. VuXML is particularly tailored to mark up descriptions of security vulnerabilities.
Now consider a realistic VuXML entry:
<vuln vid="f4bc80f4-da62-11d8-90ea-0004ac98a7b9"> (1) <topic>Several vulnerabilities found in Foo</topic> (2) <affects> <package> <name>foo</name> (3) <name>foo-devel</name> <name>ja-foo</name> <range><ge>1.6</ge><lt>1.9</lt></range> (4) <range><ge>2.*</ge><lt>2.4_1</lt></range> <range><eq>3.0b1</eq></range> </package> <package> <name>openfoo</name> (5) <range><lt>1.10_7</lt></range> (6) <range><ge>1.2,1</ge><lt>1.3_1,1</lt></range> </package> </affects> <description> <body xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> <p>J. Random Hacker reports:</p> (7) <blockquote cite="http://j.r.hacker.com/advisories/1"> <p>Several issues in the Foo software may be exploited via carefully crafted QUUX requests. These requests will permit the injection of Bar code, mumble theft, and the readability of the Foo administrator account.</p> </blockquote> </body> </description> <references> (8) <freebsdsa>SA-10:75.foo</freebsdsa> (9) <freebsdpr>ports/987654</freebsdpr> (10) <cvename>CAN-2010-0201</cvename> (11) <cvename>CAN-2010-0466</cvename> <bid>96298</bid> (12) <certsa>CA-2010-99</certsa> (13) <certvu>740169</certvu> (14) <uscertsa>SA10-99A</uscertsa> (15) <uscertta>SA10-99A</uscertta> (16) <mlist msgid="201075606@hacker.com">http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=bugtraq&m=203886607825605</mlist> (17) <url>http://j.r.hacker.com/advisories/1</url> (18) </references> <dates> <discovery>2010-05-25</discovery> (19) <entry>2010-07-13</entry> (20) <modified>2010-09-17</modified> (21) </dates> </vuln>
The tag names are supposed to be self-explanatory so we shall take a closer look only at fields which needs to be filled in:
1 | This is the top-level tag of a VuXML entry. It has a mandatory attribute, vid , specifying a universally unique identifier (UUID) for this entry (in quotes). Generate a UUID for each new VuXML entry (and do not forget to substitute it for the template UUID unless writing the entry from scratch).
Use uuidgen(1) to generate a VuXML UUID. |
2 | This is a one-line description of the issue found. |
3 | The names of packages affected are listed there. Multiple names can be given since several packages may be based on a single master port or software product. This may include stable and development branches, localized versions, and slave ports featuring different choices of important build-time configuration options. |
4 | Affected versions of the package(s) are specified there as one or more ranges using a combination of <lt> , <le> , <eq> , <ge> , and <gt> elements. Check that the version ranges given do not overlap.In a range specification, * (asterisk) denotes the smallest version number. In particular, 2.* is less than 2.a . Therefore an asterisk may be used for a range to match all possible alpha , beta , and RC versions. For instance, <ge>2.</ge><lt>3.</lt> will selectively match every 2.x version while <ge>2.0</ge><lt>3.0</lt> will not since the latter misses 2.r3 and matches 3.b .The above example specifies that affected are versions 1.6 and up to but not including 1.9 , versions 2.x before 2.4_1 , and version 3.0b1 . |
5 | Several related package groups (essentially, ports) can be listed in the <affected> section. This can be used if several software products (say FooBar, FreeBar and OpenBar) grow from the same code base and still share its bugs and vulnerabilities. Note the difference from listing multiple names within a single <package> section. |
6 | The version ranges have to allow for PORTEPOCH and PORTREVISION if applicable. Please remember that according to the collation rules, a version with a non-zero PORTEPOCH is greater than any version without PORTEPOCH , for example, 3.0,1 is greater than 3.1 or even than 8.9 . |
7 | This is a summary of the issue. XHTML is used in this field. At least enclosing <p> and </p> has to appear. More complex mark-up may be used, but only for the sake of accuracy and clarity: No eye candy please. |
8 | This section contains references to relevant documents. As many references as apply are encouraged. |
9 | This is a FreeBSD security advisory. |
10 | This is a FreeBSD problem report. |
11 | This is a MITRE CVE identifier. |
12 | This is a SecurityFocus Bug ID. |
13 | This is a US-CERT security advisory. |
14 | This is a US-CERT vulnerability note. |
15 | This is a US-CERT Cyber Security Alert. |
16 | This is a US-CERT Technical Cyber Security Alert. |
17 | This is a URL to an archived posting in a mailing list. The attribute msgid is optional and may specify the message ID of the posting. |
18 | This is a generic URL. Only it if none of the other reference categories apply. |
19 | This is the date when the issue was disclosed (YYYY-MM-DD). |
20 | This is the date when the entry was added (YYYY-MM-DD). |
21 | This is the date when any information in the entry was last modified (YYYY-MM-DD). New entries must not include this field. Add it when editing an existing entry. |
12.3.3. Testing Changes to the VuXML Database
This example describes a new entry for a vulnerability in the package dropbear
that has been fixed in version dropbear-2013.59
.
As a prerequisite, install a fresh version of security/vuxml port.
First, check whether there already is an entry for this vulnerability.
If there were such an entry, it would match the previous version of the package, 2013.58
:
% pkg audit dropbear-2013.58
If there is none found, add a new entry for this vulnerability.
% cd ${PORTSDIR}/security/vuxml
% make newentry
Verify its syntax and formatting:
% make validate
The previous command generates the vuln-flat.xml file. It can also be generated with:
% make vuln-flat.xml
At least one of these packages needs to be installed: textproc/libxml2, textproc/jade. |
Verify that the <affected>
section of the entry will match the correct packages:
% pkg audit -f ${PORTSDIR}/security/vuxml/vuln-flat.xml dropbear-2013.58
Make sure that the entry produces no spurious matches in the output.
Now check whether the right package versions are matched by the entry:
% pkg audit -f ${PORTSDIR}/security/vuxml/vuln-flat.xml dropbear-2013.58 dropbear-2013.59
dropbear-2012.58 is vulnerable:
dropbear -- exposure of sensitive information, DoS
CVE: CVE-2013-4434
CVE: CVE-2013-4421
WWW: http://portaudit.FreeBSD.org/8c9b48d1-3715-11e3-a624-00262d8b701d.html
1 problem(s) in the installed packages found.
The former version matches while the latter one does not.
Chapter 13. Dos and Don’ts
13.1. Introduction
Here is a list of common dos and don’ts that are encountered during the porting process. Check the port against this list, but also check ports in the PR database that others have submitted. Submit any comments on ports as described in Bug Reports and General Commentary. Checking ports in the PR database will both make it faster for us to commit them, and prove that you know what you are doing.
13.2. WRKDIR
Do not write anything to files outside WRKDIR
. WRKDIR
is the only place that is guaranteed to be writable during the port build (see installing ports from a CDROM for an example of building ports from a read-only tree).
The pkg-* files can be modified by redefining a variable rather than overwriting the file.
13.3. WRKDIRPREFIX
Make sure the port honors WRKDIRPREFIX
.
Most ports do not have to worry about this.
In particular, when referring to a WRKDIR
of another port, note that the correct location is ${WRKDIRPREFIX}${PORTSDIR}/subdir/name/work not ${PORTSDIR}/subdir/name/work or ${.CURDIR}/../../subdir/name/work or some such.
13.4. Differentiating Operating Systems and OS Versions
Some code needs modifications or conditional compilation based upon what version of FreeBSD Unix it is running under.
The preferred way to tell FreeBSD versions apart are the __FreeBSD_version
and __FreeBSD__
macros defined in sys/param.h. If this file is not included add the code,
#include <sys/param.h>
to the proper place in the .c file.
__FreeBSD__
is defined in all versions of FreeBSD as their major version number.
For example, in FreeBSD 9.x, __FreeBSD__
is defined to be 9
.
#if __FreeBSD__ >= 9 # if __FreeBSD_version >= 901000 /* 9.1+ release specific code here */ # endif #endif
A complete list of __FreeBSD_version
values is available in __FreeBSD_version Values.
13.5. Writing Something After bsd.port.mk
Do not write anything after the .include <bsd.port.mk>
line.
It usually can be avoided by including bsd.port.pre.mk somewhere in the middle of the Makefile and bsd.port.post.mk at the end.
Include either the bsd.port.pre.mk/bsd.port.post.mk pair or bsd.port.mk only; do not mix these two usages. |
bsd.port.pre.mk only defines a few variables, which can be used in tests in the Makefile, bsd.port.post.mk defines the rest.
Here are some important variables defined in bsd.port.pre.mk (this is not the complete list, please read bsd.port.mk for the complete list).
Variable | Description |
---|---|
| The architecture as returned by |
| The operating system type, as returned by |
| The release version of the operating system (for example, |
| The numeric version of the operating system; the same as |
| The base of the "local" tree (for example, |
| Where the port installs itself (see more on |
When |
Here are some examples of things that can be added after bsd.port.pre.mk:
# no need to compile lang/perl5 if perl5 is already in system .if ${OSVERSION} > 300003 BROKEN= perl is in system .endif
Always use tab instead of spaces after BROKEN=
.
13.6. Use the exec
Statement in Wrapper Scripts
If the port installs a shell script whose purpose is to launch another program,
and if launching that program is the last action performed by the script,
make sure to launch the program using the exec
statement, for instance:
#!/bin/sh exec %%LOCALBASE%%/bin/java -jar %%DATADIR%%/foo.jar "$@"
The exec
statement replaces the shell process with the specified program.
If exec
is omitted, the shell process remains in memory while the program is executing,
and needlessly consumes system resources.
13.7. Do Things Rationally
The Makefile should do things in a simple and reasonable manner.
Making it a couple of lines shorter or more readable is always better.
Examples include using a make .if
construct instead of a shell if
construct, not redefining do-extract
if redefining EXTRACT*
is enough, and using GNU_CONFIGURE
instead of CONFIGURE_ARGS += --prefix=${PREFIX}
.
If a lot of new code is needed to do something, there may already be an implementation of it in bsd.port.mk. While hard to read, there are a great many seemingly-hard problems for which bsd.port.mk already provides a shorthand solution.
13.8. Respect Both CC
and CXX
The port must respect both CC
and CXX
.
What we mean by this is that the port must not set the values of these variables absolutely, overriding existing values;
instead, it may append whatever values it needs to the existing values.
This is so that build options that affect all ports can be set globally.
If the port does not respect these variables, please add NO_PACKAGE=ignores either cc or cxx
to the Makefile.
Here is an example of a Makefile respecting both CC
and CXX
.
Note the ?=
:
CC?= gcc
CXX?= g++
Here is an example which respects neither CC
nor CXX
:
CC= gcc
CXX= g++
Both CC
and CXX
can be defined on FreeBSD systems in /etc/make.conf.
The first example defines a value if it was not previously set in /etc/make.conf, preserving any system-wide definitions.
The second example clobbers anything previously defined.
13.9. Respect CFLAGS
The port must respect CFLAGS
.
What we mean by this is that the port must not set the value of this variable absolutely, overriding the existing value.
Instead, it may append whatever values it needs to the existing value.
This is so that build options that affect all ports can be set globally.
If it does not, please add NO_PACKAGE=ignores cflags
to the Makefile.
Here is an example of a Makefile respecting CFLAGS
. Note the +=
:
CFLAGS+= -Wall -Werror
Here is an example which does not respect CFLAGS
:
CFLAGS= -Wall -Werror
CFLAGS
is defined on FreeBSD systems in /etc/make.conf.
The first example appends additional flags to CFLAGS
, preserving any system-wide definitions.
The second example clobbers anything previously defined.
Remove optimization flags from the third party Makefiles.
The system CFLAGS
contains system-wide optimization flags.
An example from an unmodified Makefile:
CFLAGS= -O3 -funroll-loops -DHAVE_SOUND
Using system optimization flags, the Makefile would look similar to this example:
CFLAGS+= -DHAVE_SOUND
13.10. Verbose Build Logs
Make the port build system display all commands executed during the build stage. Complete build logs are crucial to debugging port problems.
Non-informative build log example (bad):
CC source1.o CC source2.o CCLD someprogram
Verbose build log example (good):
cc -O2 -pipe -I/usr/local/include -c -o source1.o source1.c cc -O2 -pipe -I/usr/local/include -c -o source2.o source2.c cc -o someprogram source1.o source2.o -L/usr/local/lib -lsomelib
Some build systems such as CMake, ninja, and GNU configure are set up for verbose logging by the ports framework. In other cases, ports might need individual tweaks.
13.11. Feedback
Do send applicable changes and patches to the upstream maintainer for inclusion in the next release of the code. This makes updating to the next release that much easier.
13.12. README.html
README.html is not part of the port, but generated by make readme
.
Do not include this file in patches or commits.
If |
13.13. Marking a Port Not Installable with BROKEN
, FORBIDDEN
, or IGNORE
In certain cases, users must be prevented from installing a port. There are several variables that can be used in a port’s Makefile to tell the user that the port cannot be installed. The value of these make variables will be the reason that is shown to users for why the port refuses to install itself. Please use the correct make variable. Each variable conveys radically different meanings, both to users and to automated systems that depend on Makefiles, such as the ports build cluster, FreshPorts, and portsmon.
13.13.1. Variables
BROKEN
is reserved for ports that currently do not compile, install, deinstall, or run correctly. Use it for ports where the problem is believed to be temporary.If instructed, the build cluster will still attempt to try to build them to see if the underlying problem has been resolved. (However, in general, the cluster is run without this.)
For instance, use
BROKEN
when a port:does not compile
fails its configuration or installation process
installs files outside of ${PREFIX}
does not remove all its files cleanly upon deinstall (however, it may be acceptable, and desirable, for the port to leave user-modified files behind)
has runtime issues on systems where it is supposed to run fine.
FORBIDDEN
is used for ports that contain a security vulnerability or induce grave concern regarding the security of a FreeBSD system with a given port installed (for example, a reputably insecure program or a program that provides easily exploitable services). Mark ports asFORBIDDEN
as soon as a particular piece of software has a vulnerability and there is no released upgrade. Ideally upgrade ports as soon as possible when a security vulnerability is discovered so as to reduce the number of vulnerable FreeBSD hosts (we like being known for being secure), however sometimes there is a noticeable time gap between disclosure of a vulnerability and an updated release of the vulnerable software. Do not mark a portFORBIDDEN
for any reason other than security.IGNORE
is reserved for ports that must not be built for some other reason. Use it for ports where the problem is believed to be structural. The build cluster will not, under any circumstances, build ports marked asIGNORE
. For instance, useIGNORE
when a port:does not work on the installed version of FreeBSD
has a distfile which may not be automatically fetched due to licensing restrictions
does not work with some other currently installed port (for instance, the port depends on www/apache20 but www/apache22 is installed)
If a port would conflict with a currently installed port (for example, if they install a file in the same place that performs a different function), use
CONFLICTS
instead.CONFLICTS
will setIGNORE
by itself.
13.13.2. Implementation Notes
Do not quote the values of BROKEN
, IGNORE
, and related variables.
Due to the way the information is shown to the user, the wording of messages for each variable differ:
BROKEN= fails to link with base -lcrypto
IGNORE= unsupported on recent versions
resulting in this output from make describe
:
===> foobar-0.1 is marked as broken: fails to link with base -lcrypto.
===> foobar-0.1 is unsupported on recent versions.
13.14. Architectural Considerations
13.14.1. General Notes on Architectures
FreeBSD runs on many more processor architectures than just the well-known x86-based ones. Some ports have constraints which are particular to one or more of these architectures.
For the list of supported architectures, run:
cd ${SRCDIR}; make targets
The values are shown in the form TARGET
/TARGET_ARCH
.
The ports read-only makevar ARCH
is set based on the value of TARGET_ARCH
.
Port Makefiles should test the value of this Makevar.
13.14.2. Marking a Port as Architecture Neutral
Ports that do not have any architecture-dependent files or requirements are identified by setting NO_ARCH=yes
.
|
13.14.3. Marking a Port as Ignored Only On Certain Architectures
To mark a port as
IGNORE
d only on certain architectures, there are two other convenience variables that will automatically setIGNORE
:ONLY_FOR_ARCHS
andNOT_FOR_ARCHS
. Examples:ONLY_FOR_ARCHS= i386 amd64
NOT_FOR_ARCHS= ia64 sparc64
A custom
IGNORE
message can be set usingONLY_FOR_ARCHS_REASON
andNOT_FOR_ARCHS_REASON
. Per architecture entries are possible withONLY_FOR_ARCHS_REASON_ARCH
andNOT_FOR_ARCHS_REASON_ARCH
.
If a port fetches i386 binaries and installs them, set
IA32_BINARY_PORT
. If this variable is set, /usr/lib32 must be present for IA32 versions of libraries and the kernel must support IA32 compatibility. If one of these two dependencies is not satisfied,IGNORE
will be set automatically.
13.14.4. Cluster-Specific Considerations
Some ports attempt to tune themselves to the exact machine they are being built on by specifying
-march=native
to the compiler. This should be avoided: either list it under an off-by-default option, or delete it entirely.Otherwise, the default package produced by the build cluster might not run on every single machine of that
ARCH
.
13.15. Marking a Port for Removal with DEPRECATED
or EXPIRATION_DATE
Do remember that BROKEN
and FORBIDDEN
are to be used as a temporary resort if a port is not working.
Permanently broken ports will be removed from the tree entirely.
When it makes sense to do so, users can be warned about a pending port removal with DEPRECATED
and EXPIRATION_DATE
.
The former is a string stating why the port is scheduled for removal; the latter is a string in ISO 8601 format (YYYY-MM-DD).
Both will be shown to the user.
It is possible to set DEPRECATED
without an EXPIRATION_DATE
(for instance, recommending a newer version of the port), but the converse does not make any sense.
There is no set policy on how much notice to give. Current practice seems to be one month for security-related issues and two months for build issues. This also gives any interested committers a little time to fix the problems.
13.16. Avoid Use of the .error
Construct
The correct way for a Makefile to signal that the port cannot be installed due to some external factor (for instance, the user has specified an illegal combination of build options) is to set a non-blank value to IGNORE
.
This value will be formatted and shown to the user by make install
.
It is a common mistake to use .error
for this purpose.
The problem with this is that many automated tools that work with the ports tree will fail in this situation.
The most common occurrence of this is seen when trying to build /usr/ports/INDEX (see Running make describe
).
However, even more trivial commands such as make maintainer
also fail in this scenario.
This is not acceptable.
.error
The first of the next two Makefile snippets will cause make index
to fail, while the second one will not:
.error "option is not supported"
IGNORE=option is not supported
13.17. Usage of sysctl
The usage of sysctl is discouraged except in targets.
This is because the evaluation of any makevar
s, such as used during make index
,
then has to run the command, further slowing down that process.
Only use sysctl(8) through SYSCTL
, as it contains the fully qualified path and can be overridden, if one has such a special need.
13.18. Rerolling Distfiles
Sometimes the authors of software change the content of released distfiles without changing the file’s name. Verify that the changes are official and have been performed by the author. It has happened in the past that the distfile was silently altered on the download servers with the intent to cause harm or compromise end user security.
Put the old distfile aside, download the new one, unpack them and compare the content with diff(1). If there is nothing suspicious, update distinfo.
Be sure to summarize the differences in the PR and commit log, so that other people know that nothing bad has happened. |
Contact the authors of the software and confirm the changes with them.
13.19. Use POSIX Standards
FreeBSD ports generally expect POSIX compliance. Some software and build systems make assumptions based on a particular operating system or environment that can cause problems when used in a port.
Do not use /proc if there are any other ways of getting the information.
For example, setprogname(argv[0])
in main()
and then getprogname(3) to know the executable name.
Do not rely on behavior that is undocumented by POSIX.
Do not record timestamps in the critical path of the application if it also works without. Getting timestamps may be slow, depending on the accuracy of timestamps in the OS. If timestamps are really needed, determine how precise they have to be and use an API which is documented to just deliver the needed precision.
A number of simple syscalls (for example gettimeofday(2), getpid(2)) are much faster on Linux® than on any other operating system due to caching and the vsyscall performance optimizations. Do not rely on them being cheap in performance-critical applications. In general, try hard to avoid syscalls if possible.
Do not rely on Linux®-specific socket behavior.
In particular, default socket buffer sizes are different (call setsockopt(2) with SO_SNDBUF
and SO_RCVBUF
, and while Linux®'s send(2) blocks when the socket buffer is full, FreeBSD’s will fail and set ENOBUFS
in errno.
If relying on non-standard behavior is required, encapsulate it properly into a generic API, do a check for the behavior in the configure stage, and stop if it is missing.
Check the man pages to see if the function used is a POSIX interface (in the "STANDARDS" section of the man page).
Do not assume that /bin/sh is bash. Ensure that a command line passed to system(3) will work with a POSIX compliant shell.
A list of common bashisms is available here.
Check that headers are included in the POSIX or man page recommended way. For example, sys/types.h is often forgotten, which is not as much of a problem for Linux® as it is for FreeBSD.
Chapter 14. A Sample Makefile
Here is a sample Makefile that can be used to create a new port. Make sure to remove all the extra comments (ones between brackets).
The format shown is the recommended one for ordering variables, empty lines between sections, and so on. This format is designed so that the most important information is easy to locate. We recommend using portlint to check the Makefile.
[section to describe the port itself and the master site - PORTNAME and PORTVERSION or the DISTVERSION* variables are always first, followed by CATEGORIES, and then MASTER_SITES, which can be followed by MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR. PKGNAMEPREFIX and PKGNAMESUFFIX, if needed, will be after that. Then comes DISTNAME, EXTRACT_SUFX and/or DISTFILES, and then EXTRACT_ONLY, as necessary.] PORTNAME= xdvi DISTVERSION= 18.2 CATEGORIES= print [do not forget the trailing slash ("/")! if not using MASTER_SITE_* macros] MASTER_SITES= ${MASTER_SITE_XCONTRIB} MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR= applications PKGNAMEPREFIX= ja- DISTNAME= xdvi-pl18 [set this if the source is not in the standard ".tar.gz" form] EXTRACT_SUFX= .tar.Z [section for distributed patches -- can be empty] PATCH_SITES= ftp://ftp.sra.co.jp/pub/X11/japanese/ PATCHFILES= xdvi-18.patch1.gz xdvi-18.patch2.gz [If the distributed patches were not made relative to ${WRKSRC}, this may need to be tweaked] PATCH_DIST_STRIP= -p1 [maintainer; *mandatory*! This is the person who is volunteering to handle port updates, build breakages, and to whom a users can direct questions and bug reports. To keep the quality of the Ports Collection as high as possible, we do not accept new ports that are assigned to "ports@FreeBSD.org".] MAINTAINER= asami@FreeBSD.org COMMENT= DVI Previewer for the X Window System [license -- should not be empty] LICENSE= BSD2CLAUSE LICENSE_FILE= ${WRKSRC}/LICENSE [dependencies -- can be empty] RUN_DEPENDS= gs:print/ghostscript [If it requires GNU make, not /usr/bin/make, to build...] USES= gmake [If it is an X application and requires "xmkmf -a" to be run...] USES= imake [this section is for other standard bsd.port.mk variables that do not] belong to any of the above] [If it asks questions during configure, build, install...] IS_INTERACTIVE= yes [If it extracts to a directory other than ${DISTNAME}...] WRKSRC= ${WRKDIR}/xdvi-new [If it requires a "configure" script generated by GNU autoconf to be run] GNU_CONFIGURE= yes [et cetera.] [If it requires options, this section is for options] OPTIONS_DEFINE= DOCS EXAMPLES FOO OPTIONS_DEFAULT= FOO [If options will change the files in plist] OPTIONS_SUB=yes FOO_DESC= Enable foo support FOO_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= foo [non-standard variables to be used in the rules below] MY_FAVORITE_RESPONSE= "yeah, right" [then the special rules, in the order they are called] pre-fetch: i go fetch something, yeah post-patch: i need to do something after patch, great pre-install: and then some more stuff before installing, wow [and then the epilogue] .include <bsd.port.mk>
Chapter 15. Order of Variables in Port Makefiles
The first sections of the Makefile must always come in the same order. This standard makes it so everyone can easily read any port without having to search for variables in a random order.
The sections and variables described here are mandatory in a ordinary port. In a slave port, many sections and variables can be skipped. |
Each following block must be separated from the previous block by a single blank line. In the following blocks, only set the variables that are required by the port. Define these variables in the order they are shown here. |
15.1. PORTNAME
Block
This block is the most important. It defines the port name, version, distribution file location, and category. The variables must be in this order:
Only one of PORTVERSION and DISTVERSION can be used. |
15.4. LICENSE
Block
This block is optional, although it is highly recommended. The variables are:
LICENSE_GROUPS
orLICENSE_GROUPS_NAME
LICENSE_NAME
orLICENSE_NAME_NAME
LICENSE_TEXT
orLICENSE_TEXT_NAME
LICENSE_FILE
orLICENSE_FILE_NAME
LICENSE_PERMS
orLICENSE_PERMS_NAME_
LICENSE_DISTFILES
orLICENSE_DISTFILES_NAME
If there are multiple licenses, sort the different LICENSE_VAR_NAME variables by license name.
15.5. Generic BROKEN
/IGNORE
/DEPRECATED
Messages
This block is optional. The variables are:
If the port is marked BROKEN when some conditions are met, and such conditions can only be tested after including bsd.port.options.mk or bsd.port.pre.mk, then those variables should be set later, in The Rest of the Variables. |
15.7. Flavors
This block is optional.
Start this section with defining FLAVORS
.
Continue with the possible Flavors helpers.
See Using FLAVORS for more Information.
Constructs setting variables not available as helpers using .if ${FLAVOR:U} == foo
should go in their respective sections below.
15.8. USES
and USE_x
Start this section with defining USES
, and then possible USE_x
.
Keep related variables close together.
For example, if using USE_GITHUB
, always put the GH_*
variables right after it.
15.9. Standard bsd.port.mk Variables
This section block is for variables that can be defined in bsd.port.mk that do not belong in any of the previous section blocks.
Order is not important, however try to keep similar variables together.
For example uid and gid variables USERS
and GROUPS
.
Configuration variables CONFIGURE_*
and *_CONFIGURE
.
List of files, and directories PORTDOCS
and PORTEXAMPLES
.
15.10. Options and Helpers
If the port uses the options framework, define OPTIONS_DEFINE
and OPTIONS_DEFAULT
first,
then the other OPTIONS_*
variables first, then the *_DESC
descriptions, then the options helpers.
Try and sort all of those alphabetically.
The FOO
and BAR
options do not have a standard description, so one need to be written.
The other options already have one in Mk/bsd.options.desc.mk so writing one is not needed.
The DOCS
and EXAMPLES
use target helpers to install their files, they are shown here for completeness,
though they belong in The Targets, so other variables and targets could be inserted before them.
OPTIONS_DEFINE= DOCS EXAMPLES FOO BAR OPTIONS_DEFAULT= FOO OPTIONS_RADIO= SSL OPTIONS_RADIO_SSL= OPENSSL GNUTLS OPTIONS_SUB= yes BAR_DESC= Enable bar support FOO_DESC= Enable foo support BAR_CONFIGURE_WITH= bar=${LOCALBASE} FOO_CONFIGURE_ENABLE= foo GNUTLS_CONFIGURE_ON= --with-ssl=gnutls OPENSSL_CONFIGURE_ON= --with-ssl=openssl post-install-DOCS-on: ${MKDIR} ${STAGEDIR}${DOCSDIR} cd ${WRKSRC}/doc && ${COPYTREE_SHARE} . ${STAGEDIR}${DOCSDIR} post-install-EXAMPLES-on: ${MKDIR} ${STAGEDIR}${EXAMPLESDIR} cd ${WRKSRC}/ex && ${COPYTREE_SHARE} . ${STAGEDIR}${EXAMPLESDIR}
15.11. The Rest of the Variables
And then, the rest of the variables that are not mentioned in the previous blocks.
15.12. The Targets
After all the variables are defined, the optional make(1) targets can be defined.
Keep pre-
before post-
and in the same order as the different stages run:
fetch
extract
patch
configure
build
install
test
When using options helpers target keep them alphabetically sorted, but keep the post-install: # install generic bits post-install-DOCS-on: # Install documentation post-install-X11-on: # Install X11 related bits post-install-X11-off: # Install bits that should be there if X11 is disabled |
Chapter 16. Keeping Up
The FreeBSD Ports Collection is constantly changing. Here is some information on how to keep up.
16.1. FreshPorts
One of the easiest ways to learn about updates that have already been committed is by subscribing to FreshPorts. Multiple ports can be monitored. Maintainers are strongly encouraged to subscribe, because they will receive notification of not only their own changes, but also any changes that any other FreeBSD committer has made. (These are often necessary to keep up with changes in the underlying ports framework-although it would be most polite to receive an advance heads-up from those committing such changes, sometimes this is overlooked or impractical. Also, in some cases, the changes are very minor in nature. We expect everyone to use their best judgement in these cases.)
To use FreshPorts, an account is required.
Those with registered email addresses at @FreeBSD.org
will see the opt-in link on the right-hand side of the web pages.
Those who already have a FreshPorts account but are not using a @FreeBSD.org
email address can change the email to @FreeBSD.org
, subscribe, then change it back again.
FreshPorts also has a sanity test feature which automatically tests each commit to the FreeBSD ports tree. If subscribed to this service, a committer will receive notifications of any errors which FreshPorts detects during sanity testing of their commits.
16.2. The Web Interface to the Source Repository
It is possible to browse the files in the source repository by using a web interface. Changes that affect the entire port system are now documented in the CHANGES file. Changes that affect individual ports are now documented in the UPDATING file. However, the definitive answer to any question is undoubtedly to read the source code of bsd.port.mk, and associated files.
16.3. The FreeBSD Ports Mailing List
As a ports maintainer, consider subscribing to FreeBSD ports 郵遞論壇. Important changes to the way ports work will be announced there, and then committed to CHANGES.
If the volume of messages on this mailing list is too high, consider following FreeBSD ports announce mailing list which contains only announcements.
16.4. The FreeBSD Port Building Cluster
One of the least-publicized strengths of FreeBSD is that an entire cluster of machines is dedicated to continually building the Ports Collection, for each of the major OS releases and for each Tier-1 architecture.
Individual ports are built unless they are specifically marked with IGNORE
.
Ports that are marked with BROKEN
will still be attempted, to see if the underlying problem has been resolved.
(This is done by passing TRYBROKEN
to the port’s Makefile.)
16.5. Portscout: the FreeBSD Ports Distfile Scanner
The build cluster is dedicated to building the latest release of each port with distfiles that have already been fetched. However, as the Internet continually changes, distfiles can quickly go missing. Portscout, the FreeBSD Ports distfile scanner, attempts to query every download site for every port to find out if each distfile is still available. Portscout can generate HTML reports and send emails about newly available ports to those who request them. Unless not otherwise subscribed, maintainers are asked to check periodically for changes, either by hand or using the RSS feed.
Portscout’s first page gives the email address of the port maintainer, the number of ports the maintainer is responsible for, the number of those ports with new distfiles, and the percentage of those ports that are out-of-date. The search function allows for searching by email address for a specific maintainer, and for selecting whether only out-of-date ports are shown.
Upon clicking on a maintainer’s email address, a list of all of their ports is displayed, along with port category, current version number, whether or not there is a new version, when the port was last updated, and finally when it was last checked. A search function on this page allows the user to search for a specific port.
Clicking on a port name in the list displays the FreshPorts port information.
Additional documentation is available in the Portscout repository.
16.6. The FreeBSD Ports Monitoring System
Another handy resource is the FreeBSD Ports Monitoring System (also known as portsmon
).
This system comprises a database that processes information from several sources and allows it to be browsed via a web interface.
Currently, the ports Problem Reports (PRs), the error logs from the build cluster, and individual files from the ports collection are used.
In the future, this will be expanded to include the distfile survey, as well as other sources.
To get started, use the Overview of One Port search page to find all the information about a port.
This is the only resource available that maps PR entries to portnames.
PR submitters do not always include the portname in their Synopsis, although we would prefer that they did.
So, portsmon
is a good place to find out whether an existing port has any PRs filed against it, any build errors,
or if a new port the porter is considering creating has already been submitted.
The FreeBSD Ports Monitoring System (portsmon) is currently not working due to latest Python updates. |
Chapter 17. Using USES
Macros
17.1. An Introduction to USES
USES
macros make it easy to declare requirements and settings for a port.
They can add dependencies, change building behavior, add metadata to packages, and so on, all by selecting simple, preset values.
Each section in this chapter describes a possible value for USES
, along with its possible arguments.
Arguments are appended to the value after a colon (:
).
Multiple arguments are separated by commas (,
).
USES= bison perl
USES= tar:xz
USES= drupal:7,theme
USES= pgsql:9.3+ cpe python:2.7,build
17.2. 7z
Possible arguments: (none), p7zip
, partial
Extract using 7z(1) instead of bsdtar(1) and sets EXTRACT_SUFX=.7z
.
The p7zip
option forces a dependency on the 7z
from archivers/p7zip if the one from the base system is not able to extract the files.
EXTRACT_SUFX
is not changed if the partial
option is used, this can be used if the main distribution file does not have a .7z extension.
17.3. ada
Possible arguments: (none), 5
, 6
Depends on an Ada-capable compiler, and sets CC
accordingly.
Defaults to use gcc 5 from ports.
Use the :_X_
version option to force building with a different version.
17.4. autoreconf
Possible arguments: (none), build
Runs autoreconf
.
It encapsulates the aclocal
, autoconf
, autoheader
, automake
, autopoint
, and libtoolize
commands.
Each command applies to ${AUTORECONF_WRKSRC}/configure.ac or its old name, ${AUTORECONF_WRKSRC}/configure.in.
If configure.ac defines subdirectories with their own configure.ac using AC_CONFIG_SUBDIRS
, autoreconf
will recursively update those as well.
The :build
argument only adds build time dependencies on those tools but does not run autoreconf
.
A port can set AUTORECONF_WRKSRC
if WRKSRC
does not contain the path to configure.ac.
17.5. blaslapack
Possible arguments: (none), atlas
, netlib
(default), gotoblas
, openblas
Adds dependencies on Blas / Lapack libraries.
17.6. bdb
Possible arguments: (none), 48
, 5
(default), 6
Add dependency on the Berkeley DB library.
Default to databases/db5.
It can also depend on databases/db48 when using the :48
argument or databases/db6 with :6
.
It is possible to declare a range of acceptable values, :48+
finds the highest installed version, and falls back to 4.8 if nothing else is installed.
INVALID_BDB_VER
can be used to specify versions which do not work with this port.
The framework exposes the following variables to the port:
BDB_LIB_NAME
The name of the Berkeley DB library. For example, when using databases/db5, it contains
db-5.3
.BDB_LIB_CXX_NAME
The name of the Berkeley DBC++ library. For example, when using databases/db5, it contains
db_cxx-5.3
.BDB_INCLUDE_DIR
The location of the Berkeley DB include directory. For example, when using databases/db5, it will contain
${LOCALBASE}/include/db5
.BDB_LIB_DIR
The location of the Berkeley DB library directory. For example, when using databases/db5, it contains
${LOCALBASE}/lib
.BDB_VER
The detected Berkeley DB version. For example, if using
USES=bdb:48+
and Berkeley DB 5 is installed, it contains5
.
databases/db48 is deprecated and unsupported. It must not be used by any port. |
17.7. bison
Possible arguments: (none), build
, run
, both
Uses devel/bison By default, with no arguments or with the build
argument, it implies bison
is a build-time dependency, run
implies a run-time dependency, and both
implies both run-time and build-time dependencies.
17.8. cabal
Ports should not be created for Haskell libraries, see Haskell Libraries for more information. |
Possible arguments: (none), hpack
Sets default values and targets used to build Haskell software using Cabal.
A build dependency on the Haskell compiler port (GHC) is added.
If hpack
argument is given, a build dependency on devel/hs-hpack is added and hpack
is invoked at configuration step to generate.
cabal file.
The framework provides the following variables:
USE_CABAL
If the software uses Haskell dependencies, list them in this variable. Each item should be present on Hackage and be listed in form
packagename-0.1.2
. Dependencies can have revisions, which are specified after the_
symbol. Automatic generation of dependency list is supported, see Building Haskell Applications withcabal
.CABAL_FLAGS
List of flags to be passed to
cabal-install
during the configuring and building stage. The flags are passed verbatim.EXECUTABLES
List of executable files installed by the port. Default value:
${PORTNAME}
. Items from this list are automatically added to pkg-plist.SKIP_CABAL_PLIST
If defined, do not add items from
${EXECUTABLES}
to pkg-plist.opt_USE_CABAL
Adds items to
${USE_CABAL}
depending onopt
option.opt_EXECUTABLES
Adds items to
${EXECUTABLES}
depending onopt
option.opt_CABAL_FLAGS
If
opt
is enabled, append the value to${CABAL_FLAGS}
. Otherwise, append-value
to disable the flag.FOO_DATADIR_VARS
For an executable named
FOO
list Haskell packages, whose data files should be accessible by the executable.
17.9. cargo
Possible arguments: (none)
Uses Cargo for configuring, building, and testing.
It can be used to port Rust applications that use the Cargo build system.
For more information see Building Rust Applications with cargo
.
17.10. charsetfix
Possible arguments: (none)
Prevents the port from installing charset.alias.
This must be installed only by converters/libiconv.
CHARSETFIX_MAKEFILEIN
can be set to a path relative to WRKSRC
if charset.alias is not installed by ${WRKSRC}/Makefile.in.
17.11. cmake
Possible arguments: (none), insource
, noninja
, run
, testing
Use CMake for configuring the port and generating a build system.
By default an out-of-source build is performed, leaving the sources in WRKSRC
free from build artifacts.
With the insource
argument, an in-source build will be performed instead.
This argument should be an exception, used only when a regular out-of-source build does not work.
By default Ninja (devel/ninja) is used for the build.
In some cases this does not work correctly.
With the noninja
argument, the build will use regular make
for builds.
This argument should only be used if a Ninja-based build does not work.
With the run
argument, a run dependency is registered in addition to a build dependency.
With the testing
argument, a test-target is added that uses CTest.
When running tests the port will be re-configured for testing and re-built.
For more information see Using cmake
.
17.12. compiler
Possible arguments: (none), env
(default, implicit), {c-plus-plus}17-lang
, {c-plus-plus}14-lang
, {c-plus-plus}11-lang
, gcc-{c-plus-plus}11-lib
, {c-plus-plus}11-lib
, {c-plus-plus}0x
, c11
, nestedfct
, features
Determines which compiler to use based on any given wishes.
Use {c-plus-plus}17-lang
if the port needs a {c-plus-plus}17-capable compiler, {c-plus-plus}14-lang
if the port needs a {c-plus-plus}14-capable compiler, {c-plus-plus}11-lang
if the port needs a {c-plus-plus}11-capable compiler, gcc-{c-plus-plus}11-lib
if the port needs the g++
compiler with a {c-plus-plus}11 library, or {c-plus-plus}11-lib
if the port needs a {c-plus-plus}11-ready standard library.
If the port needs a compiler understanding {c-plus-plus}0X, C11 or nested functions, the corresponding parameters should be used.
Use features
to request a list of features supported by the default compiler.
After including bsd.port.pre.mk the port can inspect the results using these variables:
COMPILER_TYPE
: the default compiler on the system, either gcc or clangALT_COMPILER_TYPE
: the alternative compiler on the system, either gcc or clang. Only set if two compilers are present in the base system.COMPILER_VERSION
: the first two digits of the version of the default compiler.ALT_COMPILER_VERSION
: the first two digits of the version of the alternative compiler, if present.CHOSEN_COMPILER_TYPE
: the chosen compiler, either gcc or clangCOMPILER_FEATURES
: the features supported by the default compiler. It currently lists the {c-plus-plus} library.
17.13. cpe
Possible arguments: (none)
Include Common Platform Enumeration (CPE) information in package manifest as a CPE 2.3 formatted string. See the CPE specification for details. To add CPE information to a port, follow these steps:
Search for the official CPE entry for the software product either by using the NVD’s CPE search engine or in the official CPE dictionary (warning, very large XML file). Do not ever make up CPE data.
Add
cpe
toUSES
and compare the result ofmake -V CPE_STR
to the CPE dictionary entry. Continue one step at a time untilmake -V CPE_STR
is correct.If the product name (second field, defaults to
PORTNAME
) is incorrect, defineCPE_PRODUCT
.If the vendor name (first field, defaults to
CPE_PRODUCT
) is incorrect, defineCPE_VENDOR
.If the version field (third field, defaults to
PORTVERSION
) is incorrect, defineCPE_VERSION
.If the update field (fourth field, defaults to empty) is incorrect, define
CPE_UPDATE
.If it is still not correct, check Mk/Uses/cpe.mk for additional details, or contact the Ports Security Team <ports-secteam@FreeBSD.org>.
Derive as much as possible of the CPE name from existing variables such as
PORTNAME
andPORTVERSION
. Use variable modifiers to extract the relevant portions from these variables rather than hardcoding the name.Always run
make -V CPE_STR
and check the output before committing anything that changesPORTNAME
orPORTVERSION
or any other variable which is used to deriveCPE_STR
.
17.14. cran
Possible arguments: (none), auto-plist
, compiles
Uses the Comprehensive R Archive Network.
Specify auto-plist
to automatically generate pkg-plist.
Specify compiles
if the port has code that need to be compiled.
17.15. desktop-file-utils
Possible arguments: (none)
Uses update-desktop-database from devel/desktop-file-utils.
An extra post-install step will be run without interfering with any post-install steps already in the port Makefile.
A line with @desktop-file-utils
will be added to the plist.
17.16. desthack
Possible arguments: (none)
Changes the behavior of GNU configure to properly support DESTDIR
in case the original software does not.
17.17. display
Possible arguments: (none), ARGS
Set up a virtual display environment.
If the environment variable DISPLAY
is not set, then Xvfb is added as a build dependency, and CONFIGURE_ENV
is extended with the port number of the currently running instance of Xvfb.
The ARGS parameter defaults to install
and controls the phase around which to start and stop the virtual display.
17.18. dos2unix
Possible arguments: (none)
The port has files with line endings in DOS format which need to be converted. Several variables can be set to control which files will be converted. The default is to convert all files, including binaries. See Simple Automatic Replacements for examples.
DOS2UNIX_REGEX
: match file names based on a regular expression.DOS2UNIX_FILES
: match literal file names.DOS2UNIX_GLOB
: match file names based on a glob pattern.DOS2UNIX_WRKSRC
: the directory from which to start the conversions. Defaults to${WRKSRC}
.
17.19. drupal
Possible arguments: 7
, module
, theme
Automate installation of a port that is a Drupal theme or module.
Use with the version of Drupal that the port is expecting.
For example, USES=drupal:7,module
says that this port creates a Drupal 6 module.
A Drupal 7 theme can be specified with USES=drupal:7,theme
.
17.21. fakeroot
Possible arguments: (none)
Changes some default behavior of build systems to allow installing as a user.
See https://wiki.debian.org/FakeRoot for more information on fakeroot
.
17.22. fam
Possible arguments: (none), fam
, gamin
Uses a File Alteration Monitor as a library dependency, either devel/fam or devel/gamin. End users can set WITH_FAM_SYSTEM to specify their preference.
17.23. firebird
Possible arguments: (none), 25
Add a dependency to the client library of the Firebird database.
17.24. fonts
Possible arguments: (none), fc
, fcfontsdir
(default), fontsdir
, none
Adds a runtime dependency on tools needed to register fonts.
Depending on the argument, add a @fc ${FONTSDIR}
line, @fcfontsdir ${FONTSDIR}
line, @fontsdir ${FONTSDIR}
line, or no line if the argument is none
, to the plist.
FONTSDIR
defaults to ${PREFIX}/share/fonts/${FONTNAME} and FONTNAME
to ${PORTNAME}
.
Add FONTSDIR
to PLIST_SUB
and SUB_LIST
17.26. fuse
Possible arguments: 2
(default), 3
The port will depend on the FUSE library and handle the dependency on the kernel module depending on the version of FreeBSD.
17.27. gem
Possible arguments: (none), noautoplist
Handle building with RubyGems.
If noautoplist
is used, the packing list is not generated automatically.
17.28. gettext
Possible arguments: (none)
Deprecated.
Will include both gettext-runtime
and gettext-tools
.
17.29. gettext-runtime
Possible arguments: (none), lib
(default), build
, run
Uses devel/gettext-runtime.
By default, with no arguments or with the lib
argument, implies a library dependency on libintl.so.
build
and run
implies, respectively a build-time and a run-time dependency on gettext.
17.30. gettext-tools
Possible arguments: (none), build
(default), run
Uses devel/gettext-tools.
By default, with no argument, or with the build
argument, a build time dependency on msgfmt is registered.
With the run
argument, a run-time dependency is registered.
17.31. ghostscript
Possible arguments: X, build
, run
, nox11
A specific version X can be used. Possible versions are 7
, 8
, 9
, and agpl
(default).
nox11
indicates that the -nox11
version of the port is required.
build
and run
add build- and run-time dependencies on Ghostscript.
The default is both build- and run-time dependencies.
17.32. gl
Possible arguments: (none)
Provides an easy way to depend on GL components.
The components should be listed in USE_GL
.
The available components are:
egl
add a library dependency on libEGL.so from graphics/libglvnd
gbm
Add a library dependency on libgbm.so from graphics/mesa-libs
gl
Add a library dependency on libGL.so from graphics/libglvnd
glesv2
Add a library dependency on libGLESv2.so from graphics/libglvnd
glew
Add a library dependency on libGLEW.so from graphics/glew
glu
Add a library dependency on libGLU.so from graphics/libGLU
glut
Add a library dependency on libglut.so from graphics/freeglut
opengl
Add a library dependency on libOpenGL.so from graphics/libglvnd
17.33. gmake
Possible arguments: (none)
Uses devel/gmake as a build-time dependency and sets up the environment to use gmake
as the default make
for the build.
17.34. gnome
Possible arguments: (none)
Provides an easy way to depend on GNOME components.
The components should be listed in USE_GNOME
.
The available components are:
atk
atkmm
cairo
cairomm
dconf
esound
evolutiondataserver3
gconf2
gconfmm26
gdkpixbuf
gdkpixbuf2
glib12
glib20
glibmm
gnomecontrolcenter3
gnomedesktop3
gnomedocutils
gnomemenus3
gnomemimedata
gnomeprefix
gnomesharp20
gnomevfs2
gsound
gtk-update-icon-cache
gtk12
gtk20
gtk30
gtkhtml3
gtkhtml4
gtkmm20
gtkmm24
gtkmm30
gtksharp20
gtksourceview
gtksourceview2
gtksourceview3
gtksourceviewmm3
gvfs
intlhack
intltool
introspection
libartlgpl2
libbonobo
libbonoboui
libgda5
libgda5-ui
libgdamm5
libglade2
libgnome
libgnomecanvas
libgnomekbd
libgnomeprint
libgnomeprintui
libgnomeui
libgsf
libgtkhtml
libgtksourceviewmm
libidl
librsvg2
libsigc++12
libsigc++20
libwnck
libwnck3
libxml++26
libxml2
libxslt
metacity
nautilus3
orbit2
pango
pangomm
pangox-compat
py3gobject3
pygnome2
pygobject
pygobject3
pygtk2
pygtksourceview
referencehack
vte
vte3
The default dependency is build- and run-time, it can be changed with :build
or :run
.
For example:
USES= gnome USE_GNOME= gnomemenus3:build intlhack
See Using GNOME for more information.
17.35. go
Ports should not be created for Go libs, see Go Libraries for more information. |
Possible arguments: (none), modules
, no_targets
, run
Sets default values and targets used to build Go software.
A build dependency on the Go compiler port selected via GO_PORT
is added.
By default the build is performed in GOPATH mode.
If Go software uses modules, the modules-aware mode can be switched on with modules
argument.
no_targets
will setup build environment like GO_ENV
, GO_BUILDFLAGS
but skip creating post-extract
and do-{build,install,test}
targets.
run
will also add a run dependency on what is in GO_PORT
.
The build process is controlled by several variables:
GO_MODULE
The name of the application module as specified by the
module
directive ingo.mod
. In most cases, this is the only required variable for ports that use Go modules.GO_PKGNAME
The name of the Go package when building in GOPATH mode. This is the directory that will be created in
${GOPATH}/src
. If not set explicitly andGH_SUBDIR
orGL_SUBDIR
is present,GO_PKGNAME
will be inferred from it. It is not needed when building in modules-aware mode.GO_TARGET
The packages to build. The default value is
${GO_PKGNAME}
.GO_TARGET
can also be a tuple in the formpackage:path
where path can be either a simple filename or a full path starting with${PREFIX}
.GO_TESTTARGET
The packages to test. The default value is
./…
(the current package and all subpackages).CGO_CFLAGS
Additional
CFLAGS
values to be passed to the C compiler bygo
.CGO_LDFLAGS
Additional
LDFLAGS
values to be passed to the C compiler bygo
.GO_BUILDFLAGS
Additional build arguments to be passed to
go build
.GO_TESTFLAGS
Additional build arguments to be passed to
go test
.GO_PORT
The Go compiler port to use. By default this is lang/go but can be set to lang/go-devel in
make.conf
for testing with future Go versions.This variable must not be set by individual ports!
See Building Go Applications for usage examples.
17.36. gperf
Possible arguments: (none)
Add a buildtime dependency on devel/gperf if gperf
is not present in the base system.
17.37. grantlee
Possible arguments: 5
, selfbuild
Handle dependency on Grantlee.
Specify 5
to depend on the Qt5 based version, devel/grantlee5.
selfbuild
is used internally by devel/grantlee5 to get their versions numbers.
17.38. groff
Possible arguments: build
, run
, both
Registers a dependency on textproc/groff if not present in the base system.
17.39. gssapi
Possible arguments: (none), base
(default), heimdal
, mit
, flags
, bootstrap
Handle dependencies needed by consumers of the GSS-API.
Only libraries that provide the Kerberos mechanism are available.
By default, or set to base
, the GSS-API library from the base system is used.
Can also be set to heimdal
to use security/heimdal, or mit
to use security/krb5.
When the local Kerberos installation is not in LOCALBASE
, set HEIMDAL_HOME
(for heimdal
) or KRB5_HOME
(for krb5
) to the location of the Kerberos installation.
These variables are exported for the ports to use:
GSSAPIBASEDIR
GSSAPICPPFLAGS
GSSAPIINCDIR
GSSAPILDFLAGS
GSSAPILIBDIR
GSSAPILIBS
GSSAPI_CONFIGURE_ARGS
The flags
option can be given alongside base
, heimdal
, or mit
to automatically add GSSAPICPPFLAGS
, GSSAPILDFLAGS
, and GSSAPILIBS
to CFLAGS
, LDFLAGS
, and LDADD
, respectively.
For example, use base,flags
.
The bootstrap
option is a special prefix only for use by security/krb5 and security/heimdal.
For example, use bootstrap,mit
.
OPTIONS_SINGLE= GSSAPI OPTIONS_SINGLE_GSSAPI= GSSAPI_BASE GSSAPI_HEIMDAL GSSAPI_MIT GSSAPI_NONE GSSAPI_BASE_USES= gssapi GSSAPI_BASE_CONFIGURE_ON= --with-gssapi=${GSSAPIBASEDIR} ${GSSAPI_CONFIGURE_ARGS} GSSAPI_HEIMDAL_USES= gssapi:heimdal GSSAPI_HEIMDAL_CONFIGURE_ON= --with-gssapi=${GSSAPIBASEDIR} ${GSSAPI_CONFIGURE_ARGS} GSSAPI_MIT_USES= gssapi:mit GSSAPI_MIT_CONFIGURE_ON= --with-gssapi=${GSSAPIBASEDIR} ${GSSAPI_CONFIGURE_ARGS} GSSAPI_NONE_CONFIGURE_ON= --without-gssapi
17.40. horde
Possible arguments: (none)
Add buildtime and runtime dependencies on devel/pear-channel-horde.
Other Horde dependencies can be added with USE_HORDE_BUILD
and USE_HORDE_RUN
.
See Horde Modules for more information.
17.41. iconv
Possible arguments: (none), lib
, build
, patch
, translit
, wchar_t
Uses iconv
functions, either from the port converters/libiconv as a build-time and run-time dependency, or from the base system.
By default, with no arguments or with the lib
argument, implies iconv
with build-time and run-time dependencies.
build
implies a build-time dependency, and patch
implies a patch-time dependency.
If the port uses the WCHAR_T
or //TRANSLIT
iconv extensions, add the relevant arguments so that the correct iconv is used.
For more information see Using iconv
.
17.42. imake
Possible arguments: (none), env
, notall
, noman
Add devel/imake as a build-time dependency and run xmkmf -a
during the configure
stage.
If the env
argument is given, the configure
target is not set.
If the -a
flag is a problem for the port, add the notall
argument.
If xmkmf
does not generate a install.man
target, add the noman
argument.
17.43. kde
Possible arguments: 5
Add dependency on KDE components. See Using KDE for more information.
17.44. kmod
Possible arguments: (none), debug
Fills in the boilerplate for kernel module ports, currently:
Add
kld
toCATEGORIES
.Set
SSP_UNSAFE
.Set
IGNORE
if the kernel sources are not found inSRC_BASE
.Define
KMODDIR
to /boot/modules by default, add it toPLIST_SUB
andMAKE_ENV
, and create it upon installation. IfKMODDIR
is set to /boot/kernel, it will be rewritten to /boot/modules. This prevents breaking packages when upgrading the kernel due to /boot/kernel being renamed to /boot/kernel.old in the process.Handle cross-referencing kernel modules upon installation and deinstallation, using
@kld
.If the
debug
argument is given, the port can install a debug version of the module into KERN_DEBUGDIR/KMODDIR. By default,KERN_DEBUGDIR
is copied fromDEBUGDIR
and set to /usr/lib/debug. The framework will take care of creating and removing any required directories.
17.46. libarchive
Possible arguments: (none)
Registers a dependency on archivers/libarchive.
Any ports depending on libarchive must include USES=libarchive
.
17.47. libedit
Possible arguments: (none)
Registers a dependency on devel/libedit.
Any ports depending on libedit must include USES=libedit
.
17.48. libtool
Possible arguments: (none), keepla
, build
Patches libtool
scripts. This must be added to all ports that use libtool
.
The keepla
argument can be used to keep .la files.
Some ports do not ship with their own copy of libtool and need a build time dependency on devel/libtool, use the :build
argument to add such dependency.
17.49. linux
Possible arguments: c6
, c7
Ports Linux compatibility framework.
Specify c6
to depend on CentOS 6 packags.
Specify c7
to depend on CentOS 7 packages. The available packages are:
allegro
alsa-plugins-oss
alsa-plugins-pulseaudio
alsalib
atk
avahi-libs
base
cairo
cups-libs
curl
cyrus-sasl2
dbusglib
dbuslibs
devtools
dri
expat
flac
fontconfig
gdkpixbuf2
gnutls
graphite2
gtk2
harfbuzz
jasper
jbigkit
jpeg
libasyncns
libaudiofile
libelf
libgcrypt
libgfortran
libgpg-error
libmng
libogg
libpciaccess
libsndfile
libsoup
libssh2
libtasn1
libthai
libtheora
libv4l
libvorbis
libxml2
mikmod
naslibs
ncurses-base
nspr
nss
openal
openal-soft
openldap
openmotif
openssl
pango
pixman
png
pulseaudio-libs
qt
qt-x11
qtwebkit
scimlibs
sdl12
sdlimage
sdlmixer
sqlite3
tcl85
tcp_wrappers-libs
tiff
tk85
ucl
xorglibs
17.50. localbase
Possible arguments: (none), ldflags
Ensures that libraries from dependencies in LOCALBASE
are used instead of the ones from the base system.
Specify ldflags
to add -L${LOCALBASE}/lib
to LDFLAGS
instead of LIBS
.
Ports that depend on libraries that are also present in the base system should use this.
It is also used internally by a few other USES
.
17.51. lua
Possible arguments: (none), XY
, XY+
, -XY
, XY-ZA
, module
, flavors
, build
, run
, env
Adds a dependency on Lua.
By default this is a library dependency, unless overridden by the build
and/or run
option.
The env
option prevents the addition of any dependency, while still defining all the usual variables.
The default version is set by the usual DEFAULT_VERSIONS
mechanism, unless a version or range of versions is specified as an argument, for example, 51
or 51-53
.
Applications using Lua are normally built for only a single Lua version.
However, library modules intended to be loaded by Lua code should use the module
option to build with multiple flavors.
For more information see Using Lua.
17.52. lxqt
Possible arguments: (none)
Handle dependencies for the LXQt Desktop Environment.
Use USE_LXQT
to select the components needed for the port.
See Using LXQt for more information.
17.53. makeinfo
Possible arguments: (none)
Add a build-time dependency on makeinfo
if it is not present in the base system.
17.54. makeself
Possible arguments: (none)
Indicates that the distribution files are makeself archives and sets the appropriate dependencies.
17.55. mate
Possible arguments: (none)
Provides an easy way to depend on MATE components.
The components should be listed in USE_MATE
.
The available components are:
autogen
caja
common
controlcenter
desktop
dialogs
docutils
icontheme
intlhack
intltool
libmatekbd
libmateweather
marco
menus
notificationdaemon
panel
pluma
polkit
session
settingsdaemon
The default dependency is build- and run-time, it can be changed with :build
or :run
.
For example:
USES= mate USE_MATE= menus:build intlhack
17.56. meson
Possible arguments: (none)
Provide support for Meson based projects.
For more information see Using meson
.
17.57. metaport
Possible arguments: (none)
Sets the following variables to make it easier to create a metaport: MASTER_SITES
, DISTFILES
, EXTRACT_ONLY
, NO_BUILD
, NO_INSTALL
, NO_MTREE
, NO_ARCH
.
17.58. mysql
Possible arguments: (none), version
, client
(default), server
, embedded
Provide support for MySQL
If no version is given, try to find the current installed version.
Fall back to the default version, MySQL-5.6.
The possible versions are 55
, 55m
, 55p
, 56
, 56p
, 56w
, 57
, 57p
, 80
, 100m
, 101m
, and 102m
.
The m
and p
suffixes are for the MariaDB and Percona variants of MySQL.
server
and embedded
add a build- and run-time dependency on the MySQL server.
When using server
or embedded
, add client
to also add a dependency on libmysqlclient.so.
A port can set IGNORE_WITH_MYSQL
if some versions are not supported.
The framework sets MYSQL_VER
to the detected MySQL version.
17.59. mono
Possible arguments: (none), nuget
Adds a dependency on the Mono (currently only C#) framework by setting the appropriate dependencies.
Specify nuget
when the port uses nuget packages.
NUGET_DEPENDS
needs to be set with the names and versions of the nuget packages in the format name=version
.
An optional package origin can be added using name=version:_origin_
.
The helper target, buildnuget
, will output the content of the NUGET_DEPENDS
based on the provided packages.config.
17.60. motif
Possible arguments: (none)
Uses x11-toolkits/open-motif as a library dependency.
End users can set WANT_LESSTIF
for the dependency to be on x11-toolkits/lesstif instead of x11-toolkits/open-motif.
17.61. ncurses
Possible arguments: (none), base
, port
Uses ncurses, and causes some useful variables to be set.
17.63. objc
Possible arguments: (none)
Add objective C dependencies (compiler, runtime library) if the base system does not support it.
17.64. openal
Possible arguments: al
, soft
(default), si
, alut
Uses OpenAL.
The backend can be specified, with the software implementation as the default.
The user can specify a preferred backend with WANT_OPENAL
.
Valid values for this knob are soft
(default) and si
.
17.65. pathfix
Possible arguments: (none)
Look for Makefile.in and configure in PATHFIX_WRKSRC
(defaults to WRKSRC
) and fix common paths to make sure they respect the FreeBSD hierarchy.
For example, it fixes the installation directory of pkgconfig’s .pc files to ${PREFIX}/libdata/pkgconfig.
If the port uses `USES=autoreconf
, Makefile.am will be added to PATHFIX_MAKEFILEIN
automatically.
If the port USES=cmake
it will look for CMakeLists.txt in PATHFIX_WRKSRC
.
If needed, that default filename can be changed with PATHFIX_CMAKELISTSTXT
.
17.66. pear
Possible arguments: env
Adds a dependency on devel/pear.
It will setup default behavior for software using the PHP Extension and Application Repository.
Using the env
arguments only sets up the PEAR environment variables.
See PEAR Modules for more information.
17.67. perl5
Possible arguments: (none)
Depends on Perl. The configuration is done using USE_PERL5
.
USE_PERL5
can contain the phases in which to use Perl, can be extract
, patch
, build
, run
, or test
.
USE_PERL5
can also contain configure
, modbuild
, or modbuildtiny
when Makefile.PL, Build.PL,
or Module::Build::Tiny’s flavor of Build.PL is required.
USE_PERL5
defaults to build run
.
When using configure
, modbuild
, or modbuildtiny
, build
and run
are implied.
See Using Perl for more information.
17.68. pgsql
Possible arguments: (none), X.Y
, X.Y+
, X.Y-
, X.Y-Z.A
Provide support for PostgreSQL.
Port maintainer can set version required.
Minimum and maximum versions or a range can be specified; for example, 9.0-
, 8.4+
, 8.4-9.2.
By default, the added dependency will be the client, but if the port requires additional components,
this can be done using WANT_PGSQL=component[:target]
;
for example, WANT_PGSQL=server:configure pltcl plperl
.
The available components are:
client
contrib
docs
pgtcl
plperl
plpython
pltcl
server
17.69. php
Possible arguments: (none), phpize
, ext
, zend
, build
, cli
, cgi
, mod
, web
, embed
, pecl
, flavors
, noflavors
Provide support for PHP. Add a runtime dependency on the default PHP version, lang/php56.
phpize
Use to build a PHP extension. Enables flavors.
ext
Use to build, install and register a PHP extension. Enables flavors.
zend
Use to build, install and register a Zend extension. Enables flavors.
build
Set PHP also as a build-time dependency.
cli
Needs the CLI version of PHP.
cgi
Needs the CGI version of PHP.
mod
Needs the Apache module for PHP.
web
Needs the Apache module or the CGI version of PHP.
embed
Needs the embedded library version of PHP.
pecl
Provide defaults for fetching PHP extensions from the PECL repository. Enables flavors.
flavors
Enable automatic PHP flavors generation. Flavors will be generated for all PHP versions, except the ones present in
IGNORE_WITH_PHP
.noflavors
Disable automatic PHP flavors generation. Must only be used with extensions provided by PHP itself.
Variables are used to specify which PHP modules are required, as well as which version of PHP are supported.
USE_PHP
The list of required PHP extensions at run-time. Add
:build
to the extension name to add a build-time dependency. Example:pcre xml:build gettext
IGNORE_WITH_PHP
The port does not work with PHP of the given version. For possible values look at the content of
_ALL_PHP_VERSIONS
in Mk/Uses/php.mk.
When building a PHP or Zend extension with :ext
or :zend
, these variables can be set:
PHP_MODNAME
The name of the PHP or Zend extension. Default value is
${PORTNAME}
.PHP_HEADER_DIRS
A list of subdirectories from which to install header files. The framework will always install the header files that are present in the same directory as the extension.
PHP_MOD_PRIO
The priority at which to load the extension. It is a number between
00
and99
.For extensions that do not depend on any extension, the priority is automatically set to
20
, for extensions that depend on another extension, the priority is automatically set to30
. Some extensions may need to be loaded before every other extension, for example www/php56-opcache. Some may need to be loaded after an extension with a priority of30
. In that case, addPHP_MOD_PRIO=XX
in the port’s Makefile. For example:USES= php:ext USE_PHP= wddx PHP_MOD_PRIO= 40
These variables are available to use in PKGNAMEPREFIX
or PKGNAMESUFFIX
:
PHP_PKGNAMEPREFIX
Contains
php_XY_-
where XY is the current flavor’s PHP version. Use with PHP extensions and modules.PHP_PKGNAMESUFFIX
Contains
-php_XY_
where XY is the current flavor’s PHP version. Use with PHP applications.PECL_PKGNAMEPREFIX
Contains
php_XY_-pecl-
where XY is the current flavor’s PHP version. Use with PECL modules.
With flavors, all PHP extensions, PECL extensions, PEAR modules must have a different package name,
so they must all use one of these three variables in their |
17.70. pkgconfig
Possible arguments: (none), build
(default), run
, both
Uses devel/pkgconf.
With no arguments or with the build
argument, it implies pkg-config
as a build-time dependency.
run
implies a run-time dependency and both
implies both run-time and build-time dependencies.
17.71. pure
Possible arguments: (none), ffi
Uses lang/pure.
Largely used for building related pure ports.
With the ffi
argument, it implies devel/pure-ffi as a run-time dependency.
17.72. pyqt
Possible arguments: (none), 4
, 5
Uses PyQt. If the port is part of PyQT itself, set PYQT_DIST
.
Use USE_PYQT
to select the components the port needs.
The available components are:
core
dbus
dbussupport
demo
designer
designerplugin
doc
gui
multimedia
network
opengl
qscintilla2
sip
sql
svg
test
webkit
xml
xmlpatterns
These components are only available with PyQT4:
assistant
declarative
help
phonon
script
scripttools
These components are only available with PyQT5:
multimediawidgets
printsupport
qml
serialport
webkitwidgets
widgets
The default dependency for each component is build- and run-time, to select only build or run, add _build
or _run
to the component name. For example:
USES= pyqt USE_PYQT= core doc_build designer_run
17.73. python
Possible arguments: (none), X.Y
, X.Y+
, -X.Y
, X.Y-Z.A
, patch
, build
, run
, test
Uses Python. A supported version or version range can be specified.
If Python is only needed at build time, run time or for the tests, it can be set as a build, run or test dependency with build
, run
, or test
.
If Python is also needed during the patch phase, use patch
.
See Using Python for more information.
PYTHON_NO_DEPENDS=yes
can be used when the variables exported by the framework are needed but a dependency on Python is not.
It can happen when using with USES=shebangfix
, and the goal is only to fix the shebangs but not add a dependency on Python.
17.74. qmail
Possible arguments: (none), build
, run
, both
, vars
Uses mail/qmail. With the build
argument, it implies qmail
as a build-time dependency.
run
implies a run-time dependency.
Using no argument or the both
argument implies both run-time and build-time dependencies.
vars
will only set QMAIL variables for the port to use.
17.75. qmake
Possible arguments: (none), norecursive
, outsource
, no_env
, no_configure
Uses QMake for configuring. For more information see Using qmake
.
17.76. qt
Possible arguments: 5
, no_env
Add dependency on Qt components.
no_env
is passed directly to USES= qmake
.
See Using Qt for more information.
17.77. qt-dist
Possible arguments: (none) or 5
and (none) or one of 3d
, activeqt
, androidextras
, base
, canvas3d
, charts
, connectivity
, datavis3d
, declarative
, doc
, gamepad
, graphicaleffects
, imageformats
, location
, macextras
, multimedia
, networkauth
, purchasing
, quickcontrols2
, quickcontrols
, remoteobjects
, script
, scxml
, sensors
, serialbus
, serialport
, speech
, svg
, tools
, translations
, virtualkeyboard
, wayland
, webchannel
, webengine
, websockets
, webview
, winextras
, x11extras
, xmlpatterns
Provides support for building Qt 5 components. It takes care of setting up the appropriate configuration environment for the port to build.
The port is Qt 5’s networkauth
component, which is part of the networkauth
distribution file.
PORTNAME= networkauth DISTVERSION= ${QT5_VERSION} USES= qt-dist:5
If PORTNAME
does not match the component name, it can be passed as an argument to qt-dist
.
The port is Qt 5’s gui
component, which is part of the base
distribution file.
PORTNAME= gui DISTVERSION= ${QT5_VERSION} USES= qt-dist:5,base
17.78. readline
Possible arguments: (none), port
Uses readline as a library dependency, and sets CPPFLAGS
and LDFLAGS
as necessary.
If the port
argument is used or if readline is not present in the base system, add a dependency on devel/readline
17.79. samba
Possible arguments: build
, env
, lib
, run
Handle dependency on Samba.
env
will not add any dependency and only set up the variables.
build
and run
will add build-time and run-time dependency on smbd. lib
will add a dependency on libsmbclient.so.
The variables that are exported are:
SAMBAPORT
The origin of the default Samba port.
SAMBAINCLUDES
The location of the Samba header files.
SAMBALIBS
The directory where the Samba shared libraries are available.
17.80. scons
Possible arguments: (none)
Provide support for the use of devel/scons.
See Using scons
for more information.
17.81. shared-mime-info
Possible arguments: (none)
Uses update-mime-database from misc/shared-mime-info.
This uses will automatically add a post-install step in such a way that the port itself still can specify there own post-install step if needed.
It also add an @shared-mime-info
entry to the plist.
17.82. shebangfix
Possible arguments: (none)
A lot of software uses incorrect locations for script interpreters, most notably /usr/bin/perl and /bin/bash.
The shebangfix macro fixes shebang lines in scripts listed in SHEBANG_REGEX
, SHEBANG_GLOB
, or SHEBANG_FILES
.
SHEBANG_REGEX
Contains one extended regular expressions, and is used with the
-iregex
argument of find(1). SeeUSES=shebangfix
withSHEBANG_REGEX
.SHEBANG_GLOB
Contains a list of patterns used with the
-name
argument of find(1). SeeUSES=shebangfix
withSHEBANG_GLOB
.SHEBANG_FILES
Contains a list of files or sh(1) globs. The shebangfix macro is run from
${WRKSRC}
, soSHEBANG_FILES
can contain paths that are relative to${WRKSRC}
. It can also deal with absolute paths if files outside of${WRKSRC}
require patching. SeeUSES=shebangfix
withSHEBANG_FILES
.
Currently Bash, Java, Ksh, Lua, Perl, PHP, Python, Ruby, Tcl, and Tk are supported by default.
There are three configuration variables:
SHEBANG_LANG
The list of supported interpreters.
_interp__CMD
The path to the command interpreter on FreeBSD. The default value is
${LOCALBASE}/bin/interp
._interp__OLD_CMD
The list of wrong invocations of interpreters. These are typically obsolete paths, or paths used on other operating systems that are incorrect on FreeBSD. They will be replaced by the correct path in
_interp__CMD
.These will always be part of
interp__OLD_CMD
:"/usr/bin/env _interp
" /bin/interp /usr/bin/interp /usr/local/bin/interp
._interp__OLD_CMD
contain multiple values. Any entry with spaces must be quoted. See Specifying all the Paths When Adding an Interpreter toUSES=shebangfix
.
The fixing of shebangs is done during the Correct paths for supported interpreters are available in |
When used with |
USES=shebangfix
To add another interpreter, set SHEBANG_LANG
.
For example:
SHEBANG_LANG= lua
USES=shebangfix
If it was not already defined, and there were no default values for _interpOLD_CMD
and _interp
CMD
the Ksh entry could be defined as:
SHEBANG_LANG= ksh ksh_OLD_CMD= "/usr/bin/env ksh" /bin/ksh /usr/bin/ksh ksh_CMD= ${LOCALBASE}/bin/ksh
Some software uses strange locations for an interpreter. For example, an application might expect Python to be located in /opt/bin/python2.7. The strange path to be replaced can be declared in the port Makefile:
python_OLD_CMD= /opt/bin/python2.7
USES=shebangfix
with SHEBANG_REGEX
To fix all the files in ${WRKSRC}/scripts
ending in .pl, .sh, or .cgi do:
USES= shebangfix SHEBANG_REGEX= ./scripts/.*\.(sh|pl|cgi)
|
USES=shebangfix
with SHEBANG_GLOB
To fix all the files in ${WRKSRC}
ending in .pl or .sh, do:
USES= shebangfix SHEBANG_GLOB= *.sh *.pl
USES=shebangfix
with SHEBANG_FILES
To fix the files script/foobar.pl and script/*.sh in ${WRKSRC}
, do:
USES= shebangfix SHEBANG_FILES= scripts/foobar.pl scripts/*.sh
17.83. sqlite
Possible arguments: (none), 2
, 3
Add a dependency on SQLite.
The default version used is 3, but version 2 is also possible using the :2
modifier.
17.84. ssl
Possible arguments: (none), build
, run
Provide support for OpenSSL.
A build- or run-time only dependency can be specified using build
or run
.
These variables are available for the port’s use, they are also added to MAKE_ENV
:
OPENSSLBASE
Path to the OpenSSL installation base.
OPENSSLDIR
Path to OpenSSL’s configuration files.
OPENSSLLIB
Path to the OpenSSL libraries.
OPENSSLINC
Path to the OpenSSL includes.
OPENSSLRPATH
If defined, the path the linker needs to use to find the OpenSSL libraries.
If a port does not build with an OpenSSL flavor, set the BROKEN_SSL= libressl BROKEN_SSL_REASON_libressl= needs features only available in OpenSSL |
17.85. tar
Possible arguments: (none), Z
, bz2
, bzip2
, lzma
, tbz
, tbz2
, tgz
, txz
, xz
Set EXTRACT_SUFX
to .tar
, .tar.Z
, .tar.bz2
, .tar.bz2
, .tar.lzma
, .tbz
, .tbz2
, .tgz
, .txz
or .tar.xz
respectively.
17.86. tcl
Possible arguments: version, wrapper
, build
, run
, tea
Add a dependency on Tcl. A specific version can be requested using version.
The version can be empty, one or more exact version numbers (currently 84
, 85
, or 86
), or a minimal version number (currently 84+
, 85+
or 86+
).
To only request a non version specific wrapper, use wrapper
.
A build- or run-time only dependency can be specified using build
or run
.
To build the port using the Tcl Extension Architecture, use tea
.
After including bsd.port.pre.mk the port can inspect the results using these variables:
TCL_VER
: chosen major.minor version of TclTCLSH
: full path of the Tcl interpreterTCL_LIBDIR
: path of the Tcl librariesTCL_INCLUDEDIR
: path of the Tcl C header filesTK_VER
: chosen major.minor version of TkWISH
: full path of the Tk interpreterTK_LIBDIR
: path of the Tk librariesTK_INCLUDEDIR
: path of the Tk C header files
17.87. terminfo
Possible arguments: (none)
Adds @terminfo
to the plist.
Use when the port installs *.terminfo files in ${PREFIX}/share/misc.
17.88. tk
Same as arguments for tcl
Small wrapper when using both Tcl and Tk. The same variables are returned as when using Tcl.
17.89. uidfix
Possible arguments: (none)
Changes some default behavior (mostly variables) of the build system to allow installing this port as a normal user. Try this in the port before using USES=fakeroot or patching.
17.90. uniquefiles
Possible arguments: (none), dirs
Make files or directories 'unique', by adding a prefix or suffix.
If the dirs
argument is used, the port needs a prefix (and only a prefix) based on UNIQUE_PREFIX
for standard directories DOCSDIR
, EXAMPLESDIR
, DATADIR
, WWWDIR
, ETCDIR
.
These variables are available for ports:
UNIQUE_PREFIX
: The prefix to be used for directories and files. Default:${PKGNAMEPREFIX}
.UNIQUE_PREFIX_FILES
: A list of files that need to be prefixed. Default: empty.UNIQUE_SUFFIX
: The suffix to be used for files. Default:${PKGNAMESUFFIX}
.UNIQUE_SUFFIX_FILES
: A list of files that need to be suffixed. Default: empty.
17.91. varnish
Possible arguments: 4
, 6
Handle dependencies on Varnish Cache.
4
will add a dependency on www/varnish4.
6
will add a dependency on www/varnish6.
17.92. webplugin
Possible arguments: (none), ARGS
Automatically create and remove symbolic links for each application that supports the webplugin framework.
ARGS
can be one of:
gecko
: support plug-ins based on Geckonative
: support plug-ins for Gecko, Opera, and WebKit-GTKlinux
: support Linux plug-insall
(default, implicit): support all plug-in types(individual entries): support only the browsers listed
These variables can be adjusted:
WEBPLUGIN_FILES
: No default, must be set manually. The plug-in files to install.WEBPLUGIN_DIR
: The directory to install the plug-in files to, default PREFIX/lib/browser_plugins/WEBPLUGIN_NAME. Set this if the port installs plug-in files outside of the default directory to prevent broken symbolic links.WEBPLUGIN_NAME
: The final directory to install the plug-in files into, defaultPKGBASE
.
17.93. xfce
Possible arguments: (none), gtk2
Provide support for Xfce related ports. See Using Xfce for details.
The gtk2
argument specifies that the port requires GTK2 support.
It adds additional features provided by some core components, for example, x11/libxfce4menu and x11-wm/xfce4-panel.
17.94. xorg
Possible arguments: (none)
Provides an easy way to depend on X.org components.
The components should be listed in USE_XORG
.
The available components are:
Name | Description |
---|---|
| DMX extension library |
| The fontenc Library |
| Create an index of X font files in a directory |
| Inter Client Exchange library for X11 |
| The FS library |
| Generic PCI access library |
| Low-level pixel manipulation library |
| Session Management library for X11 |
| X11 library |
| Authentication Protocol library for X11 |
| X Athena Widgets library |
| X Athena Widgets library |
| X Athena Widgets library |
| X.Org bitmaps data |
| The X protocol C-language Binding (XCB) library |
| X Composite extension library |
| X client-side cursor loading library |
| X Damage extension library |
| X Display Manager Control Protocol library |
| X11 Extension library |
| X Fixes extension library |
| X font library |
| X font library |
| Client-sided font API for X applications |
| X Input extension library |
| X11 Xinerama library |
| XKB file library |
| X Miscellaneous Utilities libraries |
| X Miscellaneous Utilities libraries |
| X.Org development aclocal macros |
| X.Org X server and related programs |
| xorg protocol headers |
| X Pixmap library |
| X Present Extension library |
| X Resize and Rotate extension library |
| X Render extension library |
| X Resource usage library |
| The XScrnSaver library |
| Shared memory 'SyncFence' synchronization primitive |
| X Toolkit library |
| Abstract network code for X |
| X Test extension |
| X Video Extension library |
| X Video Extension Motion Compensation library |
| X DGA Extension |
| X Vidmode Extension |
17.95. xorg-cat
Possible arguments: app
, data
, doc
, driver
, font
, lib
, proto
, util
, xserver
and (none) or one off autotools
(default), meson
Provide support for building Xorg components. It takes care of setting up common dependencies and an appropriate configuration environment needed. This is intended only for Xorg components.
The category has to match upstream categories.
The second argument is the build system to use. autotools is the default, but meson is also supported.
Chapter 18. __FreeBSD_version
Values
Here is a convenient list of __FreeBSD_version
values as defined in sys/param.h:
18.1. FreeBSD 14 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
1400000 | January 22, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT. | |
1400001 | January 23, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after adding symlink support to lockless lookup. | |
1400002 | January 26, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after fixing a clang assertion when building the devel/onetbb port. | |
1400003 | January 28, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after adding various LinuxKPI bits conflicting with drm-kmod. | |
1400004 | February 8, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after kernel interfaces for dispatching cryptographic operations were changed. | |
1400005 | February 17, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after changing the API of ptrace(2) | |
1400006 | March 17, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after adding sndstat(4) enumeration ioctls. | |
1400007 | April 6, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after fixing wrong | |
1400008 | April 11, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after changing the internal KAPI between the krpc and NFS modules. | |
1400009 | April 20, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after adding TCP LRO support for VLAN and VxLAN. | |
1400010 | April 21, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after changing the sndstat(4) ioctls nvlist schema and definitions. | |
1400015 | May 25, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after adding more LinuxKPI changes needing adjustments to drm-kmod. | |
1400016 | May 25, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after removing support for KTLS software backends. | |
1400017 | May 25, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after adding | |
1400018 | May 30, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after allowing the VFS_QUOTACTL(9) implementation to indicate busy state changes. | |
1400019 | Jun 7, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after including | |
1400020 | Jun 9, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after adding macros for | |
1400021 | Jun 10, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after adding a | |
1400022 | Jun 11, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after commit e1a907a25cfa changed the internal KAPI between the krpc and nfsserver modules. | |
1400023 | Jun 13, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after upgrading llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to llvmorg-12.0.0-0-gd28af7c654d8, a.k.a. 12.0.0 release. | |
1400024 | Jun 18, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after various additions to LinuxKPI. | |
1400025 | Jul 5, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after various additions to LinuxKPI. | |
1400026 | Jul 16, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after changing the internal KAPI between the nfscommon and nfsd modules. | |
1400027 | Jul 28, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after adding out-of-line LSE atomics helpers to libcompiler_rt.a on aarch64. | |
1400028 | Jul 31, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after making FPU sections thread-safe in the LinuxKPI. | |
1400029 | Aug 5, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after adding fspacectl(2), vn_deallocate(9) and VOP_DEALLOCATE(9). | |
1400030 | Aug 12, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after VOP_DEALLOCATE(9) parameter changes and addition of fspacectl(2) support to POSIX shared memory. | |
1400031 | Aug 24, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after changing fspacectl(2), vn_deallocate(9) and VOP_DEALLOCATE(9) to update rmsr.r_offset to a meaningful value. | |
1400032 | Aug 25, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after changing fspacectl(2), vn_deallocate(9) and VOP_DEALLOCATE(9) to make calculating the number of bytes zeroed easier. | |
1400033 | Sep 7, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after moving the socket buffer locks into the containing socket and renaming sb(un)lock to SOCK_IO_RECV_LOCK, SOCK_IO_RECV_UNLOCK, SOCK_IO_SEND_LOCK, and SOCK_IO_SEND_UNLOCK. | |
1400034 | Sep 29, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after LinuxKPI changes. | |
1400035 | Oct 4, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after splitting libtinfow from libncurses. | |
1400036 | Oct 6, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after extending the AES-CCM and Chacha20-Poly1305 ciphers in OCF to support multiple nonce lengths. | |
1400037 | Oct 11, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after removal of thread argument from VOP_STAT(9) and fo_stat. | |
1400038 | Oct 17, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after LinuxKPI gained support of lazy BAR allocation. | |
1400039 | Oct 19, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after page allocator changes. | |
1400040 | Oct 30, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after libdialog shared library version number bump. | |
1400041 | Nov 6, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after changing the arguments for VOP_ALLOCATE(9). | |
1400042 | Nov 13, 2021 | 14.0-CURRENT after upgrading llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to llvmorg-13.0.0-0-gd7b669b3a303, a.k.a. 13.0.0 release. |
18.2. FreeBSD 13 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
1300000 | October 19, 2018 | 13.0-CURRENT. | |
1300001 | October 25, 2018 | 13.0-CURRENT after bumping OpenSSL shared library version numbers. | |
1300002 | October 25, 2018 | 13.0-CURRENT after restoration of sys/joystick.h. | |
1300003 | November 2, 2018 | 13.0-CURRENT after vop_symlink API change ( | |
1300004 | November 23, 2018 | 13.0-CURRENT after enabling crtbegin and crtend code. | |
1300005 | December 11, 2018 | 13.0-CURRENT after enabling UFS inode checksums. | |
1300006 | December 24, 2018 | 13.0-CURRENT after fixing sys/random.h include to be usable from C++. | |
1300007 | December 30, 2018 | 13.0-CURRENT after changing the size of | |
1300008 | January 4, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding | |
1300009 | January 20, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after | |
1300010 | January 27, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after increasing | |
1300011 | February 12, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after renameat(2) has been corrected to work with kernels built with the | |
1300012 | February 12, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after | |
1300013 | February 19, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after the removal of drm and drm2. | |
1300014 | March 4, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after upgrading clang, llvm, lld, lldb, compiler-rt and libc++ to 8.0.0 rc3. | |
1300015 | March 15, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after deanonymizing thread and proc state enums, so userland applications can use them without redefining the value names. | |
1300016 | March 16, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after enabling LLVM OpenMP 8.0.0 rc5 on amd64 by default. | |
1300017 | March 19, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after exposing the Rx mbuf buffer size to drivers in iflib. | |
1300018 | March 16, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after introduction of funlinkat syscall in 345982. | |
1300019 | April 16, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after addition of is_random_seeded(9) to random(4). | |
1300020 | April 18, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after restoring random(4) availability tradeoff prior to 346250 and adding new tunables and diagnostic sysctls for programmatically discovering early seeding problems after boot. | |
1300021 | April 24, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after LinuxKPI uses bus_dma(9) to be compatible with an IOMMU. | |
1300022 | May 4, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after fixing regression issue after 346645 in the LinuxKPI. | |
1300023 | May 6, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after list-ifying kernel dump device configuration. | |
1300024 | May 8, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after bumping the Mellanox driver version numbers (mlx4en(4); mlx5en(4)). | |
1300025 | May 13, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after renaming | |
1300026 | May 14, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding context member to ww_mutex in LinuxKPI. | |
1300027 | May 14, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding prepare to pm_ops in LinuxKPI. | |
1300028 | May 17, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after removal of bm, cs, de, ed, ep, ex, fe, pcn, sf, sn, tl, tx, txp, vx, wb, and xe drivers. | |
1300029 | May 20, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after removing some header pollution due to sys/eventhandler.h. Affected files may now need to explicitly include one or more of sys/eventhandler.h, sys/ktr.h, sys/lock.h, or sys/mutex.h, when the missing header may have been included implicitly prior to 1300029. | |
1300030 | May 29, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding relocation support to libdwarf on powerpc64 to fix handling of DWARF information on unlinked objects. Original commit in 348347. | |
1300031 | June 8, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding dpcpu and vnet section fixes to i386 kernel modules to avoid panics in certain conditions. i386 kernel modules need to be recompiled with the linker script magic in place or they will refuse to load. | |
1300032 | June 17, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after separating kernel | |
1300033 | June 21, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after additions to LinuxKPI’s | |
1300034 | June 24, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after NAND and NANDFS removal. | |
1300035 | July 8, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after merging the vm_page hold and wire mechanisms. | |
1300036 | July 13, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding | |
1300037 | July 24, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after removal of libcap_random(3). | |
1300038 | July 30, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after removal of gzip’ed a.out support. | |
1300039 | August 7, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after merge of fusefs from projects/fuse2. | |
1300040 | August 16, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after deletion of sys/dir.h which has been deprecated since 1997. | |
(not changed) | August 23, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after changing most arguments to ping6(8). | |
1300041 | August 25, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after removal of zlib 1.0.4 after the completion of kernel zlib unification. | |
1300042 | August 27, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after addition of kernel-side support for in-kernel TLS. | |
1300043 | September 2, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after removal of gets(3). | |
1300044 | September 2, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding sysfs create/remove functions that handles multiple files in one call to the LinuxKPI. | |
1300045 | September 3, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding sysctlbyname(3) system call. | |
1300046 | September 6, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after LinuxKPI sysfs improvements. | |
1300047 | September 9, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after changing the synchonization rules for vm_page reference counting.. | |
1300048 | September 25, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding a shm_open2 syscall to support the upcoming memfd_create(2) syscall. | |
1300049 | October 7, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after factoring out the VNET shutdown check into an own vnet structure field. | |
1300050 | October 9, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after updating llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to 9.0.0 final release r372316. | |
1300051 | October 17, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after splitting out a more generic debugnet(4) from netdump(4). | |
1300052 | October 17, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after promoting the page busy field to a first class lock that no longer requires the object lock for consistency. | |
1300053 | October 17, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after implementing NetGDB. | |
1300054 | October 21, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after removing obsoleted KPIs that were used to access interface address lists. | |
1300055 | November 4, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after enabling device class group attributes in the LinuxKPI. | |
1300056 | November 7, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after fixing a potential OOB read security issue in libc++. | |
1300057 | November 13, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding support for | |
1300058 | November 18, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after widening the vm_page aflags field to 16 bits. | |
1300059 | November 18, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after converting the in-tree sysent targets to use the new makesyscalls.lua. | |
1300060 | November 20, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding /etc/os-release as a symbolic link to /var/run/os-release. | |
1300061 | November 21, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding functions to bitstring(3) to find contiguous sequences of set or unset bits. | |
1300062 | December 2, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding TCP_STATS support. | |
1300063 | December 8, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after removal of VI_DOOMED (use VN_IS_DOOMED instead). | |
1300064 | December 9, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after correcting the C++ version check for declaring timespec_get(3). | |
1300065 | December 12, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding sigsetop extensions commonly found in musl libc and glibc. | |
1300066 | December 12, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after changing the internal interface between the NFS modules as part of the introduction of NFS 4.2. | |
1300067 | December 13, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after removing the deprecated | |
1300068 | December 16, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after doubling the value of | |
1300069 | December 24, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after the addition of busdma templates. | |
1300070 | December 27, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after eliminating the last MI difference in AT_* definitions (for powerpc). | |
1300071 | December 27, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after making USB statistics be per-device instead of per bus. | |
1300072 | December 29, 2019 | 13.0-CURRENT after removal of | |
1300073 | January 2, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after removing arm/arm as a valid target. | |
1300074 | January 3, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after removing flags argument from | |
1300075 | January 6, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding own counter for cancelled USB transfers. | |
1300076 | January 8, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after pushing vnop implementation into the fileop layer in posix_fallocate(2). | |
(not changed) | February 2, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after removal of armv5 architecture code from the src tree. | |
1300077 | February 3, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after removal of sparc64 architecture code from the src tree. | |
1300078 | February 17, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after changing | |
1300079 | February 20, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after upgrading ncurses to 6.2.x | |
1300080 | February 20, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding realpathat syscall to VFS. | |
1300081 | February 21, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after recent linuxkpi changes. | |
1300082 | March 1, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after removal of bktr(4). | |
1300083 | March 10, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after removal of amd(8), r358821. | |
1300084 | March 10, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after updating llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to 10.0.0-rc3 c290cb61fdc. | |
1300085 | March 23, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after the import of the kyua test framework. | |
1300086 | March 26, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after switching powerpc and powerpcspe to the lld linker. | |
1300087 | March 27, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after refactoring the driver and consumer interfaces for in-kernel cryptography. | |
1300088 | April 1, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after removing support for procfs process debugging. | |
1300089 | April 8, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after cloning the RCU interface into a sleepable and a non-sleepable part in the LinuxKPI. | |
1300090 | April 9, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after removing the old NFS lock device driver that uses Giant. | |
1300091 | April 12, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after implementing a close_range(2) syscall. | |
1300092 | April 14, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after reworking unmapped mbufs in KTLS to carry ext_pgs in the mbuf itself. | |
1300093 | April 27, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding support for kernel TLS receive offload. | |
1300094 | May 7, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after linuxkpi changes. | |
1300095 | May 20, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding HyperV socket support for FreeBSD guests. | |
1300096 | May 23, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after updating llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to 10.0.1 rc1 f79cd71e145. | |
1300097 | June 2, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after implementing | |
1300098 | June 14, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after changing the | |
1300099 | June 20, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after making liblzma use libmd implementation of SHA256. | |
1300100 | June 26, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after changing the internal API between the NFS kernel modules. | |
1300101 | July 10, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after implementing the | |
1300102 | July 26, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after implementing lockless lookup in the VFS layer. | |
1300103 | August 1, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after making rights mandatory for NDINIT_ALL. | |
1300104 | August 2, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after vnode layout changes. | |
1300105 | August 5, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after | |
1300106 | August 11, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding an argument to | |
1300107 | August 11, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after change to clone the task struct fields related to RCU. | |
1300108 | August 14, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding a few wait_bit functions to the linuxkpi, which are needed for DRM from Linux v5.4. | |
1300109 | August 16, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after | |
(not changed) | August 16, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after updating llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to release/11.x llvmorg-11.0.0-rc1-47-gff47911ddfc. | |
1300110 | August 18, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after deleting the unused | |
1300111 | August 22, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding TLS support to the kernel RPC. | |
1300112 | August 25, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after merging OpenZFS support. | |
1300113 | August 25, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding atomic and bswap functions to libcompiler_rt. | |
1300114 | September 8, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after changing arm64 AT_HWCAP definitions for elf_aux_info(3). | |
1300115 | September 14, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after fixing crunchgen(1) application build with | |
1300116 | September 22, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after the introduction of the powerpc64le ARCH. | |
1300117 | September 23, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after reimplementing purgevfs to iterate vnodes instead of the entire hash. | |
1300118 | October 2, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding backlight support and | |
1300119 | October 6, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after populating the acquire context field of a | |
1300120 | October 13, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after the fix to arm64 write-only mappings. | |
1300121 | October 15, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after the addition of | |
1300122 | October 17, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after the addition of | |
1300123 | October 20, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after | |
1300124 | October 30, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding | |
1300125 | November 4, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after using a | |
1300126 | November 5, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after rationalizing per-cpu zones. | |
1300127 | November 6, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after moving | |
1300128 | November 9, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after LinuxKPI additions to implement ACPI bits required by | |
1300129 | November 12, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after retiring malloc_last_fail. | |
1300130 | November 17, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after p_pd / pwddesc split from p_fd / filedesc. | |
1300131 | December 7, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after removal of crypto file descriptors. | |
1300132 | December 15, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after improving handling of alternate settings in the USB stack. | |
1300133 | December 23, 2020 | 13.0-CURRENT after changing the internal API between the NFS and kernel RPC modules. | |
1300134 | January 7, 2021 | 13.0-CURRENT after factoring out the hardware-independent part of USB HID support to a new module. | |
1300135 | January 12, 2021 | 13.0-CURRENT after adding | |
1300136 | January 17, 2021 | 13.0-CURRENT after reimplementing LinuxKPI’s | |
1300137 | January 30, 2021 | 13.0-CURRENT after fixing a clang assertion when building the devel/onetbb port. | |
1300138 | February 1, 2021 | 13.0-ALPHA3 after adding lockless symlink lookup to vfs cache. | |
1300139 | February 2, 2021 | 13.0-ALPHA3 after adding various LinuxKPI bits conflicting with drm-kmod. | |
1300500 | February 5, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after releng/13.0 was branched. | |
1300501 | April 23, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after fixing rtld’s | |
1300501 | April 23, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after fixing rtld’s | |
1300502 | April 23, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after implementing | |
1300503 | April 23, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after changing the internal KAPI between the krpc and NFS. | |
1300504 | April 30, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after updating the LinuxKPI to accommodate the drm-kmod 5.5 update. | |
1300505 | May 10, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after changing the internal KAPI between the nscl.ko and nfscommon.ko modules. | |
1300506 | June 2, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after adding TCP LRO support for VLAN and VxLAN. | |
1300507 | June 2, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after adding a new member to the EPOCH(9) tracker structure. | |
1300508 | June 11, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after adding macros for | |
1300509 | June 14, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after adding a macro for | |
1300510 | June 26, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after changing the internal KAPI between the krpc and nfsd modules. | |
1300511 | July 7, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after changing | |
1300512 | July 18, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after various merges to LinuxKPI, OFED, net80211, and drivers. | |
1300513 | July 31, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after upgrading llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to llvmorg-12.0.1-0-gfed41342a82f, a.k.a. 12.0.1 release. | |
1300514 | August 3, 2021 | Incompatible changes to the KBI of internal interfaces between NFS requires rebuilding modules. | |
1300515 | September 22, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE returning to 13.0 KBI for linuxkpi. | |
1300518 | October 21, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after adding | |
1300519 | October 21, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after extending the AES-CCM and Chacha20-Poly1305 ciphers in OCF to support multiple nonce lengths. | |
1300521 | November 19, 2021 | 13.0-STABLE after various merges to LinuxKPI and net80211. |
18.3. FreeBSD 12 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
1200000 | July 7, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT. | |
1200001 | July 12, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing collation from | |
1200002 | August 18, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing unused and obsolete | |
1200003 | August 22, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after adding C++11 | |
1200004 | August 24, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after fixing LC*MASK for newlocale(3) and querylocale(3) (rev 304703). | |
1200005 | August 25, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing some ioctl interfaces in rev 304787 between the iSCSI userspace programs and the kernel. | |
1200006 | September 1, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after crunchgen(1) META_MODE fix in 305254. | |
1200007 | September 5, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after resolving a deadlock between | |
1200008 | September 15, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing the 4.3BSD compatible macro | |
1200009 | September 21, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing | |
1200010 | September 23, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after mounting msdosfs(5) with longnames support by default. | |
1200011 | October 1, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after adding | |
1200012 | October 2, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after net80211(4) changes (rev 306590, 306591). | |
1200013 | October 12, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after installing header files required development with libzfs_core. | |
1200014 | October 17, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after merging common code in rtwn(4) and urtwn(4), and adding support for 802.11ac devices. | |
1200015 | November 20, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after some ABI change for unbreaking powerpc. | |
1200016 | November 22, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing | |
1200017 | November 25, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after upgrading our copies of clang, llvm, lldb, compiler-rt and libc++ to 3.9.0 release, and adding lld 3.9.0. | |
1200018 | December 7, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after adding the | |
1200019 | December 16, 2016 | 12.0-CURRENT after starting to lay down the foundation for 11ac support. | |
1200020 | January 13, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing | |
1200021 | February 16, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing MCA and EISA support. | |
1200022 | February 21, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after making the LinuxKPI task struct persistent across system calls. | |
(not changed) | March 2, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing System V Release 4 binary compatibility support. | |
1200023 | March 2, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after upgrading our copies of clang, llvm, lld, lldb, compiler-rt and libc++ to 4.0.0. | |
1200024 | March 7, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after removal of pcap-int.h | |
1200025 | March 16, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after addition of the <dev/mmc/mmc_ioctl.h> header. | |
1200026 | March 16, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after hiding | |
1200027 | March 21, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after making CAM SIM lock optional. | |
1200028 | April 10, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after renaming | |
1200029 | April 19, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after the removal of | |
1200030 | April 24, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing NATM support including en(4), fatm(4), hatm(4), and patm(4). | |
1200031 | May 23, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after types | |
1200032 | June 8, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after removal of | |
1200033 | June 17, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after the type of the | |
1200034 | June 19, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after the NFS client and server were changed so that they actually use the 64bit | |
1200035 | June 24, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after the | |
1200036 | June 26, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing | |
1200037 | July 1, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after the cleanup and inlining of | |
1200038 | July 10, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after MMC CAM committed. (320844). | |
1200039 | July 22, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after upgrade of copies of clang, llvm, lld, lldb, compiler-rt and libc++ to 5.0.0 (trunk r308421). | |
1200040 | July 29, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after adding NFS client forced dismount support | |
1200041 | August 21, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after WRFSBASE instruction become operational on amd64. | |
1200042 | August 25, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after PLPMTUD counters were changed to use counter(9). | |
1200043 | August 28, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after dropping x86 CACHE_LINE_SIZE down to 64 bytes. | |
1200044 | September 8, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after implementing | |
1200045 | September 18, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after adding shared memory support to LinuxKPI. (323703). | |
1200046 | September 22, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after adding support for 32-bit compatibility IOCTLs to LinuxKPI. | |
1200047 | September 26, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing M_HASHTYPE_RSS_UDP_IPV4_EX. (324052). | |
1200048 | October 2, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after hiding | |
1200049 | October 4, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after adding the | |
1200050 | October 5, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after adding the | |
1200051 | October 9, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing libstand.a as a public interface. (324454). | |
1200052 | October 26, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after fixing | |
1200053 | November 7, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing | |
1200054 | November 15, 2017 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing the layout of | |
1200055 | January 9, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after adding | |
1200056 | January 14, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after upgrading clang, llvm, lld, lldb, compiler-rt and libc++ to 6.0.0 (branches/release_60 r321788). | |
1200057 | February 8, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after applying a clang 6.0.0 fix to make the wine ports build correctly. | |
1200058 | February 12, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after the lua loader was committed. | |
1200059 | March 2, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing the declaration of | |
1200060 | March 4, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after upgrading clang, llvm, lld, lldb, compiler-rt and libc++ to 6.0.0 release. | |
1200061 | April 6, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing syslog(3) to emit RFC 5424 formatted messages. | |
1200062 | April 12, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing the Netmap API. | |
1200063 | May 10, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after reworking CTL frontend and backend options to use nv(3), allow creating multiple ioctl frontend ports. | |
1200064 | May 22, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing the ifnet address and multicast address TAILQ to CK_STAILQ. | |
1200065 | May 28, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing dwatch(1) to allow '-E code' to override profile EVENT_DETAILS. | |
1200066 | June 1, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after removal of in-kernel pmc tables for Intel. | |
1200067 | June 9, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after adding DW_LANG constants to libdwarf. | |
1200068 | June 12, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing the interface between the NFS modules. | |
1200069 | June 15, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing | |
1200070 | July 2, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after inlining atomic(9) in modules on amd64 and i386 requiring all modules of consumers to be rebuilt for these architectures. | |
1200071 | July 4, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing the ABI and API of epoch(9) (335924) requiring modules of consumers to be rebuilt. | |
1200072 | July 5, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing the ABI and API of | |
1200073 | July 15, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after changing the ABI and API of | |
1200074 | July 16, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after updating the configuration of libstdc++ to make use of C99 functions. | |
1200075 | July 19, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after zfsloader being folded into loader, and after adding ntpd:ntpd as uid:gid 123:123, and after removing arm big-endian support (MACHINE_ARCH=armeb). | |
1200076 | July 30, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after KPI changes to timespecadd. | |
1200077 | August 10, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after timespec_get(3) was added to the system. | |
1200078 | August 15, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after exec.created hook for jails. | |
1200079 | August 19, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after converting | |
1200080 | August 22, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing the drm drivers. | |
1200081 | August 21, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after KPI changes to NVMe. | |
1200082 | August 24, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after reverting the removal of the drm drivers. | |
1200083 | August 26, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after removing | |
1200084 | September 5, 2018 | 12.0-CURRENT after updating objcopy(1) to properly handle little-endian MIPS64 object files. | |
1200085 | October 19, 2018 | 12.0-STABLE after updating OpenSSL to version 1.1.1. | |
1200086 | October 25, 2018 | 12.0-STABLE after updating OpenSSL shared library version numbers. | |
1200500 | November 16, 2018 | 12-STABLE after releng/12.0 was branched. | |
1200501 | January 6, 2019 | 12-STABLE after merge of fixing | |
1200502 | January 17, 2019 | 12-STABLE after enabling sys/random.h #include from C++. | |
1200503 | Febrary 15, 2019 | 12-STABLE after merge of fixing renameat(2) for CAPABILITIES kernels. | |
1200504 | March 15, 2019 | 12-STABLE after merging CCM for the benefit of the ZoF port. | |
1200505 | March 20, 2019 | 12-STABLE after merging support for selectively disabling ZFS without disabling loader. | |
1200506 | April 12, 2019 | 12-STABLE after merging llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp 8.0.0 final release r356365. | |
1200507 | April 17, 2019 | 12-STABLE after MFC of iflib changes in 345303, 345658, and partially of 345305. | |
1200508 | April 27, 2019 | 12-STABLE after ether_gen_addr availability. | |
1200509 | May 16, 2019 | 12-STABLE after bumping the Mellanox driver version numbers (mlx4en(4); mlx5en(4)). | |
1200510 | May 21, 2019 | 12-STABLE after change to struct in linuxkpi from 348035. | |
1200511 | May 24, 2019 | 12-STABLE after MFC of 347843: adding group_leader member to struct task_struct to the LinuxKPI. | |
1200512 | May 24, 2019 | 12-STABLE after adding context member to ww_mutex in LinuxKPI. | |
1200513 | July 5, 2019 | 12-STABLE after MFC of epoch(9) changes: 349763, 340404, 340415, 340417, 340419, 340420. | |
1200514 | July 17, 2019 | 12-STABLE after additions to LinuxKPI’s rcu list. | |
1200515 | August 11, 2019 | 12-STABLE after MFC of 349891 (reorganize the SRCS lists as one file per line, and then alphabetize them) and 349972 (add | |
1200516 | August 20, 2019 | 12-STABLE after MFC of various changes to iflib 351276. | |
1200517 | September 9, 2019 | 12-STABLE after adding sysfs create/remove functions that handles multiple files in one call to the LinuxKPI. | |
1200518 | September 10, 2019 | 12-STABLE after additional updates to LinuxKPI’s sysfs. | |
1200519 | September 15, 2019 | 12-STABLE after MFC of the new fusefs driver. | |
1201000 | September 20, 2019 | releng/12.1 branched from stable/12@r352480. | |
1201500 | September 20, 2019 | 12-STABLE after branching releng/12.1. | |
1201501 | November 10, 2019 | 12-STABLE after fixing a potential OOB read security issue in libc++. | |
1201502 | November 11, 2019 | 12-STABLE after enabling device class group attributes in the LinuxKPI. | |
1201503 | November 21, 2019 | 12-STABLE after adding support for | |
1201504 | November 10, 2019 | 12-STABLE after correcting the C++ version check for declaring timespec_get(3). | |
1201505 | December 19, 2019 | 12-STABLE after adding sigsetop extensions commonly found in musl libc and glibc. | |
1201506 | December 21, 2019 | 12-STABLE after doubling the value of | |
1201507 | January 2, 2020 | 12-STABLE after adding functions to bitstring(3) to find contiguous sequences of set or unset bits. | |
1201508 | January 6, 2020 | 12-STABLE after making USB statistics be per-device instead of per bus. | |
1201509 | January 7, 2020 | 12-STABLE after updating llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to 9.0.0 final release r372316. | |
1201510 | January 13, 2020 | 12-STABLE after adding own counter for cancelled USB transfers. | |
1201511 | January 31, 2020 | 12-STABLE after adding /etc/os-release as a symbolic link to /var/run/os-release. | |
1201512 | February 6, 2020 | 12-STABLE after recent LinuxKPI changes. | |
1201513 | Apr 15, 2020 | 12-STABLE after cloning the RCU interface into a sleepable and a non-sleepable part in the LinuxKPI. | |
1201514 | May 1, 2020 | 12-STABLE after implementing full bus_dma(9) support in the LinuxKPI and pulling in all dependencies. | |
1201515 | May 1, 2020 | 12-STABLE after updating llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to 10.0.0 release. | |
1201516 | May 4, 2020 | 12-STABLE after moving | |
1201517 | May 21, 2020 | 12-STABLE after renaming | |
1201518 | June 18, 2020 | 12-STABLE after implementing | |
1201519 | July 4, 2020 | 12-STABLE after making liblzma use libmd implementation of SHA256. | |
1201520 | July 24, 2020 | 12-STABLE after updating llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to 10.0.1 release. | |
1201521 | August 3, 2020 | 12-STABLE after implementing the | |
1201522 | August 4, 2020 | 12-STABLE after adding sysctlbyname system call. | |
1201523 | August 19, 2020 | 12-STABLE after change to clone the task struct fields related to RCU. | |
1201524 | September 5, 2020 | 12-STABLE after splitting XDR off into a separate kernel module, to minimize ZFS dependencies. | |
1201525 | September 8, 2020 | 12-STABLE after adding atomic and bswap functions to libcompiler_rt. | |
1201526 | September 10, 2020 | 12-STABLE after updating net80211 and kernel privilege checking API changes. | |
1202000 | September 11, 2020 | releng/12.2 branched from stable/12@r365618. | |
1202500 | September 11, 2020 | 12-STABLE after branching releng/12.2. | |
1202501 | September 12, 2020 | 12-STABLE after followup commits to libcompiler_rt. | |
1202502 | September 16, 2020 | 12-STABLE after fixing crunchgen(1) application build with | |
1202503 | October 20, 2020 | 12-STABLE after populating the acquire context field of a | |
1202504 | November 9, 2020 | 12-STABLE after the addition of ptsname_r(3). | |
1202505 | December 28, 2020 | 12-STABLE after improving handling of alternate settings in the USB stack. | |
1202506 | April 30, 2021 | 12-STABLE after changing the internal KAPI between the krpc and NFS. | |
1202507 | May 10, 2021 | 12-STABLE after changing the internal KAPI between the nscl.ko and nfscommon.ko modules. |
18.4. FreeBSD 11 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
1100000 | October 10, 2013 | 11.0-CURRENT. | |
1100001 | October 19, 2013 | 11.0-CURRENT after addition of support for "first boot" rc.d scripts, so ports can make use of this. | |
1100002 | November 5, 2013 | 11.0-CURRENT after dropping support for historic ioctls. | |
1100003 | November 17, 2013 | 11.0-CURRENT after iconv changes. | |
1100004 | December 15, 2013 | 11.0-CURRENT after the behavior change of | |
1100005 | December 28, 2013 | 11.0-CURRENT after 259951 - Do not coalesce entries in vm_map_stack(9). | |
1100006 | January 28, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrades of libelf and libdwarf. | |
1100007 | January 30, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrade of libc++ to 3.4 release. | |
1100008 | February 14, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after libc++ 3.4 ABI compatibility fix. | |
1100009 | February 16, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrade of llvm/clang to 3.4 release. | |
1100010 | February 28, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrade of ncurses to 5.9 release (rev 262629). | |
1100011 | March 13, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after ABI change in struct if_data. | |
1100012 | March 14, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of Novell IPX protocol support. | |
1100013 | March 14, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of AppleTalk protocol support. | |
1100014 | March 16, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after renaming <sys/capability.h> to <sys/capsicum.h> to avoid a clash with similarly named headers in other operating systems. A compatibility header is left in place to limit build breakage, but will be deprecated in due course. | |
1100015 | March 22, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after | |
1100016 | March 23, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after addition of | |
1100017 | April 4, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after GCC support for | |
1100018 | April 6, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after support for UDP-Lite protocol (RFC 3828). | |
1100019 | April 8, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after FreeBSD-SA-14:06.openssl (rev 264265). | |
1100020 | May 1, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after removing lindev in favor of having /dev/full by default (rev 265212). | |
1100021 | May 6, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after src.opts.mk changes, decoupling make.conf(5) from | |
1100022 | May 30, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after changes to strcasecmp(3), moving strcasecmp_l(3) and strncasecmp_l(3) from <string.h> to <strings.h> for POSIX 2008 compliance (rev 266865). | |
1100023 | June 13, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after the CUSE library and kernel module have been attached to the build by default. | |
1100024 | June 27, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after sysctl(3) API change. | |
1100025 | June 30, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after regex(3) library update to add ">" and "<" delimiters. | |
1100026 | July 1, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after the internal interface between the NFS modules, including the krpc, was changed by (rev 268115). | |
1100027 | July 8, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after FreeBSD-SA-14:17.kmem (rev 268431). | |
1100028 | July 21, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after hdestroy(3) compliance fix changed ABI. | |
1100029 | August 3, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after | |
1100030 | September 1, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after | |
1100031 | September 9, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after FreeBSD-SA-14:18.openssl (rev 269686). | |
1100032 | September 11, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after API changes to | |
1100033 | September 9, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after changing | |
1100034 | September 16, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after FreeBSD-SA-14:19.tcp (rev 271666). | |
1100035 | September 17, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after i915 HW context support. | |
1100036 | September 17, 2014 | Version bump to have ABI note distinguish binaries ready for strict mmap(2) flags checking (rev 271724). | |
1100037 | October 6, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after addition of explicit_bzero(3) (rev 272673). | |
1100038 | October 11, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after cleanup of TCP wrapper headers. | |
1100039 | October 18, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of | |
1100040 | October 21, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after FreeBSD-SA-14:23 (rev 273146). | |
1100041 | October 30, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after API changes to | |
1100042 | November 3, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after a change to | |
1100043 | November 4, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after enabling vt(4) by default. | |
1100044 | November 4, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding new libraries/utilities (dpv and figpar) for data throughput visualization. | |
1100045 | November 4, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after FreeBSD-SA-14:23, FreeBSD-SA-14:24, and FreeBSD-SA-14:25. | |
1100046 | November 13, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after | |
1100047 | November 13, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of no-at version of VFS syscalls helpers, like | |
1100048 | December 1, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after starting the process of removing the use of the deprecated "M_FLOWID" flag from the network code. | |
1100049 | December 9, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after importing an important fix to the LLVM vectorizer, which could lead to buffer overruns in some cases. | |
1100050 | December 12, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding AES-ICM and AES-GCM to OpenCrypto. | |
1100051 | December 23, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after removing old NFS client and server code from the kernel. | |
1100052 | December 31, 2014 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrade of clang, llvm and lldb to 3.5.0 release. | |
1100053 | January 7, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after MCLGET(9) gained a return value (rev 276750). | |
1100054 | January 15, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after rewrite of callout subsystem. | |
1100055 | January 22, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after reverting callout changes in 277213. | |
1100056 | January 23, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after addition of | |
1100057 | January 29, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of d_thread_t. | |
1100058 | February 5, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after addition of support for probing the SCSI VPD Extended Inquiry page (0x86). | |
1100059 | February 9, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after import of xz 5.2.0, which added multi-threaded compression and lzma gained libthr dependency (rev 278433). | |
1100060 | February 16, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after forwarding | |
1100061 | February 18, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after | |
1100062 | February 23, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after mtio(4) and sa(4) API and ioctl(2) additions. | |
1100063 | March 7, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding mutex support to the | |
1100064 | March 7, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding PPS support to USB serial drivers. | |
1100065 | March 15, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrading clang, llvm and lldb to 3.6.0. | |
1100066 | March 20, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of SSLv2 support from OpenSSL. | |
1100067 | March 25, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of SSLv2 support from fetch(1) and fetch(3). | |
1100068 | April 6, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after change to net.inet6.ip6.mif6table sysctl. | |
1100069 | April 15, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of const qualifier from iconv(3). | |
1100070 | April 16, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after moving ALTQ from contrib to net/altq. | |
1100071 | April 29, 2015 | ||
1100072 | May 1, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding reallocarray(3) in libc (rev 282314). | |
1100073 | May 8, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after extending the maximum number of allowed PCM channels in a PCM stream to 127 and decreasing the maximum number of sub-channels to 1. | |
1100074 | May 25, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding preliminary support for x86-64 Linux binaries (rev 283424), and upgrading clang and llvm to 3.6.1. | |
1100075 | May 27, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after | |
1100076 | June 4, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after disabled generation of legacy formatted password databases entries by default. | |
1100077 | June 10, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after API changes to | |
1100078 | August 12, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after crunchgen(1) changes from 284356 to 285986. | |
1100079 | August 18, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after import of jemalloc 4.0.0 (rev 286866). | |
1100080 | October 5, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrading clang, llvm, lldb, compiler-rt and libc++ to 3.7.0. | |
1100081 | October 16, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after undating ZFS to support resumable send/receive (rev 289362). | |
1100082 | October 19, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after Linux KPI updates. | |
1100083 | October 22, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after renaming linuxapi.ko to linuxkpi.ko. | |
1100084 | October 29, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after moving the LinuxKPI module into the default kernel build. | |
1100085 | October 30, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after import of OpenSSL 1.0.2d. | |
1100086 | November 2, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after making figpar(3) macros more unique. | |
1100087 | November 7, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after changing sysctl_add_oid(9)'s ABI. | |
1100088 | November 7, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after string collation and locales rework. | |
1100089 | November 7, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after API change to sysctl_add_oid(9) (rev 290475). | |
1100090 | November 10, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after API change to callout_stop macro; (rev 290664). | |
1100091 | November 30, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after changing the interface between the nfsd.ko and nfscommon.ko modules in 291527. | |
1100092 | December 19, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of vm_pageout_grow_cache (rev 292469). | |
1100093 | December 30, 2015 | 11.0-CURRENT after removal of sys/crypto/sha2.h (rev 292782). | |
1100094 | January 15, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after LinuxKPI PCI changes (rev 294086). | |
1100095 | January 19, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after LRO optimizations. | |
1100096 | January 21, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after LinuxKPI idr_* additions. | |
1100097 | January 26, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after API change to dpv(3). | |
1100098 | February 16, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after API change to rman (rev 294883). | |
1100099 | February 18, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after allowing drivers to set the TCP ACK/data segment aggregation limit. | |
1100100 | February 26, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after bus_alloc_resource_any(9) API addition. | |
1100101 | March 5, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after upgrading our copies of clang, llvm, lldb and compiler-rt to 3.8.0 release. | |
1100102 | March 12, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after libelf cross-endian fix in rev 296685. | |
1100103 | March 18, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after using uintmax_t for rman ranges. | |
1100104 | March 21, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after tracking filemon usage via a proc.p_filemon pointer rather than its own lists. | |
1100105 | April 6, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after fixing sed functions | |
1100106 | April 22, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after fixes for using IPv6 addresses with RDMA. | |
1100107 | May 4, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after improving performance and functionality of the bitstring(3) api. | |
1100108 | May 12, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after fixing handling of IOCTLs in the LinuxKPI. | |
1100109 | May 16, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after implementing more Linux device related functions in the LinuxKPI. | |
1100110 | May 19, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding support for managing Shingled Magnetic Recording (SMR) drives. | |
1100111 | May 20, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after removing brk and sbrk from arm64. | |
1100112 | May 23, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding bit_count to the bitstring(3) API. | |
1100113 | May 26, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after disabling alignment faults on armv6. | |
1100114 | May 26, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after fixing crunchgen(1) usage with | |
1100115 | May 30, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding an mbuf flag for | |
1100116 | May 31, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after SHA-512t256 (rev 300903) and Skein (rev 300966) where added to libmd, libcrypt, the kernel, and ZFS (rev 301010). | |
1100117 | June 6, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after libpam was synced with stock 301602, bumping library version. | |
1100118 | June 21, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after breaking binary compatibility of struct disk 302069. | |
1100119 | June 23, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after switching geom_disk to using a pool mutex. | |
1100120 | June 23, 2016 | 11.0-CURRENT after adding spares to struct ifnet. | |
1100121 | August 12, 2015 | 11-STABLE after | |
1100500 | August 12, 2016 | 11.0-STABLE adding branched 303976. | |
1100501 | August 22, 2016 | 11.0-STABLE after adding C++11 thread_local support. | |
1100502 | August 26, 2016 | 11.0-STABLE after | |
1100503 | September 12, 2016 | 11.0-STABLE after resolving a deadlock between | |
1100504 | October 14, 2016 | 11.0-STABLE after ZFS merges. | |
1100505 | October 19, 2016 | 11.0-STABLE after | |
1100506 | October 28, 2016 | 11.0-STABLE after installing header files required development with libzfs_core. | |
1100507 | December 15, 2016 | 11.0-STABLE after adding the | |
1100508 | December 26, 2016 | 11.0-STABLE after upgrading our copies of clang, llvm, lldb, compiler-rt and libc++ to 3.9.1 release, and adding lld 3.9.1. | |
1100509 | January 3, 2017 | 11.0-STABLE after crunchgen(1) META_MODE fix (rev 311185). | |
1100510 | March 15, 2017 | 11.0-STABLE after MFC of | |
1100511 | April 2, 2017 | 11.0-STABLE after multiple MFCs updating clang, llvm, lld, lldb, compiler-rt and libc++ to 4.0.0 release. | |
1100512 | April 4, 2017 | 11.0-STABLE after making CAM SIM lock optional (revs 315673, 315674). | |
1100513 | May 11, 2017 | 11.0-STABLE after merging the addition of the <dev/mmc/mmc_ioctl.h> header. | |
1100514 | May 31, 2017 | 11.0-STABLE after multiple MFCs of | |
1101000 | June 30, 2017 |
| |
1101001 | June 30, 2017 | 11.1-RC1 After merging the | |
1101500 | June 30, 2017 | 11-STABLE after | |
1101501 | July 5, 2017 | 11-STABLE after merging the | |
1101502 | July 29, 2017 | 11-STABLE after merging the NFS client forced dismount support | |
1101503 | September 11, 2017 | 11-STABLE after merging changes making the WRFSBASE instruction operational on amd64. | |
1101504 | September 26, 2017 | 11-STABLE after merging libm from head, which adds cacoshl(3), cacosl(3), casinhl(3), casinl(3), catanl(3), catanhl(3), sincos(3), sincosf(3), and sincosl(3). | |
1101505 | September 26, 2017 | 11-STABLE after merging clang, llvm, lld, lldb, compiler-rt and libc++ 5.0.0 release. | |
1101506 | October 25, 2017 | 11-STABLE after merging 324281, adding the | |
1101507 | January 24, 2018 | 11-STABLE after merging 325028, fixing | |
1101508 | January 24, 2018 | 11-STABLE after merging 316648, renaming | |
1101509 | February 1, 2018 | 11-STABLE after an overwrite merge backport of the LinuxKPI from FreeBSD-head. | |
1101510 | February 17, 2018 | 11-STABLE after the | |
1101511 | February 25, 2018 | 11-STABLE after concluding the recent LinuxKPI related updates. | |
1101512 | March 19, 2018 | 11-STABLE after merging retpoline support from the upstream llvm, clang and lld 5.0 branches. | |
1101513 | March 31, 2018 | 11-STABLE after merging clang, llvm, lld, lldb, compiler-rt and libc++ 6.0.0 release, and several follow-up fixes. | |
1101514 | April 5, 2018 | 11-STABLE after merging 328331, adding a new and incompatible interpretation of ${name}_limits in rc scripts. | |
1101515 | April 10, 2018 | 11-STABLE after reverting 331880, removing the new and incompatible interpretation of ${name}_limits in rc scripts. | |
1101516 | May 30, 2018 | 11-STABLE after dwatch(1) touch-ups. | |
1102000 | June 1, 2018 |
| |
1102500 | June 1, 2018 | 11-STABLE after releng/11.2 branched. | |
1102501 | June 20, 2018 | 11-STABLE after LinuxKPI updates requiring recompilation of external kernel modules. | |
1102502 | September 12, 2018 | 11-STABLE after adding a socket option SO_TS_CLOCK and fixing | |
1102503 | September 25, 2018 | 11-STABLE after merging a TCP checksum fix to iflib(9) and adding new media types to if_media.h | |
1102504 | November 9, 2018 | 11-STABLE after several MFCs: updating objcopy(1) to properly handle little-endian MIPS64 object; correcting mips64el test to use ELF header; adding test for 64-bit ELF in _libelf_is_mips64el. | |
1102505 | January 6, 2019 | 11-STABLE after merge of fixing | |
1102506 | February 17, 2019 | 11-STABLE after merging multiple commits to lualoader. | |
1102507 | April 16, 2019 | 11-STABLE after merging llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp 8.0.0 final release r356365. | |
1102508 | April 27, 2019 | 11-STABLE after ether_gen_addr availability. | |
1102509 | May 6, 2019 | 11-STABLE after MFC of 345303, 345658, and partially of 345305. | |
1102510 | May 16, 2019 | 11-STABLE after bumping the Mellanox driver version numbers (mlx4en(4); mlx5en(4)). | |
1103000 | June 14, 2019 |
| |
1103500 | June 14, 2019 | 11-STABLE after releng/11.3 branched. | |
1103501 | November 10, 2019 | 11-STABLE after fixing a potential OOB read security issue in libc++. | |
1103502 | November 11, 2019 | 11-STABLE after adding sysfs create/remove functions that handles multiple files in one call to the LinuxKPI. | |
1103503 | November 11, 2019 | 11-STABLE after LinuxKPI sysfs improvements. | |
1103504 | November 11, 2019 | 11-STABLE after enabling device class group attributes in the LinuxKPI. | |
1103505 | December 19, 2019 | 11-STABLE after adding sigsetop extensions commonly found in musl libc and glibc. | |
1103506 | January 6, 2020 | 11-STABLE after making USB statistics be per-device instead of per bus. | |
1103507 | January 13, 2020 | 11-STABLE after adding own counter for cancelled USB transfers. | |
1103508 | February 6, 2020 | 11-STABLE after recent LinuxKPI changes. | |
1103509 | April 15, 2020 | 11-STABLE after moving | |
1103510 | May 5, 2020 | 11-STABLE after updating llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to 9.0.0 final release r372316. | |
1103511 | May 7, 2020 | 11-STABLE after updating llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to 10.0.0 release. | |
1104000 | May 8, 2020 |
| |
1104001 | May 8, 2020 | 11.4-BETA1 after updating llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to 10.0.0 release. | |
1104500 | May 8, 2020 | 11-STABLE after releng/11.4 branched. | |
1104501 | June 18, 2020 | 11-STABLE after implementing | |
1104502 | July 4, 2020 | 11-STABLE after making liblzma use libmd implementation of SHA256. | |
1104503 | July 24, 2020 | 11-STABLE after updating llvm, clang, compiler-rt, libc++, libunwind, lld, lldb and openmp to 10.0.1 release. | |
1104504 | August 3, 2020 | 11-STABLE after implementing the | |
1104505 | August 19, 2020 | 11-STABLE after change to clone the task struct fields related to RCU. | |
1104506 | September 8, 2020 | 11-STABLE after adding atomic and bswap functions to libcompiler_rt. | |
1104507 | September 12, 2020 | 11-STABLE after followup commits to libcompiler_rt. | |
1104508 | October 20, 2020 | 11-STABLE after populating the acquire context field of a | |
1104509 | October 20, 2020 | 11-STABLE after additions to LinuxKPI’s | |
1104510 | November 9, 2020 | 11-STABLE after the addition of |
18.5. FreeBSD 10 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
1000000 | September 26, 2011 | 10.0-CURRENT. | |
1000001 | November 4, 2011 | 10-CURRENT after addition of the posix_fadvise(2) system call. | |
1000002 | December 12, 2011 | 10-CURRENT after defining boolean true/false in sys/types.h, sizeof(bool) may have changed (rev 228444). 10-CURRENT after xlocale.h was introduced (rev 227753). | |
1000003 | December 16, 2011 | 10-CURRENT after major changes to carp(4), changing size of struct in_aliasreq, struct in6_aliasreq (rev 228571) and straitening arguments check of SIOCAIFADDR (rev 228574). | |
1000004 | January 1, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after the removal of | |
1000005 | January 16, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after the removal of support for SIOCSIFADDR, SIOCSIFNETMASK, SIOCSIFBRDADDR, SIOCSIFDSTADDR ioctls. | |
1000006 | January 26, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after introduction of read capacity data asynchronous notification in the cam(4) layer. | |
1000007 | February 5, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after introduction of new tcp(4) socket options: TCP_KEEPINIT, TCP_KEEPIDLE, TCP_KEEPINTVL, and TCP_KEEPCNT. | |
1000008 | February 11, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after introduction of the new extensible sysctl(3) interface NET_RT_IFLISTL to query address lists. | |
1000009 | February 25, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after import of libarchive 3.0.3 (rev 232153). | |
1000010 | March 31, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after xlocale cleanup. | |
1000011 | April 16, 2012 | 10-CURRENT import of LLVM/Clang 3.1 trunk 154661 (rev 234353). | |
1000012 | May 2, 2012 | 10-CURRENT jemalloc import. | |
1000013 | May 22, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after byacc import. | |
1000014 | June 27, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after BSD sort becoming the default sort (rev 237629). | |
1000015 | July 12, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after import of OpenSSL 1.0.1c. | |
(not changed) | July 13, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after the fix for LLVM/Clang 3.1 regression. | |
1000016 | August 8, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after KBI change in ucom(4). | |
1000017 | August 8, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after adding streams feature to the USB stack. | |
1000018 | September 8, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after major rewrite of pf(4). | |
1000019 | October 6, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after pfil(9) KBI/KPI changed to supply packets in net byte order to AF_INET filter hooks. | |
1000020 | October 16, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after the network interface cloning KPI changed and struct if_clone becoming opaque. | |
1000021 | October 22, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after removal of support for non-MPSAFE filesystems and addition of support for FUSEFS (rev 241519). | |
1000022 | October 22, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after the entire IPv4 stack switched to network byte order for IP packet header storage. | |
1000023 | November 5, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after jitter buffer in the common USB serial driver code, to temporarily store characters if the TTY buffer is full. Add flow stop and start signals when this happens. | |
1000024 | November 5, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after clang was made the default compiler on i386 and amd64. | |
1000025 | November 17, 2012 | 10-CURRENT after the sin6_scope_id member variable in struct sockaddr_in6 was changed to being filled by the kernel before passing the structure to the userland via sysctl or routing socket. This means the KAME-specific embedded scope id in sin6_addr.s6_addr[2] is always cleared in userland application. | |
1000026 | January 11, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after install gained the -N flag. May also be used to indicate the presence of nmtree. | |
1000027 | January 29, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after cat gained the -l flag (rev 246083). | |
1000028 | February 13, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after USB moved to the driver structure requiring a rebuild of all USB modules. | |
1000029 | March 4, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the introduction of tickless callout facility which also changed the layout of struct callout (rev 247777). | |
1000030 | March 12, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after KPI breakage introduced in the VM subsystem to support read/write locking (rev 248084). | |
1000031 | April 26, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the dst parameter of the ifnet | |
1000032 | May 1, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the introduction of the accept4(2) (rev 250154) and pipe2(2) (rev 250159) system calls. | |
1000033 | May 21, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after flex 2.5.37 import. | |
1000034 | June 3, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the addition of these functions to libm: cacos(3), cacosf(3), cacosh(3), cacoshf(3), casin(3), casinf(3), casinh(3), casinhf(3), catan(3), catanf(3), catanh(3), catanhf(3), logl(3), log2l(3), log10l(3), log1pl(3), expm1l(3). | |
1000035 | June 8, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the introduction of the aio_mlock(2) system call (rev 251526). | |
1000036 | July 9, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the addition of a new function to the kernel GSSAPI module’s function call interface. | |
1000037 | July 9, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after the migration of statistics structures to PCPU counters. Changed structures include: | |
1000038 | July 16, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after making | |
1000039 | July 22, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after | |
1000040 | July 24, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after addition of libusb pkgconf files. | |
1000041 | August 5, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after change from | |
1000042 | August 9, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after VM subsystem change to unify soft and hard busy mechanisms. | |
1000043 | August 13, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after | |
1000044 | August 15, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after libc.so conversion to an ld(1) script (rev 251668). | |
1000045 | August 15, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after devfs programming interface change by replacing the cdevsw flag | |
1000046 | August 19, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after addition of | |
1000047 | August 21, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after stat(2) update to allow storing some Windows/DOS and CIFS file attributes as stat(2) flags. | |
1000048 | August 22, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after modification of structure | |
1000049 | August 24, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after physio(9) support for devices that do not function properly with split I/O, such as sa(4). | |
1000050 | August 24, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after modifications of structure | |
1000051 | August 25, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after Radeon KMS driver import (rev 254885). | |
1000052 | September 3, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after import of NetBSD | |
1000053 | September 6, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after API and ABI changes to the Capsicum framework. | |
1000054 | September 6, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after | |
1000055 | September 6, 2013 | 10-CURRENT after addition of | |
1000100 | December 7, 2013 |
| |
1000500 | October 10, 2013 | 10-STABLE after branch from | |
1000501 | October 22, 2013 | 10-STABLE after addition of first-boot rc(8) support. | |
1000502 | November 20, 2013 | 10-STABLE after removal of iconv symbols from | |
1000510 | December 7, 2013 |
| |
1000700 | December 7, 2013 | 10-STABLE after | |
1000701 | December 15, 2013 | 10.0-STABLE after Heimdal encoding fix. | |
1000702 | December 31, 2013 | 10-STABLE after MAP_STACK fixes. | |
1000703 | March 5, 2014 | 10-STABLE after upgrade of libc++ to 3.4 release. | |
1000704 | March 7, 2014 | ||
1000705 | March 21, 2014 | 10-STABLE after upgrade of llvm/clang to 3.4 release. | |
1000706 | April 6, 2014 | 10-STABLE after GCC support for | |
1000707 | April 8, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:06.openssl. | |
1000708 | April 30, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:07.devfs, FreeBSD-SA-14:08.tcp, and FreeBSD-SA-14:09.openssl. | |
1000709 | May 13, 2014 | 10-STABLE after support for UDP-Lite protocol (RFC 3828). | |
1000710 | June 13, 2014 | 10-STABLE after changes to strcasecmp(3), moving strcasecmp_l(3) and strncasecmp_l(3) from <string.h> to <strings.h> for POSIX 2008 compliance. | |
1000711 | July 8, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:17.kmem (rev 268432). | |
1000712 | August 1, 2014 | ||
1000713 | August 3, 2014 | 10-STABLE after regex(3) library update to add ">" and "<" delimiters. | |
1000714 | August 3, 2014 | 10-STABLE after | |
1000715 | September 9, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:18 (rev 269686). | |
1000716 | September 16, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:19 (rev 271667). | |
1000717 | September 18, 2014 | 10-STABLE after i915 HW context support. | |
1001000 | October 2, 2014 | 10.1-RC1 after releng/10.1 branch. | |
1001500 | October 2, 2014 | 10-STABLE after releng/10.1 branch. | |
1001501 | October 21, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:20, FreeBSD-SA-14:22, and FreeBSD-SA-14:23 (rev 273411). | |
1001502 | November 4, 2014 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:23, FreeBSD-SA-14:24, and FreeBSD-SA-14:25. | |
1001503 | November 25, 2014 | 10-STABLE after merging new libraries/utilities (dpv(1) dpv(3), and figpar(3)) for data throughput visualization. | |
1001504 | December 13, 2014 | 10-STABLE after merging an important fix to the LLVM vectorizer, which could lead to buffer overruns in some cases. | |
1001505 | January 3, 2015 | 10-STABLE after merging some arm constants in 276312. | |
1001506 | January 12, 2015 | 10-STABLE after merging max table size update for yacc. | |
1001507 | January 27, 2015 | 10-STABLE after changes to the UDP tunneling callback to provide a context pointer and the source sockaddr. | |
1001508 | February 18, 2015 | 10-STABLE after addition of the | |
1001509 | February 25, 2015 | 10-STABLE after FreeBSD-EN-15:01.vt, FreeBSD-EN-15:02.openssl, FreeBSD-EN-15:03.freebsd-update, FreeBSD-SA-15:04.igmp, and FreeBSD-SA-15:05.bind. | |
1001510 | February 26, 2015 | 10-STABLE after MFC of rev 278964. | |
1001511 | 19 March, 2015 | 10-STABLE after sys/capability.h is renamed to sys/capsicum.h (rev 280224/). | |
1001512 | 24 March, 2015 | ||
1001513 | 24 April, 2015 | 10-STABLE after starting the process of removing the use of the deprecated "M_FLOWID" flag from the network code. | |
1001514 | April 30, 2015 | 10-STABLE after MFC of iconv(3) fixes. | |
1001515 | May 11, 2015 | 10-STABLE after adding back | |
1001516 | May 24, 2015 | 10-STABLE after MFC of many USB things. | |
1001517 | June 3, 2015 | 10-STABLE after MFC of sound related things. | |
1001518 | June 10, 2015 | 10-STABLE after MFC of zfs vfs fixes (rev 284203). | |
1001519 | June 23, 2015 | 10-STABLE after reverting bumping | |
1002000 | 24 July, 2015 |
| |
1002500 | 24 July, 2015 | 10-STABLE after | |
1002501 | 8 October, 2015 | 10-STABLE after merge of ZFS changes that affected the internal interface of zfeature_info structure (rev 288572). | |
1002502 | 24 November, 2015 | 10-STABLE after merge of dump device changes that affected the arguments of | |
1002503 | 14 December, 2015 | 10-STABLE after merge of changes to the internal interface between the nfsd.ko and nfscommon.ko modules, requiring them to be upgraded together (rev 292223). | |
1002504 | 22 December, 2015 | 10-STABLE after merge of xz 5.2.2 merge (multithread support) (rev 292588). | |
1002505 | 30 December, 2015 | ||
1002506 | 9 January, 2016 | 10-STABLE after merge of utimensat(2) (rev 293473). | |
1002507 | 9 January, 2016 | 10-STABLE after merge of changes to linux(4) (rev 293477 through 293609). | |
1002508 | 9 January, 2016 | 10-STABLE after merge of changes to figpar(3) types/macros (rev 290275). | |
1002509 | 1 February, 2016 | 10-STABLE after merge of API change to dpv(3). | |
1003000 | 4 March, 2016 |
| |
1003500 | 4 March, 2016 | 10-STABLE after | |
1003501 | 19 June, 2016 | 10-STABLE after adding kdbcontrol’s -P option (rev 298297). | |
1003502 | 19 June, 2016 | 10-STABLE after libcrypto.so was made position independent. | |
1003503 | 19 June, 2016 | 10-STABLE after allowing MK_ overrides (rev 300233). | |
1003504 | 21 June, 2016 | 10-STABLE after MFC of filemon changes from 11-CURRENT. | |
1003505 | 27 June, 2016 | 10-STABLE after converting sed to use REG_STARTEND, fixing a Mesa issue. | |
1003506 | August 22, 2016 | 10-STABLE after adding C++11 thread_local support. | |
1003507 | August 26, 2016 | 10-STABLE after | |
1003508 | September 12, 2016 | 10-STABLE after resolving a deadlock between | |
1003509 | October 14, 2016 | 10-STABLE after ZFS merges. | |
1003510 | October 28, 2016 | 10-STABLE after installing header files required development with libzfs_core. | |
1003511 | December 15, 2016 | 10-STABLE after exporting whole thread name in | |
1003512 | March 22, 2017 | 10-STABLE after libmd changes (rev 314143). | |
1003513 | April 4, 2017 | 10-STABLE after making CAM SIM lock optional (revs 315673, 315674). | |
1003514 | May 11, 2017 | 10-STABLE after merging the addition of the <dev/mmc/mmc_ioctl.h> header. | |
1003515 | July 19, 2017 | 10-STABLE after adding C14 sized deallocation functions to libc. | |
1003516 | July 30, 2017 | 10-STABLE after merging the | |
1004000 | September 15, 2017 |
| |
1004500 | September 15, 2017 | 10-STABLE after | |
1004501 | January 24, 2018 | 10-STABLE after merging 325028, fixing | |
1004502 | January 6, 2020 | 10-STABLE after making USB statistics be per-device instead of per bus. | |
1004503 | January 13, 2020 | 10-STABLE after adding own counter for cancelled USB transfers. |
18.6. FreeBSD 9 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
900000 | August 22, 2009 | 9.0-CURRENT. | |
900001 | September 8, 2009 | 9.0-CURRENT after importing x86emu, a software emulator for real mode x86 CPU from OpenBSD. | |
900002 | September 23, 2009 | 9.0-CURRENT after implementing the EVFILT_USER kevent filter functionality. | |
900003 | December 2, 2009 | 9.0-CURRENT after addition of sigpause(2) and PIE support in csu. | |
900004 | December 6, 2009 | 9.0-CURRENT after addition of libulog and its libutempter compatibility interface. | |
900005 | December 12, 2009 | 9.0-CURRENT after addition of sleepq_sleepcnt(9), which can be used to query the number of waiters on a specific waiting queue. | |
900006 | January 4, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after change of the scandir(3) and alphasort(3) prototypes to conform to SUSv4. | |
900007 | January 13, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the removal of utmp(5) and the addition of utmpx (see getutxent(3)) for improved logging of user logins and system events. | |
900008 | January 20, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the import of BSDL bc/dc and the deprecation of GNU bc/dc. | |
900009 | January 26, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the addition of SIOCGIFDESCR and SIOCSIFDESCR ioctls to network interfaces. These ioctl can be used to manipulate interface description, as inspired by OpenBSD. | |
900010 | March 22, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the import of zlib 1.2.4. | |
900011 | April 24, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after adding soft-updates journalling. | |
900012 | May 10, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after adding liblzma, xz, xzdec, and lzmainfo. | |
900013 | May 24, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after bringing in USB fixes for linux(4). | |
900014 | June 10, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after adding Clang. | |
900015 | July 22, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the import of BSD grep. | |
900016 | July 28, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after adding mti_zone to struct malloc_type_internal. | |
900017 | August 23, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after changing back default grep to GNU grep and adding WITH_BSD_GREP knob. | |
900018 | August 24, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the pthread_kill(3) -generated signal is identified as SI_LWP in si_code. Previously, si_code was SI_USER. | |
900019 | August 28, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after addition of the MAP_PREFAULT_READ flag to mmap(2). | |
900020 | September 9, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after adding drain functionality to sbufs, which also changed the layout of struct sbuf. | |
900021 | September 13, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after DTrace has grown support for userland tracing. | |
900022 | October 2, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after addition of the BSDL man utilities and retirement of GNU/GPL man utilities. | |
900023 | October 11, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after updating xz to git 20101010 snapshot. | |
900024 | November 11, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after libgcc.a was replaced by libcompiler_rt.a. | |
900025 | November 12, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the introduction of the modularised congestion control. | |
900026 | November 30, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the introduction of Serial Management Protocol (SMP) passthrough and the XPT_SMP_IO and XPT_GDEV_ADVINFO CAM CCBs. | |
900027 | December 5, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the addition of log2 to libm. | |
900028 | December 21, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the addition of the Hhook (Helper Hook), Khelp (Kernel Helpers) and Object Specific Data (OSD) KPIs. | |
900029 | December 28, 2010 | 9.0-CURRENT after the modification of the TCP stack to allow Khelp modules to interact with it via helper hook points and store per-connection data in the TCP control block. | |
900030 | January 12, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the update of libdialog to version 20100428. | |
900031 | February 7, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the addition of pthread_getthreadid_np(3). | |
900032 | February 8, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the removal of the uio_yield prototype and symbol. | |
900033 | February 18, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the update of binutils to version 2.17.50. | |
900034 | March 8, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the struct sysvec (sv_schedtail) changes. | |
900035 | March 29, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the update of base gcc and libstdc++ to the last GPLv2 licensed revision. | |
900036 | April 18, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the removal of libobjc and Objective-C support from the base system. | |
900037 | May 13, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after importing the libprocstat(3) library and fuser(1) utility to the base system. | |
900038 | May 22, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after adding a lock flag argument to VFS_FHTOVP(9). | |
900039 | June 28, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after importing pf from OpenBSD 4.5. | |
900040 | July 19, 2011 | Increase default MAXCPU for FreeBSD to 64 on amd64 and ia64 and to 128 for XLP (mips). | |
900041 | August 13, 2011 | 9.0-CURRENT after the implementation of Capsicum capabilities; fget(9) gains a rights argument. | |
900042 | August 28, 2011 | Bump shared libraries' version numbers for libraries whose ABI has changed in preparation for 9.0. | |
900043 | September 2, 2011 | Add automatic detection of USB mass storage devices which do not support the no synchronize cache SCSI command. | |
900044 | September 10, 2011 | Re-factor auto-quirk. 9.0-RELEASE. | |
900045 | January 2, 2012 | 9-STABLE after MFC of true/false from 1000002. | |
900500 | January 2, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE. | |
900501 | January 6, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE after merging of addition of the posix_fadvise(2) system call. | |
900502 | January 16, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE after merging gperf 3.0.3 | |
900503 | February 15, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE after introduction of the new extensible sysctl(3) interface NET_RT_IFLISTL to query address lists. | |
900504 | March 3, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE after changes related to mounting of filesystem inside a jail. | |
900505 | March 13, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE after introduction of new tcp(4) socket options: TCP_KEEPINIT, TCP_KEEPIDLE, TCP_KEEPINTVL, and TCP_KEEPCNT. | |
900506 | May 22, 2012 | 9.0-STABLE after introduction of the | |
901000 | August 5, 2012 | 9.1-RELEASE. | |
901500 | August 6, 2012 | 9.1-STABLE after branching releng/9.1 (RELENG_9_1). | |
901501 | November 11, 2012 | 9.1-STABLE after LIST_PREV(3) added to queue.h (rev 242893) and KBI change in USB serial devices. | |
901502 | November 28, 2012 | 9.1-STABLE after USB serial jitter buffer requires rebuild of USB serial device modules. | |
901503 | February 21, 2013 | 9.1-STABLE after USB moved to the driver structure requiring a rebuild of all USB modules. Also indicates the presence of nmtree. | |
901504 | March 15, 2013 | 9.1-STABLE after install gained -l, -M, -N and related flags and cat gained the -l option. | |
901505 | June 13, 2013 | 9.1-STABLE after fixes in ctfmerge bootstrapping (rev 249243). | |
902001 | August 3, 2013 |
| |
902501 | August 2, 2013 | 9.2-STABLE after creation of | |
902502 | August 26, 2013 | 9.2-STABLE after inclusion of the | |
902503 | August 27, 2013 | 9.2-STABLE after inclusion of the | |
902504 | October 22, 2013 | 9.2-STABLE after inclusion of support for "first boot" rc(8) scripts. | |
902505 | December 12, 2013 | 9.2-STABLE after Heimdal encoding fix. | |
902506 | December 31, 2013 | 9-STABLE after MAP_STACK fixes (rev 260082). | |
902507 | March 5, 2014 | 9-STABLE after upgrade of libc++ to 3.4 release. | |
902508 | March 14, 2014 | 9-STABLE after merge of the Radeon KMS driver (rev 263170). | |
902509 | March 21, 2014 | 9-STABLE after upgrade of llvm/clang to 3.4 release. | |
902510 | March 27, 2014 | 9-STABLE after merge of the vt(4) driver. | |
902511 | March 27, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:06.openssl. | |
902512 | April 30, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:08.tcp. | |
903000 | June 20, 2014 | 9-RC1 | |
903500 | June 20, 2014 | 9.3-STABLE | |
903501 | July 8, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:17.kmem (rev 268433). | |
903502 | August 19, 2014 | 9-STABLE after | |
903503 | September 9, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:18 (rev 269687). | |
903504 | September 16, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:19 (rev 271668). | |
903505 | October 21, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:20, FreeBSD-SA-14:21, and FreeBSD-SA-14:22 (rev 273412). | |
903506 | November 4, 2014 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:23, FreeBSD-SA-14:24, and FreeBSD-SA-14:25. | |
903507 | December 13, 2014 | 9-STABLE after merging an important fix to the LLVM vectorizer, which could lead to buffer overruns in some cases. | |
903508 | February 25, 2015 | 9-STABLE after FreeBSD-EN-15:01.vt, FreeBSD-EN-15:02.openssl, FreeBSD-EN-15:03.freebsd-update, FreeBSD-SA-15:04.igmp, and FreeBSD-SA-15:05.bind. | |
903509 | February 29, 2016 | 9-STABLE after bumping the default value of | |
903510 | May 19, 2016 | 9-STABLE after System Binary Interface (SBI) page was moved in latest version of Berkeley Boot Loader (BBL) due to code size increase in 300234. | |
903511 | September 12, 2016 | 9-STABLE after resolving a deadlock between |
18.7. FreeBSD 8 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
800000 | October 11, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT. Separating wide and single byte ctype. | |
800001 | October 16, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after libpcap 0.9.8 and tcpdump 3.9.8 import. | |
800002 | October 21, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after renaming kthread_create(9) and friends to kproc_create(9) etc. | |
800003 | October 24, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after ABI backwards compatibility to the FreeBSD 4/5/6 versions of the PCIOCGETCONF, PCIOCREAD and PCIOCWRITE IOCTLs was added, which required the ABI of the PCIOCGETCONF IOCTL to be broken again | |
800004 | November 12, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after agp(4) driver moved from src/sys/pci to src/sys/dev/agp | |
800005 | December 4, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after changes to the jumbo frame allocator (rev 174247). | |
800006 | December 7, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of callgraph capture functionality to hwpmc(4). | |
800007 | December 25, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after | |
800008 | December 28, 2007 | 8.0-CURRENT after LK_EXCLUPGRADE option removal. | |
800009 | January 9, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of lockmgr_disown(9) | |
800010 | January 10, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the vn_lock(9) prototype change. | |
800011 | January 13, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the VOP_LOCK(9) and VOP_UNLOCK(9) prototype changes. | |
800012 | January 19, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of lockmgr_recursed(9), BUF_RECURSED(9) and BUF_ISLOCKED(9) and the removal of | |
800013 | January 23, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of the "ASCII" encoding. | |
800014 | January 24, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing the prototype of lockmgr(9) and removal of | |
800015 | January 26, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after extending the types of the fts(3) structures. | |
800016 | February 1, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding an argument to MEXTADD(9) | |
800017 | February 6, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of LK_NODUP and LK_NOWITNESS options in the lockmgr(9) space. | |
800018 | February 8, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of m_collapse. | |
800019 | February 9, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of current working directory, root directory, and jail directory support to the kern.proc.filedesc sysctl. | |
800020 | February 13, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of lockmgr_assert(9) and | |
800021 | February 15, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of lockmgr_args(9) and LK_INTERNAL flag removal. | |
800022 | (backed out) | 8.0-CURRENT after changing the default system ar to BSD ar(1). | |
800023 | February 25, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing the prototypes of lockstatus(9) and VOP_ISLOCKED(9);, more specifically retiring the | |
800024 | March 1, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after axing out the | |
800025 | March 8, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding F_DUP2FD command to fcntl(2). | |
800026 | March 12, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing the priority parameter to cv_broadcastpri such that 0 means no priority. | |
800027 | March 24, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing the bpf monitoring ABI when zerocopy bpf buffers were added. | |
800028 | March 26, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding l_sysid to struct flock. | |
800029 | March 28, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after reintegration of the | |
800030 | April 1, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of the rw_try_rlock(9) and rw_try_wlock(9) functions. | |
800031 | April 6, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of the | |
800032 | April 8, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the implementation of the openat and related syscalls, introduction of the O_EXEC flag for the open(2), and providing the corresponding linux compatibility syscalls. | |
800033 | April 8, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after added write(2) support for psm(4) in native operation level. Now arbitrary commands can be written to /dev/psm%d and status can be read back from it. | |
800034 | April 10, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of the | |
800035 | April 16, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of the | |
800036 | April 20, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after switchover of 802.11 wireless to multi-bss support (aka vaps). | |
800037 | May 9, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after addition of multi routing table support (aka setfib(1), setfib(2)). | |
800038 | May 26, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after removal of netatm and ISDN4BSD. Also, the addition of the Compact C Type (CTF) tools. | |
800039 | June 14, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after removal of sgtty. | |
800040 | June 26, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT with kernel NFS lockd client. | |
800041 | July 22, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after addition of arc4random_buf(3) and arc4random_uniform(3). | |
800042 | August 8, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after addition of cpuctl(4). | |
800043 | August 13, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing bpf(4) to use a single device node, instead of device cloning. | |
800044 | August 17, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the commit of the first step of the vimage project renaming global variables to be virtualized with a V_ prefix with macros to map them back to their global names. | |
800045 | August 20, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the integration of the MPSAFE TTY layer, including changes to various drivers and utilities that interact with it. | |
800046 | September 8, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the separation of the GDT per CPU on amd64 architecture. | |
800047 | September 10, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after removal of VSVTX, VSGID and VSUID. | |
800048 | September 16, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after converting the kernel NFS mount code to accept individual mount options in the nmount(2) iovec, not just one big struct nfs_args. | |
800049 | September 17, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the removal of suser(9) and suser_cred(9). | |
800050 | October 20, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after buffer cache API change. | |
800051 | October 23, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the removal of the MALLOC(9) and FREE(9) macros. | |
800052 | October 28, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of accmode_t and renaming of VOP_ACCESS 'a_mode' argument to 'a_accmode'. | |
800053 | November 2, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the prototype change of vfs_busy(9) and the introduction of its MBF_NOWAIT and MBF_MNTLSTLOCK flags. | |
800054 | November 22, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of buf_ring, memory barriers and ifnet functions to facilitate multiple hardware transmit queues for cards that support them, and a lockless ring-buffer implementation to enable drivers to more efficiently manage queuing of packets. | |
800055 | November 27, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of Intel™ Core, Core2, and Atom support to hwpmc(4). | |
800056 | November 29, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of multi-/no-IPv4/v6 jails. | |
800057 | December 1, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the switch to the ath hal source code. | |
800058 | December 12, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of the VOP_VPTOCNP operation. | |
800059 | December 15, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT incorporates the new arp-v2 rewrite. | |
800060 | December 19, 2008 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of makefs. | |
800061 | January 15, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after TCP Appropriate Byte Counting. | |
800062 | January 28, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after removal of | |
800063 | February 18, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after GENERIC config change to use the USB2 stack, but also the addition of fdevname(3). | |
800064 | February 23, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the USB2 stack is moved to and replaces dev/usb. | |
800065 | February 26, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the renaming of all functions in libmp(3). | |
800066 | February 27, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing USB devfs handling and layout. | |
800067 | February 28, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding | |
800068 | March 2, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after renaming the ushub devclass to uhub. | |
800069 | March 9, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after libusb20.so.1 was renamed to libusb.so.1. | |
800070 | March 9, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after merging IGMPv3 and Source-Specific Multicast (SSM) to the IPv4 stack. | |
800071 | March 14, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after gcc was patched to use C99 inline semantics in c99 and gnu99 mode. | |
800072 | March 15, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the IFF_NEEDSGIANT flag has been removed; non-MPSAFE network device drivers are no longer supported. | |
800073 | March 18, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the dynamic string token substitution has been implemented for rpath and needed paths. | |
800074 | March 24, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after tcpdump 4.0.0 and libpcap 1.0.0 import. | |
800075 | April 6, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after layout of structs vnet_net, vnet_inet and vnet_ipfw has been changed. | |
800076 | April 9, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding delay profiles in dummynet. | |
800077 | April 14, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after removing | |
800078 | April 15, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after struct rt_weight fields have been added to struct rt_metrics and struct rt_metrics_lite, changing the layout of struct rt_metrics_lite. A bump to RTM_VERSION was made, but backed out. | |
800079 | April 15, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after struct llentry pointers are added to struct route and struct route_in6. | |
800080 | April 15, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after layout of struct inpcb has been changed. | |
800081 | April 19, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the layout of struct malloc_type has been changed. | |
800082 | April 21, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the layout of struct ifnet has changed, and with | |
800083 | April 22, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the implementation of a low-level Bluetooth HCI API. | |
800084 | April 29, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after IPv6 SSM and MLDv2 changes. | |
800085 | April 30, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after enabling support for VIMAGE kernel builds with one active image. | |
800086 | May 8, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding support for input lines of arbitrarily length in patch(1). | |
800087 | May 11, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after some VFS KPI changes. The thread argument has been removed from the FSD parts of the VFS. | |
800088 | May 20, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after net80211 monitor mode changes. | |
800089 | May 23, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding UDP control block support. | |
800090 | May 23, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after virtualizing interface cloning. | |
800091 | May 27, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding hierarchical jails and removing global securelevel. | |
800092 | May 29, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing | |
800093 | May 29, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding mnt_xflag to struct mount. | |
800094 | May 30, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after adding VOP_ACCESSX(9). | |
800095 | May 30, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after changing the polling KPI. The polling handlers now return the number of packets processed. A new | |
800096 | June 1, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after updating to the new netisr implementation and after changing the way we store and access FIBs. | |
800097 | June 8, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of vnet destructor hooks and infrastructure. | |
(not changed) | June 11, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the introduction of netgraph outbound to inbound path call detection and queuing, which also changed the layout of struct thread. | |
800098 | June 14, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after OpenSSL 0.9.8k import. | |
800099 | June 22, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after NGROUPS update and moving route virtualization into its own VImage module. | |
800100 | June 24, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after SYSVIPC ABI change. | |
800101 | June 29, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the removal of the /dev/net/* per-interface character devices. | |
800102 | July 12, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after padding was added to struct sackhint, struct tcpcb, and struct tcpstat. | |
800103 | July 13, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after replacing struct tcpopt with struct toeopt in the TOE driver interface to the TCP syncache. | |
800104 | July 14, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after the addition of the linker-set based per-vnet allocator. | |
800105 | July 19, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after version bump for all shared libraries that do not have symbol versioning turned on. | |
800106 | July 24, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after introduction of OBJT_SG VM object type. | |
800107 | August 2, 2009 | 8.0-CURRENT after making the newbus subsystem Giant free by adding the newbus sxlock and 8.0-RELEASE. | |
800108 | November 21, 2009 | 8.0-STABLE after implementing EVFILT_USER kevent filter. | |
800500 | January 7, 2010 | 8.0-STABLE after | |
800501 | January 24, 2010 | 8.0-STABLE after change of the scandir(3) and alphasort(3) prototypes to conform to SUSv4. | |
800502 | January 31, 2010 | 8.0-STABLE after addition of sigpause(2). | |
800503 | February 25, 2010 | 8.0-STABLE after addition of SIOCGIFDESCR and SIOCSIFDESCR ioctls to network interfaces. These ioctl can be used to manipulate interface description, as inspired by OpenBSD. | |
800504 | March 1, 2010 | 8.0-STABLE after MFC of importing x86emu, a software emulator for real mode x86 CPU from OpenBSD. | |
800505 | May 18, 2010 | 8.0-STABLE after MFC of adding liblzma, xz, xzdec, and lzmainfo. | |
801000 | June 14, 2010 | 8.1-RELEASE | |
801500 | June 14, 2010 | 8.1-STABLE after 8.1-RELEASE. | |
801501 | November 3, 2010 | 8.1-STABLE after KBI change in struct sysentvec, and implementation of PL_FLAG_SCE/SCX/EXEC/SI and pl_siginfo for ptrace(PT_LWPINFO) . | |
802000 | December 22, 2010 | 8.2-RELEASE | |
802500 | December 22, 2010 | 8.2-STABLE after 8.2-RELEASE. | |
802501 | February 28, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after merging DTrace changes, including support for userland tracing. | |
802502 | March 6, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after merging log2 and log2f into libm. | |
802503 | May 1, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after upgrade of the gcc to the last GPLv2 version from the FSF gcc-4_2-branch. | |
802504 | May 28, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after introduction of the KPI and supporting infrastructure for modular congestion control. | |
802505 | May 28, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after introduction of Hhook and Khelp KPIs. | |
802506 | May 28, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after addition of OSD to struct tcpcb. | |
802507 | June 6, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after ZFS v28 import. | |
802508 | June 8, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after removal of the schedtail event handler and addition of the sv_schedtail method to struct sysvec. | |
802509 | July 14, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after merging the SSSE3 support into binutils. | |
802510 | July 19, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after addition of RFTSIGZMB flag for rfork(2). | |
802511 | September 9, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after addition of automatic detection of USB mass storage devices which do not support the no synchronize cache SCSI command. | |
802512 | September 10, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after merging of re-factoring of auto-quirk. | |
802513 | October 25, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after merging of the MAP_PREFAULT_READ flag to mmap(2). | |
802514 | November 16, 2011 | 8.2-STABLE after merging of addition of posix_fallocate(2) syscall. | |
802515 | January 6, 2012 | 8.2-STABLE after merging of addition of the posix_fadvise(2) system call. | |
802516 | January 16, 2012 | 8.2-STABLE after merging gperf 3.0.3 | |
802517 | February 15, 2012 | 8.2-STABLE after introduction of the new extensible sysctl(3) interface NET_RT_IFLISTL to query address lists. | |
803000 | March 3, 2012 | 8.3-RELEASE. | |
803500 | March 3, 2012 | 8.3-STABLE after branching releng/8.3 (RELENG_8_3). | |
803501 | February 21, 2013 | 8.3-STABLE after MFC of two USB fixes (rev 246616 and 246759). | |
804000 | March 28, 2013 | 8.4-RELEASE. | |
804500 | March 28, 2013 | 8.4-STABLE after 8.4-RELEASE. | |
804501 | December 16, 2013 | 8.4-STABLE after MFC of upstream Heimdal encoding fix. | |
804502 | April 30, 2014 | 8.4-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:08.tcp. | |
804503 | July 9, 2014 | 8.4-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:17.kmem. | |
804504 | September 9, 2014 | 8.4-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:18 (rev 271305). | |
804505 | September 16, 2014 | 8.4-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:19 (rev 271668). | |
804506 | October 21, 2014 | 8.4-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:21 (rev 273413). | |
804507 | November 4, 2014 | 8.4-STABLE after FreeBSD-SA-14:23, FreeBSD-SA-14:24, and FreeBSD-SA-14:25. | |
804508 | February 25, 2015 | 8-STABLE after FreeBSD-EN-15:01.vt, FreeBSD-EN-15:02.openssl, FreeBSD-EN-15:03.freebsd-update, FreeBSD-SA-15:04.igmp, and FreeBSD-SA-15:05.bind. | |
804509 | September 12, 2016 | 8-STABLE after resolving a deadlock between |
18.8. FreeBSD 7 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
700000 | July 11, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT. | |
700001 | July 23, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after bump of all shared library versions that had not been changed since RELENG_5. | |
700002 | August 13, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after credential argument is added to dev_clone event handler. | |
700003 | August 25, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after memmem(3) is added to libc. | |
700004 | October 30, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after solisten(9) kernel arguments are modified to accept a backlog parameter. | |
700005 | November 11, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after | |
700006 | November 11, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after addition of | |
700007 | December 2, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after incorporating scripts from the local_startup directories into the base rcorder(8). | |
700008 | December 5, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after removal of MNT_NODEV mount option. | |
700009 | December 19, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after ELF-64 type changes and symbol versioning. | |
700010 | December 20, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after addition of hostb and vgapci drivers, addition of | |
700011 | December 31, 2005 | 7.0-CURRENT after tv_sec was made time_t on all platforms but Alpha. | |
700012 | January 8, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after ldconfig_local_dirs change. | |
700013 | January 12, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after changes to /etc/rc.d/abi to support /compat/linux/etc/ld.so.cache being a symlink in a readonly filesystem. | |
700014 | January 26, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after pts import. | |
700015 | March 26, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after the introduction of version 2 of hwpmc(4)'s ABI. | |
700016 | April 22, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after addition of fcloseall(3) to libc. | |
700017 | May 13, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after removal of ip6fw. | |
700018 | July 15, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after import of snd_emu10kx. | |
700019 | July 29, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after import of OpenSSL 0.9.8b. | |
700020 | September 3, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after addition of bus_dma_get_tag function | |
700021 | September 4, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after libpcap 0.9.4 and tcpdump 3.9.4 import. | |
700022 | September 9, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after dlsym change to look for a requested symbol both in specified dso and its implicit dependencies. | |
700023 | September 23, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after adding new sound IOCTLs for the OSSv4 mixer API. | |
700024 | September 28, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after import of OpenSSL 0.9.8d. | |
700025 | November 11, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after the addition of libelf. | |
700026 | November 26, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after major changes on sound sysctls. | |
700027 | November 30, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after the addition of Wi-Spy quirk. | |
700028 | December 15, 2006 | 7.0-CURRENT after the addition of sctp calls to libc | |
700029 | January 26, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the GNU gzip(1) implementation was replaced with a BSD licensed version ported from NetBSD. | |
700030 | February 7, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the removal of IPIP tunnel encapsulation (VIFF_TUNNEL) from the IPv4 multicast forwarding code. | |
700031 | February 23, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the modification of | |
700032 | March 2, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the inclusion of ipw(4) and iwi(4) firmware. | |
700033 | March 9, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the inclusion of ncurses wide character support. | |
700034 | March 19, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after changes to how | |
700035 | March 26, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after addition of a notify mechanism for CPU frequency changes. | |
700036 | April 6, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after import of the ZFS filesystem. | |
700037 | April 8, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after addition of CAM 'SG' peripheral device, which implements a subset of Linux SCSI SG passthrough device API. | |
700038 | April 30, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after changing getenv(3), putenv(3), setenv(3) and unsetenv(3) to be POSIX conformant. | |
700039 | May 1, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the changes in 700038 were backed out. | |
700040 | May 10, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the addition of flopen(3) to libutil. | |
700041 | May 13, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after enabling symbol versioning, and changing the default thread library to libthr. | |
700042 | May 19, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the import of gcc 4.2.0. | |
700043 | May 21, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after bump of all shared library versions that had not been changed since RELENG_6. | |
700044 | June 7, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after changing the argument for | |
700045 | June 10, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after changing pam_nologin(8) to provide an account management function instead of an authentication function to the PAM framework. | |
700046 | June 11, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after updated 802.11 wireless support. | |
700047 | June 11, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after adding TCP LRO interface capabilities. | |
700048 | June 12, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after RFC 3678 API support added to the IPv4 stack. Legacy RFC 1724 behavior of the IP_MULTICAST_IF ioctl has now been removed; 0.0.0.0/8 may no longer be used to specify an interface index. Use struct ipmreqn instead. | |
700049 | July 3, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after importing pf from OpenBSD 4.1 | |
(not changed) | 7.0-CURRENT after adding IPv6 support for FAST_IPSEC, deleting KAME IPSEC, and renaming FAST_IPSEC to IPSEC. | ||
700050 | July 4, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after converting setenv/putenv/etc. calls from traditional BSD to POSIX. | |
700051 | July 4, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after adding new mmap/lseek/etc syscalls. | |
700052 | July 6, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after moving I4B headers to include/i4b. | |
700053 | September 30, 2007 | 7.0-CURRENT after the addition of support for PCI domains | |
700054 | October 25, 2007 | 7.0-STABLE after MFC of wide and single byte ctype separation. | |
700055 | October 28, 2007 | 7.0-RELEASE, and 7.0-CURRENT after ABI backwards compatibility to the FreeBSD 4/5/6 versions of the PCIOCGETCONF, PCIOCREAD and PCIOCWRITE IOCTLs was MFCed, which required the ABI of the PCIOCGETCONF IOCTL to be broken again | |
700100 | December 22, 2007 | 7.0-STABLE after 7.0-RELEASE | |
700101 | February 8, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after the MFC of | |
700102 | March 30, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after the MFC of | |
700103 | April 10, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after adding l_sysid to struct flock. | |
700104 | April 11, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after the MFC of procstat(1). | |
700105 | April 11, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after the MFC of umtx features. | |
700106 | April 15, 2008 | ||
700107 | April 20, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after the MFC of F_DUP2FD command to fcntl(2). | |
700108 | May 5, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after some lockmgr(9) changes, which makes it necessary to include sys/lock.h to use lockmgr(9). | |
700109 | May 27, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after MFC of the memrchr(3) function. | |
700110 | August 5, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after MFC of kernel NFS lockd client. | |
700111 | August 20, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after addition of physically contiguous jumbo frame support. | |
700112 | August 27, 2008 | 7.0-STABLE after MFC of kernel DTrace support. | |
701000 | November 25, 2008 | 7.1-RELEASE | |
701100 | November 25, 2008 | 7.1-STABLE after 7.1-RELEASE. | |
701101 | January 10, 2009 | 7.1-STABLE after strndup(3) merge. | |
701102 | January 17, 2009 | 7.1-STABLE after cpuctl(4) support added. | |
701103 | February 7, 2009 | 7.1-STABLE after the merge of multi-/no-IPv4/v6 jails. | |
701104 | February 14, 2009 | 7.1-STABLE after the store of the suspension owner in the struct mount, and introduction of vfs_susp_clean method into the struct vfsops. | |
701105 | March 12, 2009 | 7.1-STABLE after the incompatible change to the kern.ipc.shmsegs sysctl to allow allocating larger SysV shared memory segments on 64bit architectures. | |
701106 | March 14, 2009 | 7.1-STABLE after the merge of a fix for POSIX semaphore wait operations. | |
702000 | April 15, 2009 | 7.2-RELEASE | |
702100 | April 15, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after 7.2-RELEASE. | |
702101 | May 15, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after ichsmb(4) was changed to use left-adjusted slave addressing to match other SMBus controller drivers. | |
702102 | May 28, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after MFC of the fdopendir(3) function. | |
702103 | June 6, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after MFC of PmcTools. | |
702104 | July 14, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after MFC of the closefrom(2) system call. | |
702105 | July 31, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after MFC of the SYSVIPC ABI change. | |
702106 | September 14, 2009 | 7.2-STABLE after MFC of the x86 PAT enhancements and addition of | |
703000 | February 9, 2010 | 7.3-RELEASE | |
703100 | February 9, 2010 | 7.3-STABLE after 7.3-RELEASE. | |
704000 | December 22, 2010 | 7.4-RELEASE | |
704100 | December 22, 2010 | 7.4-STABLE after 7.4-RELEASE. | |
704101 | May 2, 2011 | 7.4-STABLE after the gcc MFC in rev 221317. |
18.9. FreeBSD 6 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
600000 | August 18, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT | |
600001 | August 27, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after permanently enabling PFIL_HOOKS in the kernel. | |
600002 | August 30, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after initial addition of ifi_epoch to struct if_data. Backed out after a few days. Do not use this value. | |
600003 | September 8, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after the re-addition of the ifi_epoch member of struct if_data. | |
600004 | September 29, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after addition of the struct inpcb argument to the pfil API. | |
600005 | October 5, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after addition of the "-d DESTDIR" argument to newsyslog. | |
600006 | November 4, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after addition of glibc style strftime(3) padding options. | |
600007 | December 12, 2004 | 6.0-CURRENT after addition of 802.11 framework updates. | |
600008 | January 25, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after changes to | |
600009 | February 4, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after addition of the cpufreq framework and drivers. | |
600010 | February 6, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after importing OpenBSD’s nc(1). | |
600011 | February 12, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after removing semblance of SVID2 | |
600012 | February 15, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after increase of default thread stacks' size. | |
600013 | February 19, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after fixes in <src/include/stdbool.h> and <src/sys/i386/include/_types.h> for using the GCC-compatibility of the Intel C/C++ compiler. | |
600014 | February 21, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after EOVERFLOW checks in vswprintf(3) fixed. | |
600015 | February 25, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after changing the struct if_data member, ifi_epoch, from wall clock time to uptime. | |
600016 | February 26, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after LC_CTYPE disk format changed. | |
600017 | February 27, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after NLS catalogs disk format changed. | |
600018 | February 27, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after LC_COLLATE disk format changed. | |
600019 | February 28, 2005 | Installation of acpica includes into /usr/include. | |
600020 | March 9, 2005 | Addition of MSG_NOSIGNAL flag to send(2) API. | |
600021 | March 17, 2005 | Addition of fields to cdevsw | |
600022 | March 21, 2005 | Removed gtar from base system. | |
600023 | April 13, 2005 | LOCAL_CREDS, LOCAL_CONNWAIT socket options added to unix(4). | |
600024 | April 19, 2005 | hwpmc(4) and related tools added to 6.0-CURRENT. | |
600025 | April 26, 2005 | struct icmphdr added to 6.0-CURRENT. | |
600026 | May 3, 2005 | pf updated to 3.7. | |
600027 | May 6, 2005 | Kernel libalias and ng_nat introduced. | |
600028 | May 13, 2005 | POSIX ttyname_r(3) made available through unistd.h and libc. | |
600029 | May 29, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after libpcap updated to v0.9.1 alpha 096. | |
600030 | June 5, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after importing NetBSD’s if_bridge(4). | |
600031 | June 10, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after struct ifnet was broken out of the driver softcs. | |
600032 | July 11, 2005 | 6.0-CURRENT after the import of libpcap v0.9.1. | |
600033 | July 25, 2005 | 6.0-STABLE after bump of all shared library versions that had not been changed since RELENG_5. | |
600034 | August 13, 2005 | 6.0-STABLE after credential argument is added to dev_clone event handler. 6.0-RELEASE. | |
600100 | November 1, 2005 | 6.0-STABLE after 6.0-RELEASE | |
600101 | December 21, 2005 | 6.0-STABLE after incorporating scripts from the local_startup directories into the base rcorder(8). | |
600102 | December 30, 2005 | 6.0-STABLE after updating the ELF types and constants. | |
600103 | January 15, 2006 | 6.0-STABLE after MFC of pidfile(3) API. | |
600104 | January 17, 2006 | 6.0-STABLE after MFC of ldconfig_local_dirs change. | |
600105 | February 26, 2006 | 6.0-STABLE after NLS catalog support of csh(1). | |
601000 | May 6, 2006 | 6.1-RELEASE | |
601100 | May 6, 2006 | 6.1-STABLE after 6.1-RELEASE. | |
601101 | June 22, 2006 | 6.1-STABLE after the import of csup. | |
601102 | July 11, 2006 | 6.1-STABLE after the iwi(4) update. | |
601103 | July 17, 2006 | 6.1-STABLE after the resolver update to BIND9, and exposure of reentrant version of netdb functions. | |
601104 | August 8, 2006 | 6.1-STABLE after DSO (dynamic shared objects) support has been enabled in OpenSSL. | |
601105 | September 2, 2006 | 6.1-STABLE after 802.11 fixups changed the api for the IEEE80211_IOC_STA_INFO ioctl. | |
602000 | November 15, 2006 | 6.2-RELEASE | |
602100 | September 15, 2006 | 6.2-STABLE after 6.2-RELEASE. | |
602101 | December 12, 2006 | 6.2-STABLE after the addition of Wi-Spy quirk. | |
602102 | December 28, 2006 | 6.2-STABLE after | |
602103 | January 16, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of dlsym change to look for a requested symbol both in specified dso and its implicit dependencies. | |
602104 | January 28, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of ng_deflate(4) and ng_pred1(4) netgraph nodes and new compression and encryption modes for ng_ppp(4) node. | |
602105 | February 20, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of BSD licensed version of gzip(1) ported from NetBSD. | |
602106 | March 31, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of PCI MSI and MSI-X support. | |
602107 | April 6, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of ncurses 5.6 and wide character support. | |
602108 | April 11, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of CAM 'SG' peripheral device, which implements a subset of Linux SCSI SG passthrough device API. | |
602109 | April 17, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of readline 5.2 patchset 002. | |
602110 | May 2, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of | |
602111 | June 11, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of BOP_BDFLUSH and caused breakage of the filesystem modules KBI. | |
602112 | September 21, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after libutil(3) MFC’s. | |
602113 | October 25, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after MFC of wide and single byte ctype separation. Newly compiled binary that references to ctype.h may require a new symbol, __mb_sb_limit, which is not available on older systems. | |
602114 | October 30, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after ctype ABI forward compatibility restored. | |
602115 | November 21, 2007 | 6.2-STABLE after back out of wide and single byte ctype separation. | |
603000 | November 25, 2007 | 6.3-RELEASE | |
603100 | November 25, 2007 | 6.3-STABLE after 6.3-RELEASE. | |
(not changed) | December 7, 2007 | 6.3-STABLE after fixing multibyte type support in bit macro. | |
603102 | April 24, 2008 | 6.3-STABLE after adding l_sysid to struct flock. | |
603103 | May 27, 2008 | 6.3-STABLE after MFC of the memrchr(3) function. | |
603104 | June 15, 2008 | 6.3-STABLE after MFC of support for | |
604000 | October 4, 2008 | 6.4-RELEASE | |
604100 | October 4, 2008 | 6.4-STABLE after 6.4-RELEASE. |
18.10. FreeBSD 5 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
500000 | March 13, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT | |
500001 | April 18, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after adding addition ELF header fields, and changing our ELF binary branding method. | |
500002 | May 2, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after kld metadata changes. | |
500003 | May 18, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after buf/bio changes. | |
500004 | May 26, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after binutils upgrade. | |
500005 | June 3, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after merging libxpg4 code into libc and after TASKQ interface introduction. | |
500006 | June 10, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after the addition of AGP interfaces. | |
500007 | June 29, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after Perl upgrade to 5.6.0 | |
500008 | July 7, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after the update of KAME code to 2000/07 sources. | |
500009 | July 14, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after | |
500010 | July 16, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after changing mtree defaults back to original variant, adding -L to follow symlinks. | |
500011 | July 18, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after kqueue API changed. | |
500012 | September 2, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after setproctitle(3) moved from libutil to libc. | |
500013 | September 10, 2000 | 5.0-CURRENT after the first SMPng commit. | |
500014 | January 4, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after <sys/select.h> moved to <sys/selinfo.h>. | |
500015 | January 10, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after combining libgcc.a and libgcc_r.a, and associated GCC linkage changes. | |
500016 | January 24, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after change allowing libc and libc_r to be linked together, deprecating -pthread option. | |
500017 | February 18, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after switch from struct ucred to struct xucred to stabilize kernel-exported API for mountd et al. | |
500018 | February 24, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after addition of CPUTYPE make variable for controlling CPU-specific optimizations. | |
500019 | June 9, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after moving machine/ioctl_fd.h to sys/fdcio.h | |
500020 | June 15, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after locale names renaming. | |
500021 | June 22, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after Bzip2 import. Also signifies removal of S/Key. | |
500022 | July 12, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after SSE support. | |
500023 | September 14, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after KSE Milestone 2. | |
500024 | October 1, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after d_thread_t, and moving UUCP to ports. | |
500025 | October 4, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after ABI change for descriptor and creds passing on 64 bit platforms. | |
500026 | October 9, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after moving to XFree86 4 by default for package builds, and after the new libc | |
500027 | October 10, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after the new libc | |
500028 | December 14, 2001 | 5.0-CURRENT after the userland components of smbfs were imported. | |
(not changed) | 5.0-CURRENT after the new C99 specific-width integer types were added. | ||
500029 | January 29, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after a change was made in the return value of sendfile(2). | |
500030 | February 15, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the introduction of the type | |
500031 | February 24, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the usb structure element rename. | |
500032 | March 16, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the introduction of Perl 5.6.1. | |
500033 | April 3, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the | |
500034 | April 30, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after | |
500035 | May 13, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT with Gcc 3.1. | |
500036 | May 17, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT without Perl in /usr/src | |
500037 | May 29, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the addition of dlfunc(3) | |
500038 | July 24, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the types of some struct sockbuf members were changed and the structure was reordered. | |
500039 | September 1, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after GCC 3.2.1 import. Also after headers stopped using BSD_FOO_T and started using _FOO_T_DECLARED. This value can also be used as a conservative estimate of the start of bzip2(1) package support. | |
500040 | September 20, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after various changes to disk functions were made in the name of removing dependency on disklabel structure internals. | |
500041 | October 1, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after the addition of getopt_long(3) to libc. | |
500042 | October 15, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after Binutils 2.13 upgrade, which included new FreeBSD emulation, vec, and output format. | |
500043 | November 1, 2002 | 5.0-CURRENT after adding weak pthread_XXX stubs to libc, obsoleting libXThrStub.so. 5.0-RELEASE. | |
500100 | January 17, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after branching for RELENG_5_0 | |
500101 | February 19, 2003 | <sys/dkstat.h> is empty. Do not include it. | |
500102 | February 25, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after the d_mmap_t interface change. | |
500103 | February 26, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after taskqueue_swi changed to run without Giant, and taskqueue_swi_giant added to run with Giant. | |
500104 | February 27, 2003 |
| |
500105 | March 4, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after new cdevsw initialization method. | |
500106 | March 8, 2003 |
| |
500107 | March 15, 2003 | Devstat interface change; see sys/sys/param.h 1.149 | |
500108 | March 15, 2003 | Token-Ring interface changes. | |
500109 | March 25, 2003 | Addition of vm_paddr_t. | |
500110 | March 28, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after realpath(3) has been made thread-safe | |
500111 | April 9, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after usbhid(3) has been synced with NetBSD | |
500112 | April 17, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after new NSS implementation and addition of POSIX.1 getpw*_r, getgr*_r functions | |
500113 | May 2, 2003 | 5.0-CURRENT after removal of the old rc system. | |
501000 | June 4, 2003 | 5.1-RELEASE. | |
501100 | June 2, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after branching for RELENG_5_1. | |
501101 | June 29, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after correcting the semantics of sigtimedwait(2) and sigwaitinfo(2). | |
501102 | July 3, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after adding the lockfunc and lockfuncarg fields to bus_dma_tag_create(9). | |
501103 | July 31, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after GCC 3.3.1-pre 20030711 snapshot integration. | |
501104 | August 5, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT 3ware API changes to twe. | |
501105 | August 17, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT dynamically-linked /bin and /sbin support and movement of libraries to /lib. | |
501106 | September 8, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after adding kernel support for Coda 6.x. | |
501107 | September 17, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after 16550 UART constants moved from <dev/sio/sioreg.h> to <dev/ic/ns16550.h>. Also when libmap functionality was unconditionally supported by rtld. | |
501108 | September 23, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after PFIL_HOOKS API update | |
501109 | September 27, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after adding kiconv(3) | |
501110 | September 28, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after changing default operations for open and close in cdevsw | |
501111 | October 16, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after changed layout of cdevsw | |
501112 | October 16, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after adding kobj multiple inheritance | |
501113 | October 31, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after the if_xname change in struct ifnet | |
501114 | November 16, 2003 | 5.1-CURRENT after changing /bin and /sbin to be dynamically linked | |
502000 | December 7, 2003 | 5.2-RELEASE | |
502010 | February 23, 2004 | 5.2.1-RELEASE | |
502100 | December 7, 2003 | 5.2-CURRENT after branching for RELENG_5_2 | |
502101 | December 19, 2003 | 5.2-CURRENT after cxa_atexit/cxa_finalize functions were added to libc. | |
502102 | January 30, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after change of default thread library from libc_r to libpthread. | |
502103 | February 21, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after device driver API megapatch. | |
502104 | February 25, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after | |
502105 | March 5, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after NULL is made into ((void *)0) for C, creating more warnings. | |
502106 | March 8, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after pf is linked to the build and install. | |
502107 | March 10, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after time_t is changed to a 64-bit value on sparc64. | |
502108 | March 12, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after Intel C/C++ compiler support in some headers and execve(2) changes to be more strictly conforming to POSIX. | |
502109 | March 22, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the introduction of the bus_alloc_resource_any API | |
502110 | March 27, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the addition of UTF-8 locales | |
502111 | April 11, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the removal of the getvfsent(3) API | |
502112 | April 13, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the addition of the .warning directive for make. | |
502113 | June 4, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after | |
502114 | June 13, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after import of the ALTQ framework. | |
502115 | June 14, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after changing sema_timedwait(9) to return 0 on success and a non-zero error code on failure. | |
502116 | June 16, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after changing kernel dev_t to be pointer to struct cdev *. | |
502117 | June 17, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after changing kernel udev_t to dev_t. | |
502118 | June 17, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after adding support for CLOCK_VIRTUAL and CLOCK_PROF to clock_gettime(2) and clock_getres(2). | |
502119 | June 22, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after changing network interface cloning overhaul. | |
502120 | July 2, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the update of the package tools to revision 20040629. | |
502121 | July 9, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after marking Bluetooth code as non-i386 specific. | |
502122 | July 11, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the introduction of the KDB debugger framework, the conversion of DDB into a backend and the introduction of the GDB backend. | |
502123 | July 12, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after change to make VFS_ROOT take a struct thread argument as does vflush. Struct kinfo_proc now has a user data pointer. The switch of the default X implementation to | |
502124 | July 24, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the change to separate the way ports rc.d and legacy scripts are started. | |
502125 | July 28, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the backout of the previous change. | |
502126 | July 31, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the removal of | |
502127 | August 2, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after changing the UMA kernel API to allow ctors/inits to fail. | |
502128 | August 8, 2004 | 5.2-CURRENT after the change of the vfs_mount signature as well as global replacement of PRISON_ROOT with SUSER_ALLOWJAIL for the suser(9) API. | |
503000 | August 23, 2004 | 5.3-BETA/RC before the pfil API change | |
503001 | September 22, 2004 | 5.3-RELEASE | |
503100 | October 16, 2004 | 5.3-STABLE after branching for RELENG_5_3 | |
503101 | December 3, 2004 | 5.3-STABLE after addition of glibc style strftime(3) padding options. | |
503102 | February 13, 2005 | 5.3-STABLE after OpenBSD’s nc(1) import MFC. | |
503103 | February 27, 2005 | 5.4-PRERELEASE after the MFC of the fixes in <src/include/stdbool.h> and <src/sys/i386/include/_types.h> for using the GCC-compatibility of the Intel C/C++ compiler. | |
503104 | February 28, 2005 | 5.4-PRERELEASE after the MFC of the change of ifi_epoch from wall clock time to uptime. | |
503105 | March 2, 2005 | 5.4-PRERELEASE after the MFC of the fix of EOVERFLOW check in vswprintf(3). | |
504000 | April 3, 2005 | 5.4-RELEASE. | |
504100 | April 3, 2005 | 5.4-STABLE after branching for RELENG_5_4 | |
504101 | May 11, 2005 | 5.4-STABLE after increasing the default thread stacksizes | |
504102 | June 24, 2005 | 5.4-STABLE after the addition of sha256 | |
504103 | October 3, 2005 | 5.4-STABLE after the MFC of if_bridge | |
504104 | November 13, 2005 | 5.4-STABLE after the MFC of bsdiff and portsnap | |
504105 | January 17, 2006 | 5.4-STABLE after MFC of ldconfig_local_dirs change. | |
505000 | May 12, 2006 | 5.5-RELEASE. | |
505100 | May 12, 2006 | 5.5-STABLE after branching for RELENG_5_5 |
18.11. FreeBSD 4 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
400000 | January 22, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after 3.4 branch | |
400001 | February 20, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after change in dynamic linker handling | |
400002 | March 13, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after C++ constructor/destructor order change | |
400003 | March 27, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after functioning dladdr(3) | |
400004 | April 5, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after __deregister_frame_info dynamic linker bug fix (also 4.0-CURRENT after EGCS 1.1.2 integration) | |
400005 | April 27, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after suser(9) API change (also 4.0-CURRENT after newbus) | |
400006 | May 31, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after cdevsw registration change | |
400007 | June 17, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after the addition of so_cred for socket level credentials | |
400008 | June 20, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after the addition of a poll syscall wrapper to libc_r | |
400009 | July 20, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after the change of the kernel’s | |
400010 | September 25, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after fixing a hole in jail(2) | |
400011 | September 29, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after the | |
400012 | November 15, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after the cutover to the GCC 2.95.2 compiler | |
400013 | December 4, 1999 | 4.0-CURRENT after adding pluggable linux-mode ioctl handlers | |
400014 | January 18, 2000 | 4.0-CURRENT after importing OpenSSL | |
400015 | January 27, 2000 | 4.0-CURRENT after the C++ ABI change in GCC 2.95.2 from -fvtable-thunks to -fno-vtable-thunks by default | |
400016 | February 27, 2000 | 4.0-CURRENT after importing OpenSSH | |
400017 | March 13, 2000 | 4.0-RELEASE | |
400018 | March 17, 2000 | 4.0-STABLE after 4.0-RELEASE | |
400019 | May 5, 2000 | 4.0-STABLE after the introduction of delayed checksums. | |
400020 | June 4, 2000 | 4.0-STABLE after merging libxpg4 code into libc. | |
400021 | July 8, 2000 | 4.0-STABLE after upgrading Binutils to 2.10.0, ELF branding changes, and tcsh in the base system. | |
410000 | July 14, 2000 | 4.1-RELEASE | |
410001 | July 29, 2000 | 4.1-STABLE after 4.1-RELEASE | |
410002 | September 16, 2000 | 4.1-STABLE after setproctitle(3) moved from libutil to libc. | |
411000 | September 25, 2000 | 4.1.1-RELEASE | |
411001 | 4.1.1-STABLE after 4.1.1-RELEASE | ||
420000 | October 31, 2000 | 4.2-RELEASE | |
420001 | January 10, 2001 | 4.2-STABLE after combining libgcc.a and libgcc_r.a, and associated GCC linkage changes. | |
430000 | March 6, 2001 | 4.3-RELEASE | |
430001 | May 18, 2001 | 4.3-STABLE after wint_t introduction. | |
430002 | July 22, 2001 | 4.3-STABLE after PCI powerstate API merge. | |
440000 | August 1, 2001 | 4.4-RELEASE | |
440001 | October 23, 2001 | 4.4-STABLE after d_thread_t introduction. | |
440002 | November 4, 2001 | 4.4-STABLE after mount structure changes (affects filesystem klds). | |
440003 | December 18, 2001 | 4.4-STABLE after the userland components of smbfs were imported. | |
450000 | December 20, 2001 | 4.5-RELEASE | |
450001 | February 24, 2002 | 4.5-STABLE after the usb structure element rename. | |
450002 | March 12, 2002 | 4.5-STABLE after locale changes. | |
450003 | (Never created) | ||
450004 | April 16, 2002 | 4.5-STABLE after the | |
450005 | April 27, 2002 | 4.5-STABLE after moving to XFree86 4 by default for package builds. | |
450006 | May 1, 2002 | 4.5-STABLE after accept filtering was fixed so that is no longer susceptible to an easy DoS. | |
460000 | June 21, 2002 | 4.6-RELEASE | |
460001 | June 21, 2002 | 4.6-STABLE sendfile(2) fixed to comply with documentation, not to count any headers sent against the amount of data to be sent from the file. | |
460002 | July 19, 2002 | 4.6.2-RELEASE | |
460100 | June 26, 2002 | 4.6-STABLE | |
460101 | June 26, 2002 | 4.6-STABLE after MFC of | |
460102 | September 1, 2002 | 4.6-STABLE after MFC of many new pkg_install features from the HEAD. | |
470000 | October 8, 2002 | 4.7-RELEASE | |
470100 | October 9, 2002 | 4.7-STABLE | |
470101 | November 10, 2002 | Start generated std{in,out,err}p references rather than sF. This changes std{in,out,err} from a compile time expression to a runtime one. | |
470102 | January 23, 2003 | 4.7-STABLE after MFC of mbuf changes to replace m_aux mbufs by m_tag’s | |
470103 | February 14, 2003 | 4.7-STABLE gets OpenSSL 0.9.7 | |
480000 | March 30, 2003 | 4.8-RELEASE | |
480100 | April 5, 2003 | 4.8-STABLE | |
480101 | May 22, 2003 | 4.8-STABLE after realpath(3) has been made thread-safe | |
480102 | August 10, 2003 | 4.8-STABLE 3ware API changes to twe. | |
490000 | October 27, 2003 | 4.9-RELEASE | |
490100 | October 27, 2003 | 4.9-STABLE | |
490101 | January 8, 2004 | 4.9-STABLE after e_sid was added to struct kinfo_eproc. | |
490102 | February 4, 2004 | 4.9-STABLE after MFC of libmap functionality for rtld. | |
491000 | May 25, 2004 | 4.10-RELEASE | |
491100 | June 1, 2004 | 4.10-STABLE | |
491101 | August 11, 2004 | 4.10-STABLE after MFC of revision 20040629 of the package tools | |
491102 | November 16, 2004 | 4.10-STABLE after VM fix dealing with unwiring of fictitious pages | |
492000 | December 17, 2004 | 4.11-RELEASE | |
492100 | December 17, 2004 | 4.11-STABLE | |
492101 | April 18, 2006 | 4.11-STABLE after adding libdata/ldconfig directories to mtree files. |
18.12. FreeBSD 3 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
300000 | February 19, 1996 | 3.0-CURRENT before mount(2) change | |
300001 | September 24, 1997 | 3.0-CURRENT after mount(2) change | |
300002 | June 2, 1998 | 3.0-CURRENT after semctl(2) change | |
300003 | June 7, 1998 | 3.0-CURRENT after ioctl arg changes | |
300004 | September 3, 1998 | 3.0-CURRENT after ELF conversion | |
300005 | October 16, 1998 | 3.0-RELEASE | |
300006 | October 16, 1998 | 3.0-CURRENT after 3.0-RELEASE | |
300007 | January 22, 1999 | 3.0-STABLE after 3/4 branch | |
310000 | February 9, 1999 | 3.1-RELEASE | |
310001 | March 27, 1999 | 3.1-STABLE after 3.1-RELEASE | |
310002 | April 14, 1999 | 3.1-STABLE after C++ constructor/destructor order change | |
320000 | 3.2-RELEASE | ||
320001 | May 8, 1999 | 3.2-STABLE | |
320002 | August 29, 1999 | 3.2-STABLE after binary-incompatible IPFW and socket changes | |
330000 | September 2, 1999 | 3.3-RELEASE | |
330001 | September 16, 1999 | 3.3-STABLE | |
330002 | November 24, 1999 | 3.3-STABLE after adding mkstemp(3) to libc | |
340000 | December 5, 1999 | 3.4-RELEASE | |
340001 | December 17, 1999 | 3.4-STABLE | |
350000 | June 20, 2000 | 3.5-RELEASE | |
350001 | July 12, 2000 | 3.5-STABLE |
18.13. FreeBSD 2.2 Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
220000 | February 19, 1997 | 2.2-RELEASE | |
(not changed) | 2.2.1-RELEASE | ||
(not changed) | 2.2-STABLE after 2.2.1-RELEASE | ||
221001 | April 15, 1997 | 2.2-STABLE after texinfo-3.9 | |
221002 | April 30, 1997 | 2.2-STABLE after top | |
222000 | May 16, 1997 | 2.2.2-RELEASE | |
222001 | May 19, 1997 | 2.2-STABLE after 2.2.2-RELEASE | |
225000 | October 2, 1997 | 2.2.5-RELEASE | |
225001 | November 20, 1997 | 2.2-STABLE after 2.2.5-RELEASE | |
225002 | December 27, 1997 | 2.2-STABLE after ldconfig -R merge | |
226000 | March 24, 1998 | 2.2.6-RELEASE | |
227000 | July 21, 1998 | 2.2.7-RELEASE | |
227001 | July 21, 1998 | 2.2-STABLE after 2.2.7-RELEASE | |
227002 | September 19, 1998 | 2.2-STABLE after semctl(2) change | |
228000 | November 29, 1998 | 2.2.8-RELEASE | |
228001 | November 29, 1998 | 2.2-STABLE after 2.2.8-RELEASE |
Note that 2.2-STABLE sometimes identifies itself as "2.2.5-STABLE" after the 2.2.5-RELEASE. The pattern used to be year followed by the month, but we decided to change it to a more straightforward major/minor system starting from 2.2. This is because the parallel development on several branches made it infeasible to classify the releases merely by their real release dates. Do not worry about old -CURRENTs; they are listed here just for reference. |
18.14. FreeBSD 2 Before 2.2-RELEASE Versions
Value | Revision | Date | Release |
---|---|---|---|
119411 | 2.0-RELEASE | ||
199501 | March 19, 1995 | 2.1-CURRENT | |
199503 | March 24, 1995 | 2.1-CURRENT | |
199504 | April 9, 1995 | 2.0.5-RELEASE | |
199508 | August 26, 1995 | 2.2-CURRENT before 2.1 | |
199511 | November 10, 1995 | 2.1.0-RELEASE | |
199512 | November 10, 1995 | 2.2-CURRENT before 2.1.5 | |
199607 | July 10, 1996 | 2.1.5-RELEASE | |
199608 | July 12, 1996 | 2.2-CURRENT before 2.1.6 | |
199612 | November 15, 1996 | 2.1.6-RELEASE | |
199612 | 2.1.7-RELEASE |
最後修改於: December 11, 2021 由 Sergio Carlavilla Delgado